Umts Guide

CP13 - Introduction to UMTS
CP13 - Introduction to UMTS TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY - THIS MANUAL WILL NOT BE UPDATED
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Copyrights The Motorola products described in this document may include copyrighted Motorola computer programs stored in semiconductor memories or other media. Laws in the United States and other countries preserve for Motorola certain exclusive rights for copyright computer programs, including the exclusive right to copy or reproduce in any form the copyright computer program. Accordingly, any copyright Motorola computer programs contained in the Motorola products described in this document may not be copied or reproduced in any manner without the express written permission of Motorola. Furthermore, the purchase of Motorola products shall not be deemed to grant either directly or by implication, estoppel or otherwise, any license under the copyrights, patents or patent applications of Motorola, except for the rights that arise by operation of law in the sale of a product. Restrictions The software described in this document is the property of Motorola. It is furnished under a license agreement and may be used and/or disclosed only in accordance with the terms of the agreement. Software and documentation are copyright materials. Making unauthorized copies is prohibited by law. No part of the software or documentation may be reproduced, transmitted, transcribed, stored in a retrieval system, or translated into any language or computer language, in any form or by any means, without prior written permission of Motorola. Accuracy While reasonable efforts have been made to assure the accuracy of this document, Motorola assumes no liability resulting from any inaccuracies or omissions in this document, or from the use of the information obtained herein. Motorola reserves the right to make changes to any products described herein to improve reliability, function, or design, and reserves the right to revise this document and to make changes from time to time in content hereof with no obligation to notify any person of revisions or changes. Motorola does not assume any liability arising out of the application or use of any product or circuit described herein; neither does it convey license under its patent rights of others. Trademarks Motorola and the Motorola logo are registered trademarks of Motorola Inc. Intelligence Everywhere, M-Cell and Taskfinder are trademarks of Motorola Inc. All other brands and corporate names are trademarks of their respective owners.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Contents


General information . . . . . . . . . Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . ETSI standards. . . . . . . . . . Feature references . . . . . . . . Cross references . . . . . . . . . Data encryption . . . . . . . . . Text conventions . . . . . . . . . Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output . . . . . . . . . . . . Special key sequences . . . . Reporting safety issues . . . . . . . . Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . Warnings and cautions . . . . . . . . Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition of Warning . . . . . Example and format . . . . . Failure to comply with warnings. . Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . Definition of Caution . . . . . Example and format . . . . . General warnings. . . . . . . . . . . Warning labels . . . . . . . . . . Specific warnings. . . . . . . . . Potentially hazardous voltage Electric shock . . . . . . . . RF radiation . . . . . . . . . Laser radiation . . . . . . . . Lifting equipment . . . . . . . Parts substitution . . . . . . . Battery supplies . . . . . . . Lithium batteries . . . . . . . General cautions . . . . . . . . . . . Caution labels . . . . . . . . . . Specific cautions . . . . . . . . . Fibre optics . . . . . . . . . Static discharge . . . . . . . Devices sensitive to static . . . . . . Special handling techniques . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 2 2 3 3 4 4 4 4 4 5 5 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 7 7 7 7 7 8 8 8 8 8 8 9 9 9 9 9 10 10
Chapter 1: Introduction
Objectives . . . . . . . UMTS Services. . . . . IMT-2000 Roadmap . . IMT-2000 Objectives . . Research and Proposal. Proposals . . . . . Standardisation (1998) . 3GPP . . . . . . . 3GPP2 . . . . . . . Harmonisation (1999). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3 1-4 1-6 1-8 1-10 1-10 1-12 1-12 1-12 1-14
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Contents
CDMA-2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-carrier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct-Sequence (DS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Permitted Carrier Combinations . . . . . . . . . . . . CDMA2000 Evolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spreading Rate 3 (SR3) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . cdma2000 1x Evolution - Data Only (1xEV-DO) . . . cdma2000 1x Evolution - Data and Voice (1xEV-DV) UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA) . . . . . . . . . . FDD Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UTRA TDD Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . World-wide Spectrum Allocation for IMT-2000. . . . . . . . WARC 92 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WARC 2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . European Frequency Allocations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Licence Allocation in the UK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-16 1-16 1-16 1-16 1-18 1-18 1-18 1-18 1-20 1-20 1-22 1-24 1-24 1-24 1-26 1-28
Chapter 2: Network Architecture

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UMTS Domains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Domain split . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User equipment Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mobile equipment Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USIM Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Infrastructure Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access Network Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Core Network Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Serving Network Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Home Network Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transit Network Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UMTS Architecture - Release 1999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Core Network (CN) Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CS Domain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PS Domain. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entities Common to the CS and PS domains . . . . . . . . The Access Network (AN) Entities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Base Station System (BSS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Radio Network System (RNS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Mobile Station (MS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UMTS Network - Release 1999 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Entities of the CN-CS Domain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Mobile Services Switching Centre (MSC). . . . . . . . The Gateway MSC (GMSC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Visitor Location Register (VLR) . . . . . . . . . . . . Entities Common to the CS and PS Domains . . . . . . . . . . The Home Location Register (HLR). . . . . . . . . . . . . The Authentication Centre (AuC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Equipment Identity Register (EIR) . . . . . . . . . . . UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN) . . . . . . . . . UTRAN Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions related to overall system access control . . . . . Radio channel ciphering and deciphering . . . . . . . . . . Functions related to mobility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Functions related to radio resource management and control Functions related to broadcast and multicast services . . . Radio network Controller (RNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Radio Network Controller (CRNC). . . . . . . . . . Serving Radio Network Controller (SRNC) . . . . . . . . . . . Drift Radio Network Controller (DRNC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-4 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-6 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-8 2-10 2-10 2-10 2-10 2-12 2-12 2-12 2-12 2-12 2-14 2-14 2-14 2-14 2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 2-16 2-18 2-18 2-20 2-22
ii
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Contents
Node B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wideband Digital Modem (WDM) . . . . . . . . . . The Wideband Transceiver (WBX) . . . . . . . . . Linear Power Amplifier (LPA) . . . . . . . . . . . . User Equipment (UE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to User Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . UE Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integrated Circuit (IC) Card . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Equipment (TE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mobile Equipment (ME). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TAF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MT . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MT Functionality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mandatory Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Additional Features. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Evolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product evolution. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using IP options on the open interfaces . . . . Separation of bearer and control . . . . . . . . Adding Iu-CS and MSC functionality . . . . . . Adding access independent multimedia overlay. Application Servers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-24 2-24 2-24 2-24 2-26 2-26 2-28 2-28 2-30 2-30 2-30 2-30 2-32 2-32 2-32 2-34 2-34 2-34 2-34 2-36 2-36 2-36
Chapter 3: Network Services

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Classification of Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Teleservices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bearer Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supplementary services . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multimedia services: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Service Capabilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Description of Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Information Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connection oriented / connectionless services Traffic type. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Point-to-Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uni-Directional Point-to-Multipoint . . . . . . Information Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum transfer delay . . . . . . . . . . . Delay variation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bit Error Ratio (BER) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Supported Bit Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Quality of Service. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conversational Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Interactive class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Streaming Class . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Background Task . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QoS Attributes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum bitrate (kbps). . . . . . . . . . . . . . Guaranteed bitrate (kbps) . . . . . . . . . . . . Delivery order (y/n) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum SDU size (octets) . . . . . . . . . . . SDU format information (bits) . . . . . . . . . . . SDU error ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Residual bit error ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delivery of erroneous SDUs (y/n/-) . . . . . . . . Transfer delay (ms). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-4 3-6 3-6 3-6 3-6 3-8 3-8 3-8 3-10 3-10 3-10 3-10 3-10 3-12 3-14 3-14 3-14 3-14 3-14 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16 3-16
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
iii
Contents
Traffic handling priority . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allocation/Retention Priority . . . . . . . . . . The Security Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Security and Privacy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User authentication: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network authentication: . . . . . . . . . . . . Confidentiality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mobile equipment identification . . . . . . . . . Authentication and Key Agreement . . . . . . . . . Distribution of authentication data from HE to SN Authentication and Key Agreement . . . . . . . Ciphering Algorithms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F8 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F9 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generation of Authentication Vectors/Tokens . . . . SQN and RAND . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Authentication Key Management Field . . . . . Algorithms f1 -f5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AUTN and AV . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . USIM Authentication Function . . . . . . . . . . . Retrieval of SQN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Computation of X-MAC . . . . . . . . . . . . Verification of SQN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Computation of CK and IK . . . . . . . . . . . User Authentication Response . . . . . . . . . Access Link Data Integrity . . . . . . . . . . . . . Data integrity protection method . . . . . . . . Input parameters to the integrity algorithm . . . COUNT-I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . IK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . FRESH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MESSAGE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ciphering of User/Signalling Data . . . . . . . . . . Input parameters to the cipher algorithm . . . . COUNT-C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . BEARER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DIRECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LENGTH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-16 3-16 3-18 3-20 3-20 3-20 3-20 3-20 3-20 3-22 3-22 3-22 3-24 3-24 3-24 3-26 3-26 3-26 3-26 3-26 3-28 3-28 3-28 3-28 3-28 3-28 3-30 3-30 3-30 3-30 3-30 3-30 3-30 3-30 3-32 3-32 3-32 3-32 3-32 3-32 3-32
Chapter 4: UMTS Protocols

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Introduction to UMTS Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . Access Stratum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Non-Access Stratum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Protocol Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Horizontal Layers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Vertical Planes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Plane . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transport Network Control Plane . . . . . . Transport Network User Plane . . . . . . . IuCS Protocol Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Plane Protocol Stack . . . . . . . . . . Transport Network Control Plane Protocol Stack User Plane Protocol Stack . . . . . . . . . . . IuPS Protocol Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3 4-4 4-4 4-4 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-6 4-8 4-8 4-8 4-8 4-10
iv
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Contents
Control Plane Protocol Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transport Network Control Plane Protocol Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Plane Protocol Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Iub Protocol Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Plane Protocol Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transport Network Control Plane Protocol Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Plane Protocol Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Iur Protocol Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Plane Protocol Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transport Network Control Plane Protocol Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Plane Protocol Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio Interface Protocol Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RRC Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Broadcast of information provided by the non-access stratum (Core Network) . . . . . . . . . Broadcast of information related to the access stratum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Establishment, re-establishment, maintenance and release of an RRC connection between the UE and UTRAN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Establishment, reconfiguration and release of Radio Bearers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assignment, reconfiguration and release of radio resources for the RRC connection . . . . . RRC connection mobility functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paging/notification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Routing of higher layer PDUs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control of requested QoS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UE measurement reporting and control of the reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Outer loop power control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control of ciphering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Arbitration of radio resources on uplink DCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial cell selection and re-selection in idle mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Integrity protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allocation of radio resources for CBS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuration for CBS discontinuous reception . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RLC Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAC Layer Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Mapping between logical and Transport channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transport format selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MAC Multiplexing Algorithm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic Scheduling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Identification of UEs on Common Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MUX/DEMUX of PDUs into Transport Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Traffic Volume Monitoring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dynamic Transport Channel Type Switching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Ciphering. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Access Service Class Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Protocol Stacks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Plane Protocol Stack (Dedicated Channels CS-Domain). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Iu UP Frame Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dedicated Channel Frame Protocol (DCH FP) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Plane Protocol Stack (UE-CN SIGNALLING, Dedicated Channels, CS-Domain & PS-Domain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RANAP Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SCCP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MTP3-B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAAL-NNI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Plane Protocol Stack (UE-CN Signalling, Shared Channels, CS-Domain) . . . . . . . RACH/FACH Frame Protocol . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . User Plane Protocol Stack (Dedicated Channels, PS-Domain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . GPRS Tunnelling Protocol, User Plane (GTP-U) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Path Protocols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4-10 4-10 4-10 4-12 4-12 4-12 4-12 4-14 4-14 4-14 4-14 4-16 4-18 4-18 4-18 4-18 4-18 4-18 4-18 4-20 4-20 4-20 4-20 4-20 4-22 4-22 4-22 4-22 4-22 4-22 4-24 4-26 4-26 4-26 4-26 4-26 4-26 4-26 4-28 4-28 4-28 4-28 4-30 4-30 4-30 4-32 4-34 4-34 4-34 4-34 4-34 4-36 4-36 4-38 4-38 4-38
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Contents
Chapter 5: Data Flow and Terrestrial Interfaces

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terrestrial Interfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) . . . . . Virtual Channels and Paths . . . . . . . . . . Use of Virtual Channels and Paths . . . . Virtual Channel Link . . . . . . . . . Virtual Channel Connection. . . . . . Virtual Path Link . . . . . . . . . . . Virtual Path Connection . . . . . . . Virtual Path and Virtual Connection Switching. ATM Adaptation Layers (AALs) . . . . . . . . The ATM Adaptation Process . . . . . . . . . Convergence Sub-Layer (CS) . . . . . . Segmentation and Reassembly (SAR) . . ATM Adaptation Layer 2 (AAL2) . . . . . . . CPCS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL 5) . . . . . . . E1/T1 Architecture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logical Links . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Cell to E1 Cell Mapping . . . . . . . . . E1 Link Multiplexing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) . . . . . . Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH) . . . . . SDH Drop and Insert . . . . . . . . . . . . . Network Simplification . . . . . . . . . . Survivability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Software Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bandwidth on Demand . . . . . . . . . . Principles of SDH. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Typical UMTS Transport Network . . . . . . . Daisy Chaining . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . ATM Protection Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3 5-4 5-6 5-8 5-10 5-10 5-10 5-10 5-10 5-10 5-12 5-14 5-16 5-16 5-16 5-18 5-18 5-20 5-22 5-22 5-22 5-22 5-24 5-26 5-28 5-30 5-32 5-32 5-32 5-32 5-32 5-34 5-36 5-36 5-36 5-36
Chapter 6: W-CDMA Theory

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Multiple Access Schemes . . . . . . . . . . . Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA) Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) . . . Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) . . . W-CDMA Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-Use of Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Re-Use of Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spectral Efficiency (GSM and UMTS) . . . . . . Direct Spread (DS)-CDMA Implementation . . . Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Spreading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . De-spreading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Orthogonal Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channelisation Code Tree . . . . . . . . . De-spreading Other Users Signals . . . . . . . Processing Gain . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise 1 - Spreading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 6-4 6-4 6-4 6-4 6-6 6-8 6-10 6-12 6-14 6-14 6-14 6-16 6-18 6-20 6-20 6-22 6-24 6-26
vi
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Contents
NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Exercise 2 - Spreading/Despreading . . . . Exercise 3 - Spreading/Despreading . . . . Scrambling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scrambling Codes vs Channelisaton Codes Short Codes vs Long Codes . . . . . . . . Scrambling and Summation . . . . . . . . De-Scrambling and Data Recovery . . . . . Multi-path Radio Channels . . . . . . . . . Inter-symbol Interference . . . . . . . . Signal Fade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Matched Filter Operation . . . . . . . . . . The Rake Receiver . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . .
6-26 6-28 6-30 6-32 6-34 6-36 6-38 6-40 6-42 6-42 6-42 6-44 6-46
Chapter 7: The Physical Layer

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Layer Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of Transmission. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downlink Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uplink Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channels on the Air Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Logical Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH) . . . . . . . . . . Paging Control Channel (PCCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Control Channel (CCCH) . . . . . . . . . . . Dedicated Control Channel (DCCH) . . . . . . . . . . Traffic Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dedicated Traffic Channel (DTCH) . . . . . . . . . . . Common Traffic Channel (CTCH). . . . . . . . . . . . Transport Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Random Access Channel (RACH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . Forward Access Channel (FACH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . Broadcast Channel (BCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paging Channel (PCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dedicated Channel (DCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Physical Channels (CPCHs) . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Generic Frame Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Timeslot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronisation Channel (SCH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Primary SCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . The Secondary SCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modulation Symbol "a" . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronisation (Cell Search) Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 1: Slot synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Step 2: Frame synchronisation and code-group identification Step 3: Scrambling-code identification . . . . . . . . . . . Synchronisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Primary Common Pilot Channel (P-CPICH) . . . . . . . . . Secondary Common Pilot Channel (S-CPICH) . . . . . . . P-CCPCH Frame Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3 7-4 7-6 7-8 7-8 7-8 7-10 7-12 7-14 7-14 7-14 7-14 7-14 7-14 7-14 7-14 7-14 7-16 7-16 7-16 7-16 7-16 7-16 7-18 7-18 7-20 7-20 7-22 7-22 7-22 7-22 7-24 7-24 7-24 7-24 7-26 7-26 7-26 7-26 7-27 7-30 7-30 7-30 7-32
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
vii
Contents
SCH and P-CCPCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paging Indicator Channel (PICH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PICH Channel Structure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Discontinuous Reception (DRX) on the PICH . . . . . . . . . DRX Cycle length. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paging Occasion. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paging Indicator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Secondary Common Control Physical Channel (S-CCPCH) . . . . Secondary CCPCH Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the PRACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Random Access Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . PRACH Pre-amble . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Structure of the random-access transmission . . . . . . . . . Structure of PRACH Message Part . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Acquisition Indicator Channel (AICH) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Relationship Between PRACH and AICH . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downlink Dedicated Physical Channels (DL-DPCH). . . . . . . . DL-DPCH Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Downlink Slot Formation in Case of Multi-Code Transmission . Uplink Dedicated Physical channels (UL-DPCH) . . . . . . . . . Downlink Flow Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Uplink Flow Process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio Frame Equalisation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rate Matching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DTX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7-34 7-36 7-36 7-38 7-38 7-38 7-38 7-40 7-41 7-42 7-42 7-42 7-42 7-43 7-44 7-46 7-48 7-50 7-50 7-52 7-54 7-56 7-58 7-58 7-58 7-58
Chapter 8: Radio Resource Management Functions

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Radio Resource Management . . . . . . . . UE RRC States. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Idle Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connected Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell DCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell FACH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell PCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . URA PCH . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RRC State Change Support via Iur . . . . Physical Layer Measurements . . . . . . . . UE Measurements . . . . . . . . . . . . CPICH RSCP . . . . . . . . . . . . SIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UTRA carrier RSSI . . . . . . . . . . GSM carrier RSSI . . . . . . . . . . CPICH Ec/No . . . . . . . . . . . . Transport channel BLER . . . . . . . UE transmitted power . . . . . . . . UE Rx-Tx time difference . . . . . . . The Observed time difference to GSM UTRA Measurements . . . . . . . . . . RSSI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SIR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmitted carrier power . . . . . . Transmitted code power . . . . . . . Transport channel BER. . . . . . . . Physical channel BER . . . . . . . . Round Trip Time . . . . . . . . . . . PRACH Propagation delay . . . . . . Acknowledged PRACH preambles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3 8-4 8-6 8-6 8-6 8-6 8-6 8-8 8-8 8-8 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-10 8-12 8-12 8-12 8-12 8-12 8-12 8-12 8-12 8-12 8-12
viii
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Contents
Compressed Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressed mode by puncturing . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressed mode by reducing the spreading factor by 2 . Compressed mode by higher layer scheduling . . . . . . Cell Selection/Re-selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Re-selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Macro Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handover Strategy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Handover Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soft and Softer Handover. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . S-RNS Relocation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Open Loop Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed Loop using the Inner Loop method . . . . . . . . Closed Loop using the Outer Loop method . . . . . . . . Site Selection Diversity Power Control (SSDT) . . . . . . Open Loop Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed Loop Power Control (Inner Loop) . . . . . . . . . . . Closed Loop Power Control (Outer Loop) . . . . . . . . . . . Multi-Cell Power Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Site Select Diversity Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Space Time Transmit Diversity (STTD) . . . . . . . . . . . . Closed Loop Mode Transmit diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . Admission Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Call Admission Control (CAC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . System Load . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Load Congestion Control (LCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detailed Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cell Breathing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Detailed Explanation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hierarchical Cell Structure Layered Cell Traffic Absorption .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
8-14 8-14 8-14 8-14 8-16 8-16 8-18 8-20 8-20 8-20 8-22 8-24 8-26 8-26 8-26 8-26 8-26 8-28 8-30 8-32 8-34 8-36 8-38 8-40 8-42 8-42 8-42 8-44 8-44 8-46 8-46 8-48
Chapter 9: HSDPA Overview

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access) for WCDMA . . . . . . . . Feature Study . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compatibility with Release 99 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Demand for Packet Switched Traffic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSDPA Targets. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Higher Data Rates for Streaming-, Interactive- and Background Services Consideration of UE Processing Time and Memory Requirements . . . Higher Spectrum Efficiency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Small Changes to existing Techniques and Architectures . . . . . . . . Efficient Resource Sharing in Downlink among Users . . . . . . . . . HSDPA Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Modulation Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Higher Throughput Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . AMC (Adaptive Modulation and Coding) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Hybrid ARQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission and Retransmission Scheduling in NodeB . . . . . . . . QPSK versus 16-QAM Modulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . QPSK . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16QAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Maximum Throughput Rates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . UMTS Rel. 99 / Rel. 4 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HSDPA Rel. 5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Important Changes for HSDPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New 2 ms Subframe for HSDPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3 9-4 9-4 9-4 9-4 9-6 9-6 9-6 9-6 9-6 9-6 9-8 9-8 9-8 9-8 9-8 9-8 9-10 9-10 9-10 9-12 9-12 9-12 9-14 9-14
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
ix
Contents
New Physical Channels and Transport Channel with HSDPA . . . No Fast Power Control and variable Spreading Factor . . . . . . New UE Capabilities / Categories. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . New MAC-hs in NodeB and UE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Impact on NBAP and Frame Protocol Procedure . . . . . . . . . New Channels with HSDPA. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transport Channel: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . HS-DSCH (High Speed Downlink Shared Channel) . . . . . . Physical Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Speed Shared Control Channel (HS-SCCH). . . . . . . High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel (HS-PDSCH) Uplink Dedicated Control Channel Associated with HS-DSCH HS-DPCCH). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Future Enhancements of HSDPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Beamforming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmit Diversity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIMO . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Preview to HSUPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Total available Transmission Power. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Much larger Dynamic of the UL Power Control . . . . . . . . . . UL does not suffer from Channelization Code Shortage . . . . . . Fast Power Control cannot be abandoned in UL . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Uplink . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
9-14 9-14 9-14 9-14 9-14 9-16 9-16 9-16 9-16 9-16 9-16 9-16 9-18 9-18 9-18 9-18 9-20 9-20 9-20 9-20 9-20
Chapter 10: Annexe A

Objectives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Paging for a UE in Idle Mode . . . . . . . . Paging for the UE in RRC Connected Mode RRC Connection Establishment . . . . . . RRC DCH Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . RA Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SRNC Relocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3 10-4 10-6 10-8 10-10 10-12 10-14
Chapter 11: Glossary

Glossary of technical terms . A Interface - AUTO . . . B Interface - Byte. . . . C - CW . . . . . . . . . D Interface - DYNET . . E - EXEC. . . . . . . . F Interface - Full Rate . G Interface - GWY . . . H Interface - Hyperframe I - IWU . . . . . . . . . k - KW . . . . . . . . . L1 - LV . . . . . . . . . M - MUX . . . . . . . . NACK - nW. . . . . . . O - Overlap. . . . . . . PA - PXPDN . . . . . . QA- Quiesent mode . . R - RXU . . . . . . . . S7- SYSGEN. . . . . . T -TxBPF. . . . . . . . U - UUS . . . . . . . . V - VTX host . . . . . . W - WWW . . . . . . . X - X Window. . . . . . ZC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 11-3 11-7 11-11 11-19 11-24 11-27 11-31 11-33 11-35 11-40 11-40 11-43 11-49 11-52 11-54 11-61 11-61 11-67 11-76 11-82 11-84 11-86 11-87 11-87
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
About This Manual
Version 1 Rev 0

MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
General information
General information
Important notice
Motorola disclaims all liability whatsoever, implied or express, for any risk of damage, loss or reduction in system performance arising directly or indirectly out of the failure of the customer, or any one acting on the customers behalf, to abide by the instructions, system parameters or recommendations made in Motorola Customer Product Documentation. If this manual was obtained when attending a Motorola training course, it will not be updated or amended by Motorola. It is intended for TRAINING PURPOSES ONLY. If it was supplied under normal operational circumstances, to support a major software release, then corrections will be supplied automatically by Motorola in the form of General Manual Revisions (GMRs).
Purpose
Motorola Technical Training manuals are intended to support the delivery of Technical Training only and are not intended to replace the use of Motorola Customer Product Documentation. WARNING Failure to comply with Motorolas operation, installation and maintenance instructions may, in exceptional circumstances, lead to serious injury or death.
These manuals are not intended to replace the system and equipment training offered by Motorola, although they can be used to supplement and enhance the knowledge gained through such training.
ETSI standards
The standards in the table below able are protected by copyright and are the property of the European Telecommunications Standards Institue (ETSI). ETSI specification number GSM 02.60 GSM 03.60 GSM 03.64 GSM 04.01 GSM 04.02 GSM 04.03 GSM 04.04 GSM 04.05 GSM 04.06 GSM 04.07 GSM 04.08 GSM 04.10 GSM 04.11 GSM 04.12 GSM 04.13 GSM 04.60 GSM 04.64 GSM 04.65 GSM 08.01 GSM 08.02 GSM 08.04 GSM 08.06 GSM 08.08 GSM 08.16 GSM 08.18 GSM 08.51 GSM 08.52 GSM 08.54 GSM 08.56 GSM 08.58 GSM 09.18 GSM 09.60
Figures from the above cited technical specifications standards are used, in this training manual, with the permission of ETSI. Further use, modification, or redistribution is strictly prohibited. ETSI standards are available from http://pda.etsi.org/pda/ and http://etsi.org/eds/
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
General information
Version 1 Rev 0
General information
Feature references
Most of the manuals in the set, of which this manual is part, are revised to accommodate features released at Motorola General System Releases (GSRn) or GPRS Support Node (GSNn) releases. In these manuals, new and amended features are tagged to help users to assess the impact on installed networks. The tags are the appropriate Motorola Roadmap DataBase (RDB) numbers or Research and Development Prioritization (RDP) numbers. The tags include index references which are listed in the manual Index. The Index includes the entry feature which is followed by a list of the RDB or RDP numbers for the released features, with page references and hot links in electronic copy. The tags have the format: {nnnn} or {nnnnn} Where: {nnnn} {nnnnn} The tags are positioned in text as follows: Table 1 New and amended feature information New sentence/s or new or amended text. Complete new blocks of text as follows: Full sections under a main heading Full paragraphs under subheadings Tag position in text Immediately before the affected text. Immediately after the headings as follows: Main heading Subheading is: the RDB number the RDP number
New or amended complete Figures and Tables Warning, Caution and Note boxes. General command syntax, operator input or displays (in special fonts).
After the Figure or Table number and before the title text. Immediately before the affected text in the box. On a separate line immediately above the affected item.
For a list of Roadmap numbers and the RDB or RDP numbers of the features included in this software release, refer to the manualSystem Information: GSM Overview (68P02901W01), or to the manual System Information: GPRS Overview (68P02903W01).
Cross references
Throughout this manual, references are made to external publications, chapter numbers and section names. The references to external publications are shown in italics, chapter and section name cross references are emphasised blue in text. This manual is divided into uniquely identified and numbered chapters that, in turn, are divided into sections. Sections are not numbered, but are individually named at the top of each page???, and are listed in the table of contents.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
General information
General information
Data encryption
In order to avoid electronic eavesdropping, data passing between certain elements in the GSM and GPRS network is encrypted. In order to comply with the export and import requirements of particular countries, this encryption occurs at different levels as individually standardised, or may not be present at all in some parts of the network in which it is normally implemented. The manual set, of which this manual is a part, covers encryption as if fully implemented. Because the rules differ in individual countries, limitations on the encryption included in the particular software being delivered, are covered in the Release Notes that accompany the individual software release.
Text conventions
The following conventions are used in the Motorola cellular infrastructure manuals to represent keyboard input text, screen output text and special key sequences. Input Characters typed in at the keyboard are shown like this. Output
Messages, prompts, file listings, directories, utilities, and environmental variables that appear on the screen are shown like this.
Special key sequences Special key sequences are represented as follows: CTRL-c ALT-f CR or RETURN Press the Control and c keys at the same time. Press the Alt and f keys at the same time. Press the pipe symbol key. Press the Return key.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Reporting safety issues
Version 1 Rev 0
Reporting safety issues

Whenever a safety issue arises, carry out the following procedure in all instances. Ensure that all site personnel are familiar with this procedure.
Procedure
Whenever a safety issue arises: Safety issue reporting 1 2 3 Make the equipment concerned safe, for example by removing power. Make no further attempt to adjust or rectify the equipment. Report the problem directly to the Customer Network Resolution Centre, Swindon +44 (0)1793 565444 or China +86 10 88417733 (telephone) and follow up with a written report by fax, Swindon +44 (0)1793 430987 or China +86 10 68423633 (fax). Collect evidence from the equipment under the guidance of the Customer Network Resolution Centre.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Warnings and cautions
Warnings and cautions

The following describes how warnings and cautions are used in this manual and in all manuals of this Motorola manual set.
Warnings
A definition and example follow below: Definition of Warning A warning is used to alert the reader to possible hazards that could cause loss of life, physical injury, or ill health. This includes hazards introduced during maintenance, for example, the use of adhesives and solvents, as well as those inherent in the equipment. Example and format WARNING Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or data in/out connectors. Laser radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.
Failure to comply with warnings

Observe all warnings during all phases of operation, installation and maintenance of the equipment described in the Motorola manuals. Failure to comply with these warnings, or with specific warnings elsewhere in the Motorola manuals, or on the equipment itself, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customers failure to comply with these requirements.
Cautions
A definition and example follow below: Definition of Caution A caution means that there is a possibility of damage to systems, software or individual items of equipment within a system. However, this presents no danger to personnel. Example and format CAUTION Do not use test equipment that is beyond its due calibration date; arrange for calibration to be carried out.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
General warnings
Version 1 Rev 0
General warnings
Observe the following specific warnings during all phases of operation, installation and maintenance of the equipment described in the Motorola manuals: Potentially hazardous voltage. Electric shock. RF radiation. Laser radiation. Heavy equipment. Parts substitution. Battery supplies. Lithium batteries,
Failure to comply with these warnings, or with specific warnings elsewhere in the Motorola manuals, violates safety standards of design, manufacture and intended use of the equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customers failure to comply with these requirements.
Warning labels
Warnings particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned on the equipment. Personnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any warning labels fitted to the equipment. Warning labels must not be removed, painted over or obscured in any way.
Specific warnings
Specific warnings used throughout the GSM manual set are shown below, and will be incorporated into procedures as applicable. These must be observed by all personnel at all times when working with the equipment, as must any other warnings given in text, in the illustrations and on the equipment. Potentially hazardous voltage Potentially hazardous voltage WARNING This equipment operates from a potentially hazardous voltage of 230 V ac single phase or 415 V ac three phase supply. To achieve isolation of the equipment from the ac supply, the ac input isolator must be set to off and locked.
When working with electrical equipment, reference must be made to the Electricity at Work Regulations 1989 (UK), or to the relevant electricity at work legislation for the country in which the equipment is used. NOTE Electric shock WARNING Do not touch the victim with your bare hands until the electric circuit is broken. Switch off. If this is not possible, protect yourself with dry insulating material and pull or push the victim clear of the conductor. ALWAYS send for trained first aid or medical assistance IMMEDIATELY. In cases of low voltage electric shock (including public supply voltages), serious injuries and even death, may result. Direct electrical contact can stun a casualty causing breathing, and even the heart, to stop. It can also cause skin burns at the points of entry and exit of the current. In the event of an electric shock it may be necessary to carry out artificial respiration. ALWAYS send for trained first aid or medical assistance IMMEDIATELY. Motorola GSM equipment does not utilise high voltages.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
General warnings
General warnings
If the casualty is also suffering from burns, flood the affected area with cold water to cool, until trained first aid or medical assistance arrives. RF radiation WARNING High RF potentials and electromagnetic fields are present in this equipment when in operation. Ensure that all transmitters are switched off when any antenna connections have to be changed. Do not key transmitters connected to unterminated cavities or feeders.
Relevant standards (USA and EC), to which regard should be paid when working with RF equipment are: ANSI IEEE C95.1-1991, IEEE Standard for Safety Levels with Respect to Human Exposure to Radio Frequency Electromagnetic Fields, 3 kHz to 300 GHz CENELEC 95 ENV 50166-2, Human Exposure to Electromagnetic Fields High Frequency (10 kHz to 300 GHz). Laser radiation WARNING Do not look directly into fibre optic cables or optical data in/out connectors. Laser radiation can come from either the data in/out connectors or unterminated fibre optic cables connected to data in/out connectors.
Lifting equipment WARNING When dismantling heavy assemblies, or removing or replacing equipment, a competent responsible person must ensure that adequate lifting facilities are available. Where provided, lifting frames must be used for these operations.
When dismantling heavy assemblies, or removing or replacing equipment, the competent responsible person must ensure that adequate lifting facilities are available. Where provided, lifting frames must be used for these operations. When equipments have to be manhandled, reference must be made to the Manual Handling of Loads Regulations 1992 (UK) or to the relevant manual handling of loads legislation for the country in which the equipment is used. Parts substitution WARNING Do not install substitute parts or perform any unauthorized modification of equipment, because of the danger of introducing additional hazards. Contact Motorola if in doubt to ensure that safety features are maintained.
Battery supplies WARNING Lithium batteries WARNING Lithium batteries, if subjected to mistreatment, may burst and ignite. Defective lithium batteries must not be removed or replaced. Any boards containing defective lithium batteries must be returned to Motorola for repair. Do not wear earth straps when working with standby battery supplies.
Contact your local Motorola office for how to return defective lithium batteries.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
General cautions
Version 1 Rev 0
General cautions
Observe the following cautions during operation, installation and maintenance of the equipment described in the Motorola manuals. Failure to comply with these cautions or with specific cautions elsewhere in the Motorola manuals may result in damage to the equipment. Motorola assumes no liability for the customers failure to comply with these requirements.
Caution labels
Personnel working with or operating Motorola equipment must comply with any caution labels fitted to the equipment. Caution labels must not be removed, painted over or obscured in any way.
Specific cautions
Cautions particularly applicable to the equipment are positioned within the text of this manual. These must be observed by all personnel at all times when working with the equipment, as must any other cautions given in text, on the illustrations and on the equipment. Fibre optics CAUTION Static discharge CAUTION Motorola equipment contains CMOS devices. These metal oxide semiconductor (MOS) devices are susceptible to damage from electrostatic charge. See the section Devices sensitive to static in the preface of this manual for further information. Fibre optic cables must not be bent in a radius of less than 30 mm.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Devices sensitive to static
Devices sensitive to static

Certain metal oxide semiconductor (MOS) devices embody in their design a thin layer of insulation that is susceptible to damage from electrostatic charge. Such a charge applied to the leads of the device could cause irreparable damage. These charges can be built up on nylon overalls, by friction, by pushing the hands into high insulation packing material or by use of unearthed soldering irons. MOS devices are normally despatched from the manufacturers with the leads shorted together, for example, by metal foil eyelets, wire strapping, or by inserting the leads into conductive plastic foam. Provided the leads are shorted it is safe to handle the device.
Special handling techniques

In the event of one of these devices having to be replaced, observe the following precautions when handling the replacement: Always wear an earth strap which must be connected to the electrostatic point (ESP) on the equipment. Leave the short circuit on the leads until the last moment. It may be necessary to replace the conductive foam by a piece of wire to enable the device to be fitted. Do not wear outer clothing made of nylon or similar man made material. A cotton overall is preferable. If possible work on an earthed metal surface or anti-static mat. Wipe insulated plastic work surfaces with an anti-static cloth before starting the operation. All metal tools should be used and when not in use they should be placed on an earthed surface. Take care when removing components connected to electrostatic sensitive devices. These components may be providing protection to the device. When mounted onto printed circuit boards (PCBs), MOS devices are normally less susceptible to electrostatic damage. However PCBs should be handled with care, preferably by their edges and not by their tracks and pins, they should be transferred directly from their packing to the equipment (or the other way around) and never left exposed on the workbench.
10
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Introduction
Version 1 Rev 0
Chapter 1 Introduction
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
1-1
Version 1 Rev 0
Introduction
This page intentionally left blank.
1-2
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Objectives
Version 1 Rev 0
Objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: State the services UMTS aims to provide. State the IMT-2000 objectives Describe the evolution of UMTS from 2G systems. Describe the UMTS operating modes. State the frequency allocations for UMTS.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
1-3
Version 1 Rev 0
UMTS Services
UMTS Services
UMTS is expected to deliver voice, graphics, video and other broadband information direct to the user, regardless of location, network or terminal. These fully personal communication services will provide terminal and service mobility on fixed and mobile networks, taking advantage of the convergence of existing and future fixed and mobile networks and the potential synergies that can be derived from such convergence. The key benefits that UMTS promises include improvements in quality and security, incorporating broadband and networked multimedia services, flexibility in service creation and ubiquitous service portability. Networked multimedia includes services such as pay-TV; video and audio-on-demand; interactive entertainment; educational and information services; and communication services such as video-telephony and fast, large file transfer. UMTS services are also likely to be used by other sectors, including systems with limited mobility (e.g. in areas with low population density), and in private/corporate markets, ranging from home use to wireless PBXs, emergency and cordless systems.
1-4
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
UMTS Services
Version 1 Rev 0
UMTS Services
Voice Text Video Conferencing Internet Graphics
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
1-5
Version 1 Rev 0
IMT-2000 Roadmap
IMT-2000 Roadmap
The diagram opposite points out the possible routes to 3G. On one extreme we see the route taken by 3GPP culminating in the adoption of W-CDMA. Centre stage we see the route chosen by the UWC 136 supporters. UWC 136 will be built on TDMA technology by enhancing its modulation techniques to meet ITUs requirements for IMT2000. Far right we see the route chosen for 3GPP2 which has its origins in the IS95 standards known as CDMAOne culminating in CDMA 2000. The three different systems are: 1. UMTS W-CDMA 2. UWC-136 3. CDMA2000 Which have been designed by three separate organisations; 1. 3GPP 2. UWCC 3. 3GPP2 GSM ETSI GPRS EDGE UWCC TIA 3GPP UWC 3GPP2 Global Systems for Mobile Communication European telecommunication Standard Institute General Packet Radio Service Enhanced Data rates for Global Evolution Universal Wireless Communication Committee Telecommunication Industry Association Third Generation Partnership Project Universal Wireless Communications Third Generation Partnership Project 2
1-6
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
IMT-2000 Roadmap
Version 1 Rev 0
IMT-2000 Roadmap
GSM Association ETSI T1 UWCC CDG
TIA
2G
GSM
TDMA (IS - 136)
IS-95A
GPRS 2.5G EDGE IS-95B
3G
W-CDMA
UWC-136
cdma2000
3GPP
UWCC
3GPP2
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
1-7
Version 1 Rev 0
IMT-2000 Objectives
IMT-2000 Objectives
The objectives of IMT-2000 are to encourage global service provision and convergence of the many, essentially competing, wired and wireless access technologies currently in use. IMT-2000 aims to be a global standard that provides the flexibility required by existing operators to seamlessly evolve their networks towards the needs of their subscribers in the future. In doing IMT-2000 it expected to reduce the "telecommunications gap", by offering cost effective access to telecommunications facilities to the billions of people who do not currently have a phone. IMT-2000 incorporates many current radio access technologies, including both terrestrial and satellite components. Fixed and mobile access, on both public and private networks Will offer a much wider range of services and types of terminals than any of the preceding radio access technologies.
1-8
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
IMT-2000 Objectives
Version 1 Rev 0
IMT-2000 Objectives
Global service capabilities Terrestrial and satellite components Reduce the "Telecommunications gap" Flexible/seamless service Wider range of services/terminals Fixed/Mobile and Public/Private Improved operational efficiencies
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
1-9
Version 1 Rev 0
Research and Proposal

Having laid down the basic framework of requirements, the ITU invited research activities to identify a suitable radio access scheme to fulfil the IMT-2000 aims and objectives. Most of this research activity was undertaken by standards development organisations and industry in Europe, The United States, Japan and Korea. Many different radio access technologies (both terrestrial and satellite), and multiple access methodologies were considered, with the majority being based upon Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA) and Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA).
Proposals
At the June 1998 deadline, ITU had received a total of 16-proposals, all of which would meet or exceed the basic aims and objectives of IMT-2000. The proposals included 10 terrestrial and six satellite based radio access technologies. Of the terrestrial options, only 2 were TDMA based, with the remainder proposing CDMA; either narrow band, wideband or multi-carrier. The main European contender was Universal Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA), although now generally accepted as translating to "UMTS" Terrestrial Radio Access. UTRA proposed a wide band, Direct Spread CDMA (DS-CDMA) and includes a combination CDMA/TDMA mode. UTRA was designed to be backward compatible with existing GSM Mobile Application Part (MAP) core network. Another dominant proposal was also based on DS-CDMA, but called for the use of multiple narrow band carriers in the down link and is hence referred to as Multi Carrier CDMA (MC-CDMA). The MC schema make the re-use of existing IS-95 and PCS frequencies for 3G more feasible. This, along with the fact that a ANSI-41 core was specified, make the proposal more attractive to current IS-95 operators in the US and Asia.
1-10
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Europe
W-CDMA W-TDMA TDMA/CDMA OFDMA ODMA June 1998 10 Terrestrial proposals to ITU 8 x CDMA 2 x TDMA
Japan
W-CDMA W-TDMA OFDMA
USA
W-CDMAS N/A W-TDMA MC-CDMA WIMS W-CDMA WP-CDMA
Korea
W-CDMA (Asynch) W-CDMA (Synch)
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
1-11
Version 1 Rev 0
Standardisation (1998)
At the close of the research and proposal phase in June 1998, ten suitable terrestrial radio access technologies had been proposed. Each proposal naturally tended to favour compatibility with the existing 2G systems in the proposing bodies region, and ITU accepted this need for "Flexible/Seamless" migration. However, it became evident that although many technical aspects of the proposals were similar, allowing each region to independently define its own specifications would, in addition to being a waste of resources, mean that equipment compatibility on a global basis would be very difficult to achieve. ITU therefore started initiatives to achieve further standardisation. From these initiatives two forums were created, the Third Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) and 3GPP2
3GPP
The Standards Development Organisations (SDOs) involved in the creation of 3GPP were, Association of Radio Industries and Businesses (ARIB) from Japan, the European Telecommunications Standards Institute (ETSI), The Telecommunications Technology Association (TTA) of Korea and T1P1 for the USA. The partners agreed to joint efforts for the standardisation of W-CDMA based on the UTRA Proposal. Later during 1999, The China Wireless Telecommunications Standards Group (CWTS) also joined 3GPP. As well as the SDOs, manufacturers and operators also have membership of 3GPP, along with industry interest groups such as the GSM association, UMTS forum, Global Mobile Suppliers Association, Ipv6 Forum and the Universal Wireless Communications Consortium (UWCC).
3GPP2
Work done by Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) and TTA was merged to form 3GPP2, focused on the development of CDMA2000, a multi-carrier solution. This activity is running in parallel with the 3GPP project, with participation from ARIB, Telecommunications Technology Committee (TTC) and CWTS as member organisations.
1-12
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
ETSI ARIB/ TTC TIA ARIB/ TTC 3rd Generation Partnership Project 2 (3GPP2) Standardisation for a common MC-CDMA Specification
3rd Generation Partnership Project (3GPP) Standardisation for a common W-CDMA Specification
CWTS
T1P1
TTA
CCSA
TTA
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
1-13
Version 1 Rev 0
Harmonisation (1999)
During the spring of 1999 several operators and manufacturers met to seek further convergence of the CDMA based 3G solutions (UTRA W-CDMA and CDMA2000). As a result of these meetings, the Operators Harmonisation Group (OHG) was founded and agreed to adopt a "Harmonised" global 3G CDMA standard consisting of three modes: 1. 2. 3. A direct spread wide band CDMA, Known as UTRA Frequency Division Duplex (FDD). A wideband CDMA/TDMA option, known as UTRA Time Division Duplex (TDD). A multi-carrier CDMA option, known as CDMA2000 (or 1X/3X).
The main technical impacts of the harmonisation activities were as follows: 1. 2. 3. The change of the UTRA FDD and TDD Chip rate from 4.096 Mcps to 3.84 Mcps. The inclusion of a common pilot channel for UTRA FDD. A requirement for ALL core networks to support all radio access technologies.
1-14
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Manufacturers and operators agreed to adopt a Harmonized global 3rd generation standard consisting of three modes: Multi Carrier CDMA Direct Spread CDMA (UTRA FDD) Time Division Duplex (UTRA TDD) Main Technical Impacts: All core networks to support all air I/F alternatives Change of UTRA FDD & TDD Chip Rates from 4.096 Mcps to 3.84 Mcps Inclusion of a common pilot for UTRA FDD
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
1-15
Version 1 Rev 0
CDMA-2000
CDMA-2000
CDMA-2000, the 3G system promoted by 3GPP2, is based upon the IMT-2000 proposal known as Multicarrier CDMA (MC-CDMA). 3GPP2 has specified an air interface system that is backward compatible with existing IS-95 systems. This approach being necessary because in North America, IS-95 networks already use the frequency spectrum allocated for 3G. CDMA-2000 must therefore coexist with the older systems on the same radio frequency bands. For CDMA-2000, the carrier composition can be different in downlink and uplink (known as Forward and Reverse links respectively for this system). Carrier composition is determined by the Spreading Rate employed. Two Spreading Rates are currently defined by 3GPP2. Spreading Rate 1 (SR1) - SR1 is often refered to as "1X". In this mode, both forward and reverse links use a single, Direct-Sequence spread carrier, with a chip rate of 1.2288 Mcps. Allowing for the required "Guard Bands" this requires a RF carrier Bandwidth of 1.25 MHz. Spreading Rate 3 (SR3) - SR3 is often referred to as "3X". A SR3 Forward CDMA Channel uses 3-Direct-Sequence spread carriers (i.e. Multi-Carrier), each with a chip rate of 1.2288 Mcps and a bandwidth of 1.25 Mhz. A SR3 Reverse CDMA channel uses a single Direct-Sequence spread carrier with a chip rate of 3.6964 Mcps
Multi-carrier
In Multi-carrier configurations, multiple (up to 12) narrow band (1.25 MHz) carriers can be used to provide a single composite forward radio link. Early deployments of CDMA-2000 will, as described above, utilise three such carriers and is referred to as "3X" mode. As these carriers have the same bandwidth as IS-95, they can be used in overlay mode with IS-95. This is possible because CDMA-2000 spreading codes can be chosen to be orthogonal with the code in IS-95, thus minimising inter-system interference. Close timing synchronisation within and between different systems is also essential for this type of operation.
Direct-Sequence (DS)
In the Direct-Sequence configuration, the whole available link bandwidth is allocated to one direct spread narrow band (SR1) or wideband (SR3) carrier. CDMA-2000 does not use time synchronisation on the uplink and therefore cannot use codes that are orthogonal with IS-95. Thus, when using SR3, splitting the reverse link carrier into several narrow band components, as with the forward Llnk, yields no benefits.
Permitted Carrier Combinations

Foward Link - DS SR1. Reverse Link - DS SR1 (Currently Deployed as 1X) Forward Link - MC SR3. Reverse Link - DS SR1 (Future 3X Evolution Path) Forward Link - MC SR3. Reverse Link - DS SR3 (Future 3X Evolution Path)
1-16
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
CDMA-2000
Version 1 Rev 0
CDMA-2000
Direct Sequence Configuration (SR1)
1.25 Mhz
Direct Sequence Configuration (SR3)
Multi-Carrier Configuration (SR3)
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
1-17
Version 1 Rev 0
CDMA-2000
CDMA-2000
CDMA2000 Evolution
cdma2000 systems, based upon 3GPP2 Spreading Rate 1 standards, commonly known as "cdma200 1x" are currently being deployed throughout North America and Asia. These systems provide a packet data service, offering an average user data rate of 144 kbps. In addition, when compared with IS-95 A/B, a 50% increase in voice capacity is obtained. This system uses a single 1.25 MHz bandwidth carrier pair and, is capable of co-existing with IS-95 on the same radio spectrum. However, cdma2000 1x alone, cannot provide the IMT-2000 objective of ISDN H12 channel equivalence, this being data services at 2.048 Mbps. To obtain this rate, further evolution is required. Three evolution options are available, as follows: Spreading Rate 3 (SR3) The original 3GPP2 specifications included standards for a SR3 service, commonly referred to as "cdma2000 3x". As previously described, this mode uses multiple narrow (1.25 MHz) band channels in the forward direction and, a single wideband (5 MHz) Direct Sequence carrier in the reverse direction, to achieve the require data bandwidth. The requirements for large spectrum allocations and the inability to coexist with IS-95 systems, makes this option the least attractive to operators. cdma2000 1x Evolution - Data Only (1xEV-DO) Technical innovations since the 3GPP2 specifications were originally drafted, have led to a numbers of options being proposed to enhance the SR1 or cdma2000 1x system. The first of these is known as "1xEV-DO". This system provides a standalone packet data service, offering maximum data rates of 2450 kbps, with a user data throughput of 600kbps being a practical figure. A 1.25MHz carrier pair is required to provide this service. Concurrent voice services may be offered by the operator using IS-95 A/B or cdma2000 1x, using separate radio spectrum allocations. cdma2000 1x Evolution - Data and Voice (1xEV-DV) By using sophisticated Modulation techniques, "1XEV-DV" provides a method of obtaining both voice and high speed data, including real time data services, using a single 1.25 Mhz carrier pair. This system is 100% backward compatible with both cdma2000 1X and IS-95 A/B systems.
1-18
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
CDMA-2000
Version 1 Rev 0
CDMA-2000
IS-95 A/B Cdma2000 (1x) Cdma2000 (3x) cdma2000 (1xEV-DO) Cdma2000 (1xEV-DV)
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
1-19
Version 1 Rev 0
UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA)

3GPP is the organisation that develops specifications for a 3G system based on the UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA) radio interface, which is primarily designed to operate with an enhanced GSM core network. The UTRA system provides for two operating modes, Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) and Time Division Duplex (TDD)
FDD Mode
In the FDD mode of operation, uplink and downlink transmissions use separate radio carriers in different sub-bands of the IMT-2000 spectrum allocation. These "paired" radio carriers must be separated by a minimum of 130 MHz. Each radio carrier is allocated a bandwidth of 5 MHz, in each direction. The 5 MHz of bandwidth of each radio carrier is shared among multiple users. Individual users are separated using Channelisation Codes, which give a unique signature to that user. The exact code assigned to a user, determines how much of the shared bandwidth resource that user is allocated. The number of users that can be accommodated on a radio carrier is dependent upon the resource requirements of those users. The higher the data rate of a user, the greater the bandwidth required to transport that data, therefore the lower the number of users that can be supported. The theoretical maximum number of users per carrier is 512, this being limited by the number of available Channelisation Codes. In practice this figure will be much lower. Because separate uplink and downlink radio frequencies are used both network, and user can transmit and receive simultaneously, allowing full duplex operation. However, in addition to the transfer of user data the radio interface must support certain Layer 1 control procedures (e.g. power control). These procedures must be performed at regular intervals, and to define these intervals a radio frame and timeslot structure is defined. Each carrier is divided into 10 ms radio frames and each frame is further divided into 15 timeslots. It should be noted that unlike GSM, where Mobile Stations are allowed to transmit and receive in set timeslots, UMTS User Equipments operating in FDD mode can transmit and receive in every timeslot, during every radio frame.
1-20
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA) UTRA FDD Mode
10 ms
TS0
TS14
190 MHz
10 ms
TS0
TS14
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
1-21
Version 1 Rev 0

UTRA TDD Mode
The TDD UTRA mode differs from the FDD mode in that both uplink and downlink transmissions use the same 5 MHz bandwidth carrier, providing a service without the requirement for "paired" radio carriers. Future allocations of radio spectrum to UMTS may not permit the use of paired bands as radio spectrum becomes a more scarce commodity. Since uplink and downlink share the same frequency, the links must be segregated using the time domain The physical structure of the TDD radio interface is similar to that of UTRA FDD, in that a 10 ms frame, divided into 15 timeslots is used. The 15 timeslots can be dynamically allocated between uplink and downlink directions, thus the capacity of the links can be different. This capability makes TDD well suited to asymmetric services. With such a flexibility, the TDD mode can be adapted to different configurations of uplink/downlink timeslot usage. However, in any configuration at least one timeslot has to be allocated for the downlink and at least one time slot allocated for the uplink. In either direction, A given user may be allocated resources within a single timeslot or multiple timeslots. Within each timeslot, the data part of each physical channel is defined using a unique channelisation code. In the downlink, 16 codes are used per time slot. Multiple parallel physical channels can be used to support higher data rates for a single user. The 16 codes in each timeslot may be also be shared by multiple users. In the uplink direction either 1, 2, 4 8, or 16 codes may be used, with each code again defining an individual physical channel. A user may use a maximum of two physical channels per timeslot simultaneously. The larger the number of codes that are used, the lower will be the data rate supported by each code.
1-22
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
10 ms
OR
10 ms
OR
10 ms
OR
10 ms
(Examples Only)
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
1-23
Version 1 Rev 0
World-wide Spectrum Allocation for IMT-2000

WARC 92
The allocation of frequencies per region after the World Administration Radio Conference (WARC 92) meeting has been varied. IMT-2000 recognised the frequencies to be 1885MHz to 2025MHz in the lower and 2110MHz to 2200MHz in the upper band. Each band has been sub-divided into Mobile Satellite Service (MSS) and Terrestrial IMT-2000 parts. Not all countries are able to utilise the full ITU spectrum allocation as existing services have already been allocated frequencies in these bands. Therefore there are some regional variations, as can bee seen from the diagram opposite. Europe has used part of the band for DECT - which has very low penetration. It also has GSM 1800 at the lower edge. The band is also split in FDD and TDD bands. China has left the band clear and will start IMT-2000 activities soon. This will be split into Wireless Local Loop (WLL) and Mobile. Japan has developed with Korea the DoCoMo system which is pre release 99 and will launch Q4 2000/Q1 2001. In North America most of the IMT-2000 spectrum has already been allocated to second-generation PCS networks, deployed on 5-MHz sub-bands. This makes CDMA-2000 and EDGE the most attractive option to operators in this region, as these systems are backward compatible with IS-95B and IS-136, and can co-exist in the same spectrum
WARC 2000
More recently the WARC 2000 meeting, held in Istanbul, has allocated a further 519 MHz of radio spectrum for 3G services. Again not all regions will be able to make full use of this spectrum. The frequency bands added are: 806 MHz - 960 MHz 1710 MHz - 1885 MHz 2500 MHz - 2690 MHz
1-24
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

1850 1900
1885 1900
1950
2000
1980 2010 2025
2050
2100
2110
2150
2170
2200
2200
2250 Mhz
ITU Allocations
1880
IMT 2000 GSM 1800
MSS
IMT 2000
MSS
Europe
DECT
UMTS
MSS
UMTS
MSS
WLL
WLL
China
GSM 1800
IMT 2000
MSS
IMT 2000
MSS
1893 1919
Japan Korea (w/o PHS)
PHS
IMT 2000
MSS
IMT 2000
MSS
MSS = Mobile Satellite Services MDS = Multipoint Service/ Mobile Data Service 2250 Mhz
1990
2160
North America
PCS
A D B E F C A D B E F C
MSS
Reserve
M D S
MSS
1850
1900
1950
2000
2050
2100
2150
2200
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
1-25
Version 1 Rev 0
European Frequency Allocations

When studying the frequency allocation for Europe more closely we can see the following. It is split into two frequency bands: Lower 1900MHz - 2025MHz Upper 2110MHz - 2200MHz Owing to the asymmetric nature of the frequency allocation, frequencies have been allocated into paired and unpaired bands. The frequency range 1920 - 1980 MHz and 2110 - 2170 MHz are available to operators as paired bands, these support UTRA Frequency Division Duplex (FDD) and are best suited to symmetric services such as telephony. A minimum frequency separation of 190 MHz has been specified between transmit and receive frequencies. In the lower band, 1900 - 1920 MHz and 2010 - 2025MHz are available as unpaired bands. These can support UTRA Time Division Duplex (TDD), which is best suited to asymmetrical services such as the internet.
1-26
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

1805 1880 1900 1920 1980 2010 MSS Uplink 12 x 5 MHz 2020 2025 TDD
1-27
DECT
20MHz
60MHz 140MHz
FDD
GSM 1800
TDD
30MHz
2110
2170
Downlink 12 x 5 MHz
6 x 5 MHz
190MHz between uplink and down-link
60MHz 90MHz
FDD
30MHz
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
MSS
2200
SPA
Version 1 Rev 0
Licence Allocation in the UK

In the UK the spectrum was divided into five licenses. The four incumbent operators were successful in obtaining a license each, which left one for a new entrant. License A, which is considered as the most desirable spectral package, was set aside for this new entrant. A - Hutchison 3G B - Vodaphone C - One2One D - BT Cellnet E - Orange Some of the issues that should be considered in the frequency allocations are: Guard bands provide a reduced noise floor Lower frequencies travel further, I.e. less cells Three frequencies allows greater use of multimedia services Trade-offs between FDD and TDD spectrum
1-28
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

2112.8 MHz 0.3 MHz guard band 2167.2 MHz 0.3 MHz guard band
2110 MHz 14.6 MHz Licence A
10.0 MHz Licence C 14.8 MHz Licence B
10.0 MHz Licence D 10.0 MHz Licence E
2170 MHz
1902.4 MHz Unpaired carriers
1922.8 MHz
0.4 MHz guard band
1977.2 MHz 0.3 MHz guard band
A 10.0 MHz Licence C 14.6 MHz Licence A 14.8 MHz Licence B 10.0 MHz Licence D 10.0 MHz Licence E
1900 MHz
1920 MHz
1980 MHz
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
1-29
Version 1 Rev 0
1-30
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Network Architecture
Version 1 Rev 0
Chapter 2 Network Architecture
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
2-1
Version 1 Rev 0
Network Architecture
2-2
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Objectives
Version 1 Rev 0
Objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: Name and state the purpose of the UMTS Domains Describe the architecture of a UMTS network. Describe the purpose of the major network components. Describe the options for evolution to future releases.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
2-3
Version 1 Rev 0
UMTS Domains
UMTS Domains
Domain split
A basic architectural split is between the user equipment (terminals) and the infrastructure. This results in two domains: the User Equipment Domain and the Infrastructure domain. User equipment is the equipment used by the user to access UMTS services. User equipment has a radio interface to the infrastructure. The infrastructure consists of the physical nodes which perform the various functions required to terminate the radio interface and to support the telecommunication services requirements of the users. The infrastructure is a shared resource that provides services to all authorised end users within its coverage area. The reference point between the user equipment domain and the infrastructure domain is termed the "Uu" reference point (UMTS radio interface).
User equipment Domain

This domain encompasses a variety of equipment types with different levels of functionality. These equipment types are referred to as user equipment (terminals), and they may also be compatible with one or more existing access (fixed or radio) interfaces e.g. dual mode UMTS-GSM user equipment. The user equipment may include a removable smart card that may be used in different user equipment types. The user equipment is further sub-divided in to the Mobile Equipment Domain (ME) and the User Services Identity Module Domain (USIM). The reference point between the ME and the USIM is termed the "Cu" reference point.
Mobile equipment Domain

The Mobile Equipment performs radio transmission and contains applications. The mobile equipment may be further sub-divided into several entities, e.g. the one which performs the radio transmission and related functions, Mobile Termination, (MT), and the one which contains the end-to-end application or (e.g. laptop connected to a mobile phone), Terminal Equipment, (TE).
USIM Domain
The USIM contains data and procedures which unambiguously and securely identify itself. These functions are typically embedded in a standalone smart card. This device is associated to a given user, and as such allows to identify this user regardless of the ME he uses.
Infrastructure Domain
The Infrastructure domain is further split into the Access Network Domain, which is characterized by being in direct contact with the User Equipment and the Core Network Domain. This split is intended to simplify/assist the process of de-coupling access related functionality from non-access related functionality and is in line with the modular principle adopted for the UMTS. The Access Network Domain comprises roughly the functions specific to the access technique, while the functions in the Core network domain may potentially be used with information flows using any access technique. This split allows for different approaches for the Core Network Domain, each approach specifying distinct types of Core Networks which can be connected to the Access Network Domain, as well as different access techniques, each type of Access Network connected to th Core Network Domain. The reference point between the access network domain and the core network domain is termed the "lu" reference point.
2-4
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
UMTS Domains
Version 1 Rev 0
UMTS Domains
Home Network Domain [Zu] SIM CARD Cu Uu Iu [Yu]
Serving Network Domain USIM Domain Mobile Equipment Domain Access Network Domain Core Network Domain Infrastructure Domain
Transit Network Domain
User Equipment Domain
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
2-5
Version 1 Rev 0
UMTS Domains
UMTS Domains
Access Network Domain
The Access Network Domain consists of the physical entities which manage the resources of the access network and provides the user with a mechanism to access the core network domain.
Core Network Domain

The Core Network Domain consists of the physical entities which provide support for the network features and telecommunication services. The support provided includes functionality such as the management of user location information, control of network features and services, the transfer (switching and transmission) mechanisms for signalling and for user generated information. The core network domain is sub-divided into the Serving Network Domain, the Home Network Domain and the Transit Network Domain. The reference point between the serving network domain and the home network domain is termed the [Zu] reference point. The reference point between the serving network domain and the transit network domain is termed the [Yu] reference point.
Serving Network Domain

The serving network domain is the part of the core network domain to which the access network domain that provides the users access is connected. It represents the core network functions that are local to the users access point and thus their location changes when the user moves. The serving network domain is responsible for routing calls and transport user data/information from source to destination. It has the ability to interact with the home domain to cater for user specific data/services and with the transit domain for non-user specific data/services purposes.
Home Network Domain

The home network domain represents the core network functions that are conducted at a permanent location regardless of the location of the users access point. The USIM is related by subscription to the home network domain. The home network domain therefore contains at least permanently user specific data and is responsible for management of subscription information. It may also handle home specific services, potentially not offered by the serving network domain.

The transit network domain is the core network part located on the communication path between the serving network domain and the remote party. If, for a given call, the remote party is located inside the same network as the originating UE, then no particular instance of the transit domain is activated.
2-6
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
UMTS Domains
Version 1 Rev 0
UMTS Domains
Home Network Domain [Zu] SIM CARD Cu Uu Iu [Yu]
Serving Network Domain USIM Domain Mobile Equipment Domain Access Network Domain Core Network Domain Infrastructure Domain
User Equipment Domain
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
2-7
Version 1 Rev 0
UMTS Architecture - Release 1999

The diagram opposite illustrates the basic configuration of a Public Land Mobile Network (PLMN) supporting UMTS and GSM/GPRS. This architecture is as defined in Release 1999 of the 3GPP (Dec 02) specifications (TS23.002)
The Core Network (CN) Entities

The CN is constituted of a Circuit Switched (CS) domain and a Packet Switched (PS) domain. These two domains differ by the way they support user traffic, as explained below. These two domains are overlapping, i.e. they contain some common entities. A PLMN can implement only one domain or both domains. CS Domain The CS domain refers to the set of all the CN entities offering "CS type of connection" for user traffic as well as all the entities supporting the related signalling. A "CS type of connection" is a connection for which dedicated network resources are allocated at the connection establishment and released at the connection release. The entities specific to the CS domain are: MSC - The Mobile-services Switching Centre GMSC - Gateway Mobile Service Switching Centre VLR - Visitor Location Register PS Domain The PS domain refers to the set of all the CN entities offering "PS type of connection" for user traffic as well as all the entities supporting the related signalling. A "PS type of connection" transports the user information using autonomous concatenation of bits called packets: each packet can be routed independently from the previous one. The entities specific to the PS domain are the GPRS specific entities, i.e. SGSN - Serving GPRS Support Node GGSN - Gateway GPRS Support Node Entities Common to the CS and PS domains The following entities are common provide common functions to the CS and PS Domains: HLR - The Home Location Register AUC - Authentication Centre EIR - Equipment Identity Register
2-8
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

Gi
GMSC
C
AuC
H Gc
GGSN
Gp
HLR
PSTN PSTN D F Gs IuCS IuPS IuCS Iur Gr
VLR MSC BSS BSC

Abis
G E A
EIR
Gf
Gn
VLR MSC RNS
SGSN
IuPS
CN
Gb
RNS BSC
BSS
Abis
RNC
lub
RNC
lub
BTS
BTS
Um
Node B
Node B
Node B
Uu SIM-ME I/f
Node B MS
BTS
Um
BTS
ME
Cu or
SIM
USIM
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
2-9
Version 1 Rev 0

The Access Network (AN) Entities
Two different types of access network are used by the CN: the Base Station System (BSS) and the Radio Network System (RNS). The BSS offers a Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA) based technology to access the Mobile Station whereas the RNS offers a Wideband-Code Division Multiple Access (W-CDMA) based technology. The MSC (resp. SGSN) can connect to one of these Access Network type or to both of them. The Base Station System (BSS) The Base Station System (BSS) is the system of base station equipments (transceivers, controllers, etc...) which is viewed by the MSC through a single A-interface as being the entity responsible for communicating with Mobile Stations in a certain area. Similarly, in PLMNs supporting GPRS, the BSS is viewed by the SGSN through a single Gb interface. The functionality for the A interface is described in GSM 08.02 and for the Gb interface in TS 23.060. The radio equipment of a BSS may support one or more cells. A BSS may consist of one or more base stations. Where an Abis-interface is implemented, the BSS consists of one Base Station Controller (BSC) and one or more Base Transceiver Station (BTS). The Radio Network System (RNS) The Radio Network System (RNS) is the system of base station equipments (transceivers, controllers, etc...) which is viewed by the MSC through a single Iu-interface as being the entity responsible for communicating with Mobile Stations in a certain area. Similarly, in PLMNs supporting GPRS, the RNS is viewed by the SGSN through a single Iu-PS interface. The functionality for the Iu-CS interface is described in TS 25.410 and for the Iu-PS interface in TS 23.060. The radio equipment of a RNS may support one or more cells. A RNS may consist of one or more base stations. The RNS consists of one Radio Network Controller (RNC) and one or more Node B.
The Mobile Station (MS)

The mobile station consists of the physical equipment used by a PLMN subscriber; it comprises the Mobile Equipment (ME) and the Subscriber Identity Module (SIM), called User Services Identity Module (USIM) for Release 99 and following releases. The ME comprises the Mobile Termination (MT) which, depending on the application and services, may support various combinations of Terminal Adapter (TA) and Terminal Equipment (TE) functional groups. These functional groups are described in GSM 04.02.
2-10
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

Gi
GMSC
C
AuC
H Gc
GGSN
Gp
HLR
PSTN PSTN D F Gs IuCS IuPS IuCS Iur Gr
VLR MSC BSS BSC

Abis
G E A
EIR
Gf
Gn
VLR MSC RNS
SGSN
IuPS
CN
Gb
RNS BSC
BSS
Abis
RNC
lub
RNC
lub
BTS
BTS
Um
Node B
Node B
Node B
Uu SIM-ME I/f
Node B MS
BTS
Um
BTS
ME
Cu or
SIM
USIM
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
2-11
Version 1 Rev 0
UMTS Network - Release 1999

The diagram opposite shows a simplified schematic of a Release 1999 UMTS Network. It illustrates only those entities associated with providing a UMTS service (i.e. excludes any entities specifically associated with GSM/GPRS)
Entities of the CN-CS Domain

The Mobile Services Switching Centre (MSC) The Mobile-services Switching Centre (MSC) constitutes the interface between the radio system and the fixed networks. The MSC performs all necessary functions in order to handle the circuit switched services to and from the mobile stations. In order to obtain radio coverage of a given geographical area, a number of base stations are normally required; i.e. each MSC would thus have to interface several base stations. In addition several MSCs may be required to cover a country. The Mobile-services Switching Centre is an exchange which performs all the switching and signalling functions for mobile stations located in a geographical area designated as the MSC area. The main difference between a MSC and an exchange in a fixed network is that the MSC has to take into account the impact of the allocation of radio resources and the mobile nature of the subscribers and has to perform procedures required for the location registration (see TS 23.012) and procedures required for handovers (see TS 23.009). The Gateway MSC (GMSC) If a network delivering a call to the PLMN cannot interrogate the HLR, the call is routed to an MSC. This MSC will interrogate the appropriate HLR and then route the call to the MSC where the mobile station is located. The MSC which performs the routing function to the actual location of the MS is called the Gateway MSC (GMSC). The acceptance of an interrogation to an HLR is the decision of the operator. The choice of which MSCs can act as Gateway MSCs is for the operator to decide (i.e. all MSCs or some designated MSCs). The Visitor Location Register (VLR) A mobile station roaming in an MSC area is controlled by the Visitor Location Register (VLR) in charge of this area. When a Mobile Station (MS) enters a new location area it starts a registration procedure. The MSC in charge of that area notices this registration and transfers to the VLR the identity of the location area where the MS is situated. If this MS is not yet registered, the VLR and the HLR exchange information to allow the proper handling of calls involving the MS. A VLR may be in charge of one or several MSC areas. The VLR contains also the information needed to handle the calls set-up or received by the MSs registered in its database. The following elements are included: The The The The The The The International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI); Mobile Station International ISDN number (MSISDN); Mobile Station Roaming Number (MSRN), see TS 23.003 for allocation principles; Temporary Mobile Station Identity (TMSI), if applicable; Local Mobile Station Identity (LMSI), if used; location area where the mobile station has been registered; last known location and the initial location of the MS.
2-12
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

PSTN CN-CS GMSC CN Domain HLR VLR AuC PDN CN-PS GGSN
MSC OMC-T (Transport) OMC-U (UTRAN) UTRAN RNS Iub Node B RNC Iub Node B Iu-CS
SGSN Iu-PS
Iur Iub Node B
RNC Iub
RNS
Node B
Uu User Equipment
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
2-13
Version 1 Rev 0

Entities Common to the CS and PS Domains
The Home Location Register (HLR) This functional entity is a database in charge of the management of mobile subscribers. A PLMN may contain one or several HLRs: it depends on the number of mobile subscribers, on the capacity of the equipment and on the organisation of the network. The following kinds of information are stored there: Subscription information. Location information enabling the charging and routing of calls towards the MSC where the MS is registered (e.g. the MS Roaming Number, the VLR Number, the MSC Number, the Local MS Identity). If GPRS is supported, location information enabling the charging and routing of messages in the SGSN where the MS is currently registered (e.g. the SGSN Number). The types of identity are attached to each mobile (e.g. International Mobile Station Identity (IMSI), one or more Mobile Station International ISDN Number(s) (MSISDN), if GPRS is supported zero or more Packet Data Protocol (PDP) address(es)). The Authentication Centre (AuC) The Authentication Centre (AuC) is an entity which stores data for each mobile subscriber to allow the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI) to be authenticated and to allow communication over the radio path between the mobile station and the network to be ciphered. The AuC transmits the data needed for authentication and ciphering via the HLR to the VLR, MSC and SGSN which needs to authenticate a mobile station. The Authentication Centre (AuC) is associated with an HLR, and stores an identity key for each mobile subscriber registered with the associated HLR. This key is used to generate: Data which are used to authenticate the International Mobile Subscriber Identity (IMSI). A key used to cipher communication over the radio path between the mobile station and the network. The Equipment Identity Register (EIR) The Equipment Identity Register (EIR) in the GSM system is the logical entity which is responsible for storing in the network the International Mobile Equipment Identities (IMEIs), used in the GSM system. The equipment is classified as "white listed", "grey listed", "black listed" or it may be unknown as specified in TS 22.016 and TS 29.002. This functional entity contains one or several databases which store(s) the IMEIs used in the GSM system. An EIR shall as a minimum contain a "white list" (Equipment classified as "white listed"). See also TS 22.016 on IMEI.
2-14
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

PSTN CN-CS GMSC CN Domain HLR VLR AuC PDN CN-PS GGSN
MSC OMC-T (Transport) OMC-U (UTRAN) UTRAN RNS Iub Node B RNC Iub Node B Iu-CS
SGSN Iu-PS
Iur Iub Node B
RNC Iub
RNS
Node B
Uu User Equipment
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
2-15
Version 1 Rev 0
UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access Network (UTRAN)

The UTRAN consists of a set of Radio Network Subsystems (RNSs) connected to the Core Network through the IuCS and IuPS. A RNS consists of a Radio Network Controller (RNC) and one or more Node Bs. A Node B is connected to the RNC through the Iub interface. A Node B can support FDD mode, TDD mode or dual-mode operation. The RNC is responsible for the Handover decisions that require signalling to the UE. An RNC may include a combining/splitting function to support combination/splitting of information streams. Inside the UTRAN, the RNCs of the Radio Network Subsystems can be interconnected together through the Iur. Iu(s) and Iur are logical interfaces. Iur can be conveyed over direct physical connection between RNCs or virtual networks using any suitable transport network.
UTRAN Functions
The following is a list of the functions performed by the UTRAN sub-systems. These functions will be discussed in further detail in later chapters. Functions related to overall system access control Admission Control Congestion Control System information broadcasting Radio channel ciphering and deciphering Functions related to mobility Handover SRNS Relocation Functions related to radio resource management and control Radio resource configuration and operation Radio environment survey combining/splitting control Radio bearer connection set-up and release (Radio Bearer Control) Allocation and deallocation of Radio Bearers Radio protocols function RF power control RF power setting Radio channel coding/decoding Channel coding control Initial (random) access detection and handling CN Distribution function for Non Access Stratum messages
Functions related to broadcast and multicast services NOTE: Only Broadcast is applicable for Release 1999. Broadcast/Multicast Information Distribution Broadcast/Multicast Flow Control CBS Status Reporting
2-16
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

Core Network Iu Iu
RNS
RNC Iub Node B Iub Node B
Iur Iub Node B
RNS
RNC Iub Node B
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
2-17
Version 1 Rev 0
Radio network Controller (RNC)

A Radio Network Controller (RNC) is a network component within the PLMN with the functions to support one or more Node B, Cell and/or User Equipment. Typically one RNC can support up to 300 Node Bs, which in turn can provide resources for up to 6 cells. However, it should be noted that the ultimate limiting factor in planning the number of RNCs required within a PLMN will be the traffic capacity that the RNC can support. Typical values will start at around 1000 Erlang, rising to 10,000 Erlang as networks mature. A Radio Network Controller (RNC) can be considered to operate in one or more of the following roles: Controlling Radio Network Controller (CRNC) Serving Radio Network Controller (SRNC) Drift Radio Network Controller (DRNC)
Controlling Radio Network Controller (CRNC)

Controlling RNC is a role an RNC can take with respect to a specific set of Node Bs. There is only one Controlling RNC for any Node B. The Controlling RNC has the overall control of the logical resources of its node Bs. The main functions of a CRNC are: Control of the Radio Resources for the Node-B it controls. Provision of Services to the Node-B that it controls. Load and Congestion Control Admission Control Code allocation for new radio links
2-18
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Radio network Controller (RNC) UTRAN CRNC Functions
Controlling of the Radio Resources Provision of Services to the Node-B Load and Congestion Control Admission Control Code Allocation for new Radio Links
C-RNC
Iu lur
Iu
C-RNC
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
2-19
Version 1 Rev 0

Serving Radio Network Controller (SRNC)
A Serving RNC is the RNC located within a Serving RNS (SRNS). SRNS is a role an RNS can take with respect to a specific connection between an UE and UTRAN. There is one Serving RNS for each UE that has a connection to UTRAN. The Serving RNS is in charge of the radio connection between a UE and the UTRAN. The Serving RNS terminates the Iu for this UE. The main functions of an SRNC are: Termination of the Radio Resource Control Signalling between the RNC and the UE. L2 Processing (PDCP, RLC, MAC). Radio Resource Control operations. Mapping of Iu Bearer Parameters onto Transport Channels Parameters. Hand-over decisions. Outer loop power control. Macro-Diversity combining and splitting.
2-20
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Radio network Controller (RNC) UTRAN SRNC Functions
Termination of the Radio Resource Control Signalling between the RNC and the UE L2 Processing (PDCP RLC, MAC) , Radio Resource Control Operations Mapping of Bearer Parameters onto Transport Channel Parameters Hand-Over Decisions Outer Loop Power Control Macro-diversity Combining and Splitting
S-RNC
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
2-21
Version 1 Rev 0

Drift Radio Network Controller (DRNC)
A Drift RNC is located within a Drift RNS. DRNS is role that an RNS can take with respect to a specific connection between a UE and UTRAN. A DRNS is any RNS that supports the Serving RNS by providing radio resources via the cell(s) it controls, to provide additional radio bearer services for a specific connection between a UE and UTRAN. There may be zero, one or more DRNSs associated with a specific connection between a UE and UTRAN. The main functions of a DRNC are: Macro-diversity combining and splitting. No L2 processing, i.e. no re-transmissions, acknowledgements or negative acknowledgements. Transparent routing of data on the Iub and Iur Interfaces, except when Common or shared channels are used.
2-22
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Radio network Controller (RNC) UTRAN DRNC Functions
Macro-diversity Combining and Splitting No L2 Processing Transparent Routing except for Common/Shared Channels
S-RNC
D-RNC
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
2-23
Version 1 Rev 0
Node B
Node B
A Node B is a logical node in the RNS that is in charge of radio transmission and reception in one or more cells. Each Node B is identified within the UTRAN by a unique Node B ID. Typically a Node B will support up to six cells. Each cell is a specific radio coverage area and is Identified by a unique Cell ID, which will be broadcast across the entire cell area. The diagram opposite shows the typical architecture of a Motorola Node B.
Wideband Digital Modem (WDM)

The WDM card is the heart of the Node B and performs the majority of the layer 1 (physical layer) functions. Motorola has designed the WDM card to support a high traffic throughput and to allow trunking across multiple carriers/sectors. This gives advantages in terms of availability and also allows the Node B to efficiently handle non-uniform traffic distributions. Up to 6 WDMs can be installed per Node B cabinet and the WDM is fully compliant to the December 02 standards baseline of the R99 3GPP standard. The WDM functions include: Transmit and Receive chip and symbol level processing User plane protocol termination for the Node B/RNC interface Termination of intra Node B control protocol Physical control of the signal processing function Termination of the intra Node B time reference interface Supports HSDPA
The Wideband Transceiver (WBX)

The Wideband Transceiver (WBX) is the interface between the analog and digital baseband worlds. On the forward link the WBX accepts baseband digital data from the WDM via the baseband bus, formats this data to UMTS air interface requirements, and produces a modulated RF signal at the required carrier frequency for further amplification and transmission via the appropriate antenna. On the reverse link the received signals are amplified, filtered, down-converted, sampled and digitally processed. Digital data is then output to the WDMs via the baseband bus for further processing. Each WBX contains two receiver line-ups, for the main and diversity branches. The WBX also supports transmit diversity One WRX is required per cell and typically an additional, redundant device can be fitted.
Linear Power Amplifier (LPA)

The Linear Power Amplifier (LPA) subsystem consists of either 3 or 6 hybrid matrixes power amplifiers. Each amplifier should be thought of as part of an overall power amplification resource which can be distributed between sectors and carriers to provide power amplifier trunking. The trunked LPA subsystem can be configured to support omni, three and six sector configurations, as well as allowing the site to be reconfigured to meet new operator requirements. The input matrix accepts the composite signals for each sector for amplification. Up to six LPA modules contribute to amplifying all signals presented at the input ports. The output matrix ensures proper distribution of the amplified signals to the correct sector output, whilst minimising the amount of energy presented at the other sector outputs.
2-24
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Node B
Version 1 Rev 0
Node B
123 123
Iub
WDM(s) WBX
I/P Matrix
123
O/P Matrix
To Antenna
123 123
Trunked linear
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
2-25
Version 1 Rev 0
User Equipment (UE)
User Equipment (UE)

Introduction to User Equipment
UMTS aims to offer service capabilities that enable a wide variety of services to be implemented. Such services range from simple services like speech, to complex multimedia services containing several simultaneous media components that place totally different requirements on the system and on the terminal equipment. By standardising service capabilities rather than actual services, more flexibility is available for service providers/network operators to create unique services. The same principle also applies for UMTS terminals, i.e. the types of terminals are not standardised and are therefore not limited in any way. A wide range of terminal types is likely in the UMTS environment, e.g. speech only terminals, videophones, data terminals, wideband data terminals, fax terminals, multi-band/multi-mode terminals and any combination of the aforementioned. Terminal development trends for todays terminals are mainly towards higher integration levels resulting in smaller size. The goal of "four 100s" has been a rule of thumb target for handsets, i.e., 100 hour standby, 100 cc size, 100 gram weight and also 100 MIPS performance. The size targets have already been achieved and any requirement for smaller terminals is questionable from the usability and physical size limitations perspective. The other target parameters have no maximum limitations. On the other hand, we can see the following further trends for near future terminals: Application specific terminals (smart traffic, vending machine radio, etc.); Increased number of value adding features (graphics, smart messaging, PC connectivity and compatibility, memory databases, speech recognition, messaging features, display functions, and different source coding methods (e.g., JPEG)); Support for higher number of source codecs (several speech codecs); Multiband terminals (e.g., GSM in 900MHz and DCS1800); Multimode terminals (e.g., UMTS/GSM dualmode terminal); Dynamic SW configurability; These trends are more than likely to continue in the future. Multiband and multimode terminals with high integration levels would be preferred by the users. Technological development of these terminals relies on new packaging and interconnection technologies, as well as technological steps like SW-radio. The concept trends of mobile handheld terminals is likely to diverge from simple speech terminals towards a variety of different types, e.g., communicators, wearable phones, data terminals, etc. The dominant role of speech terminals will be challenged in the future by these new data- and multimedia-oriented terminals.
2-26
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
User Equipment (UE)
Version 1 Rev 0
User Equipment (UE)
Speech Only Videophones Data Terminals Wideband Data Terminals Fax Terminals Application Specific Terminals Multiband/Multimode Terminals Dynamic Software Configurability Value Adding Features
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
2-27
Version 1 Rev 0
User Equipment (UE)
User Equipment (UE)

UE Architecture
The UMTS UE will consists of a number of logical software and hardware modules. Although these modules may be delivered by a single vendor as single physical and indivisable package, it is also possible that they will be independent physical units. The reference architecture showing the modules of the UE, along with their corresponding network functions are illustrated opposite and described in the following paragraphs.
Integrated Circuit (IC) Card

The IC card is the module on which are implemented the user and subscription dependent functions of the UE. The primary component of the IC card is the User Service Identity Module (USIM) The mandatory requirements for IC Cards used for holding USIM application, are related to the need to have one USIM application on the IC card, as well as to the security issues. The following functionality is required from the IC card holding a USIM application: Physical characteristics same as used for GSM SIM The support of one USIM application The support of one or more user profile on the USIM Possibility to update USIM specific information over the air, (e.g. such information as service profile information, algorithms, etc.) in a secure and controlled manner. Security mechanisms to prevent USIM application specific information from unauthorised access or alteration. User authentication. In addition to the mandatory functions, the IC Card may support the following additional, optional functionality The support for more than one simultaneous application (Multiple USIM, Ecash and/or some other applications). Possibility to have shared applications/files between multiple subscriptions, including ADNs, other user/SP controlled files and data. Possibility for some applications/files to be restricted to one or some of the subscriptions, under user/SP control. Inclusion of a payment method (electronic money and/or prepaid and/or subscription details) An interface allowing highly secure downloading and configuration of new functionality, new algorithms and new applications into the IC card as well as updating the existing applications, algorithms and data. Support for storing and possibly executing encryption related information, such as keys and algorithms. In multi application cards a functionality to prevent the unauthorised access and alteration of USIM specific information by other applications residing on the card. The ability to accept popular value-adding IC card applications, such as digital signature applications, EMV credit/debit card, electronic purses such as Mondex and Visacash, etc. Possibility for one UMTS SP to block multiple subscription on the card the SP has issued. Shared applications could include databases (e.g. telephone books), service profiles (e.g. controlling divert information), users preferences (e.g. short dialling codes) and SP-specific parameters inside a USIM application (e.g. call barring tables).
2-28
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
User Equipment (UE)
Version 1 Rev 0
User Equipment (UE) UE Architecture
USER APPLICATION USER EQUIPMENT (UE)
USER APPLICATION
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT R
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT
TAF
USIM IC CARD MT MOBILE EQUIPMENT
NT Tu RT
CORE NETWORK Iu UTRAN
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
2-29
Version 1 Rev 0
User Equipment (UE)
User Equipment (UE)

Terminal Equipment (TE)
The TE is the part of the UE on which the users end-to-end application functions execute, terminating the services transported via the UMTS bearers. The TE is regarded as a service dependent component, interacting with a peer TE in the external network.
Mobile Equipment (ME)

The ME is the users subscription independent, but mobile system dependent component of the UE. It will terminate all control plane functions and the user plane UMTS bearer. The ME consists of the following modules: Terminal Adaptation Function (TAF) Mobile Termination (MT) TAF The TAF provided the interaction between the TE and MT, via the R interface/reference point. This may include the ability of the TE to control the MT by, for example, the use of commands sets ( e.g. Modem AT control commands). MT The MT is the telecom service independent, but UMTS dependent portion of the UE which terminates the radio transmissions to and from the network. Within the MT two further modules are defined. The Radio Termination (RT) which is dependent upon the the radio access network. A single RT will provide common functions for all services using the same radio access technology. For UMTS the RT terminates the UTRAN physical layer (Uu interface) and also encompasses the Access-Stratum layer 2 and layer three protocols. The RT interfaces to the Network Termination (NT), at the Tu reference points. While the RT is RAN dependent, the NT is CN dependent, and thus terminates, at the serving network, the Non-access Stratum layer 3 protocols, for functions such as mobility management, call control, session management, etc. To fulfil many of these functions, the NT must have access to information stored on the USIM (e.g. security information), this is accessed via the interface at the Cu reference points.
2-30
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
User Equipment (UE)
Version 1 Rev 0
User Equipment (UE) UE Architecture
USER APPLICATION USER EQUIPMENT (UE)
USER APPLICATION
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT R
TERMINAL EQUIPMENT
TAF
USIM IC CARD MT MOBILE EQUIPMENT
NT Tu RT
CORE NETWORK Iu UTRAN
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
2-31
Version 1 Rev 0
User Equipment (UE)
User Equipment (UE)

MT Functionality
The UMTS standards do not restrict the functionality of the terminals in any way. The standards should allow terminal specific features and functions to exist. However, a minimum set of mandatory functions are required in order to ensure proper behaviour of the system, and relate mainly to the interaction with the terminal and the network. Other optional features are supported by the standard, allowing additional functionality for UMTS terminals Mandatory Functions The following functions should be considered mandatory for all UMTS terminals: Terminal IC Card interface; SP and Network registration and deregistration; Location update; Originating or receiving a connection oriented or a connectionless service; An unalterable equipment identification; Basic identification of the terminal capabilities; Terminals capable for emergency calls should support emergency call without a USIM; Support for the execution of algorithms required for authentication and encryption;
Additional Features The Standard should support the following additional functionality for UMTS terminals: A mechanism to download service related information (parameters, scripts or even software), new protocols, other functions and even new APIs into the terminal; An API capability to allow information transfer through a well known interface; Maintenance of the VHE using the same user interface and or another interface while roaming; Optional insertion of several cards. An example scenario for this feature is a fax machine with a multiple IC card slots, where several users could insert their IC card and receive faxes.
2-32
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
User Equipment (UE)
Version 1 Rev 0
User Equipment (UE) UE Functions
Mandatory Functions
At least one IC Card interface SP and Network Registration/Deregistration Location Update MO or MT of services Unalterable Equipment ID Basic ID of Equipment Capabilities Emergency calls without USIM Dynamic Software Configurability Support of Authentication and Encryption
Optional Functions
Support for download of service related information API capability through well known interfaces Support of VHE Optional insertion of multiple IC cards
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
2-33
Version 1 Rev 0
Network Evolution
Network Evolution
The ultimate target of 3GPP is to drive UMTS towards an all Internet Protocol (IP) architecture. The exact detail of this architecture is still under development and will the subject of staged "future" releases of 3GPP Technical Specifications, Known as Release 4 (previously known as Release 2000) and Release 5. Motorola will track this evolution through its core network (GSN) product, which will also evolve in a series of stages to deliver aspects of all-IP functionality. The all IP system, shown in the diagram opposite, complies with UMTS all-IP specifications as defined by 3GPP.
Product evolution
There are four stages in the evolution of the GSN from Release 99 to Release 4: Using IP options on the open interfaces Since most of the GPRS core network interfaces are already based on IP, this is a relatively straightforward change. For the GSN, the Iu-ps interface operates using a different protocol stack for signalling which uses SCTP protocol rather than C7 MTP3b at the lower layer. This can be implemented by a software upgrade for both GSN and RNC. Additionally, GSM MAP messages can also be routed via SCTP rather than C7 MTP allowing IP to carry all signalling traffic. This would require software upgrade within the GSN, and the addition of a signalling gateway at the edge of the network to interwork between the C7 and IP protocol stacks. Initially, this reduces the need for operators to maintain a separate and expensive C7 signalling network. Longer term, it also allows inter-network signalling traffic to be routed via IP which can be secured using IPSec, both saving costs and increasing security. For interoperability with other vendors, existing Release 99 interfaces are retained as a configurable option. Separation of bearer and control Our GSN architecture follows the current GPRS standard that uses the same SGSN node to handle both signalling and bearer traffic, although these are physically processed on different cards. By ensuring there are separate routes and processing cards for both types of traffic, a higher capacity, more scalable, efficient and resilient GSN architecture can be realised. This will be achieved by scaling a GSN separately for signalling load (based on number of subscribers, context activations etc) and for bearer load (based on number of packets per second, total throughput etc). A distributed GSN is also enabled at this stage, with redundant routers providing 99.999% system availability using some 99.9% availability components.
2-34
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Network Evolution
Version 1 Rev 0
Network Evolution
PDN Data
PSTN Voice
MAP , CAMEL, INAP
Other PLMN GSNs
GGSN Gateway Gateways
PSTN Gateway
C7 Gateway
Border Gateway
OMCs Management Elements Radio SGSN GGSN OMCs Transport
Network Control Elements GPRS/UMTS Intranet IP Intranet MExE WAP Application Servers Call State Control Function HSS/ Call Control + SGSN functionality SDB
Iu (cs & ps) Iur
Other RAN
RNC Servers 3G RAN
IP/ATM
SDUs
Location Prepaid
Node B
Node B
Node B
Feature Servers
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
2-35
Version 1 Rev 0
Network Evolution
Network Evolution
Adding Iu-CS and MSC functionality Adding further processing cards within the GSN, supplemented by a PSTN Gateway, extends the GPRS core network to handle voice services and voice traffic without the need for an MSC. The evolved SGSN is termed the Call State Control Function (CSCF) and provides the call control aspects, and along with the GGSN, also provide the functionality to allow calls to and from IP end points that may be an IP-enabled phone, enterprise IP-based PBX, PC, or any other voice-enabled IP device. The PSTN gateway provides the interworking functionality for MS to PSTN, or PSTN to MS calls. The PSTN gateway is the interface from the IP core network to the PSTN. Processing within the gateway holds the vocoding algorithms for converting between a voice call encapsulated in an air interface frame and PSTN Pulse-Code Modulation (PCM). HLR functionality is offered by our Home Subscriber Services (HSS) node, which also provides secure provisioning of WAP/MExE services. Adding access independent multimedia overlay This major new network, the IP Multimedia Sub-system (IM), will require a number of new elements, including packet and circuit gateways and further processing. The IM overlay uses the SIP multimedia call model, DIAMETER or RADIUS authentication and billing, and offers the same set of services across a wide range of access technologies. New terminals, roaming agreements and services are required to take full advantage of this technology, which takes full advantage of widespread IP deployment and accessibility in this timeframe.
Application Servers
In addition to providing telecommunications services (Voice and data) it is envisaged that network operators will start to provide "Network Services", such as Internet access, e-mail facilities, etc. To provide these services, a range of applications servers will be required. Network services are covered in further detail in the next chapter.
2-36
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Network Evolution
Version 1 Rev 0
Network Evolution
PDN Data
PSTN Voice
MAP , CAMEL, INAP
Other PLMN GSNs
GGSN Gateway Gateways
PSTN Gateway
C7 Gateway
Border Gateway
OMCs Management Elements Radio SGSN GGSN OMCs Transport
Network Control Elements GPRS/UMTS Intranet IP Intranet MExE WAP Application Servers Call State Control Function HSS/ Call Control + SGSN functionality SDB
Iu (cs & ps) Iur
Other RAN
RNC Servers 3G RAN
IP/ATM
SDUs
Location Prepaid
Node B
Node B
Node B
Feature Servers
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
2-37
Version 1 Rev 0
Network Evolution
2-38
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Network Services
Version 1 Rev 0
Chapter 3 Network Services
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
3-1
Version 1 Rev 0
Network Services
3-2
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Objectives
Version 1 Rev 0
Objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: Describe the UMTS service classifications Describe Quality of Service Architecture Describe the UMTS Security Architecture
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
3-3
Version 1 Rev 0
Classification of Services
Teleservices
Teleservices provide the full capabilities for communications by means of terminal equipment, network functions and possibly functions provided by dedicated centres. The methodology used covers both single media and multimedia services, the single media services being a particular type of multimedia services. Multimedia services are classified into categories with similar functional characteristics. The six categories are multimedia conference services, multimedia conversational services, multimedia distribution services, multimedia retrieval services, multimedia messaging services and multimedia collection services.
Bearer Services
Bearer services provide the capability for information transfer between access points and involve only low layer functions. PS and CS domains provide a specific set of bearer capabilities. The Circuit bearer services are described in 22.002. The packet services (GPRS) is described in TS 22.060.
Supplementary services
A supplementary service modifies or supplements a basic telecommunication service. Consequently, it cannot be offered to a user as a stand alone service. It shall be offered together or in association with a basic telecommunication service. The same supplementary service may be applicable to a number of basic telecommunication services.
Multimedia services:
Multimedia services combine two or more media components (e.g. voice, audio, data, video, pictures) within one call. For some services, synchronisation between the media is necessary (e.g. synchronised audio and video). A multimedia service may involve multiple parties, multiple connections, and the addition or deletion of resources and users within a single call.
Service Capabilities
Service capabilities are based on functionality and mechanisms/toolkits such as provided by SAT, MExE, IN and CAMEL. These service capabilities can be made visible to the applications through an application interface.
3-4
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Classification of Services Teleservices Bearer Services Supplementary Services Multimedia Services Service Capabilities
Definition of Teleservices and Bearer Services

Teleservices Bearer services TE
TAF
UE
MT
PLMN
possible transit network
Terminating network
TE
UE: User Equipment MT: Mobile Termination TE: Terminal Equipment TAF: Terminal Adaption Function
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
3-5
Version 1 Rev 0
Description of Services
Bearer services are characterised by a set of end-to-end characteristics with requirements on QoS. The characteristics and requirements cover major network scenarios, i.e. the cases when the terminating network is PSTN, ISDN, GSM, IP networks/LANs, X.25 and a PLMN. Quality of Service is the quality of a requested service (Teleservice or Bearer Service or any other service, e.g. customer care) as perceived by the customer. QoS always means end-to-end. Network Performance of several network elements of the originating and terminating network(s) contribute to the QoS as perceived by the customer including terminals and terminal attachments. In order to offer the customer a certain QoS the serving network needs to take into account network performance components of their network, reflect the performance of the terminal and add sufficient margin for the terminating networks in case network performance requirements cannot be negotiated. As far as the QoS to the subscriber is concerned network elements have to provide sufficient performance (reflecting possible performance constraints in terminating networks) so that the PLMN cannot be considered as a bottleneck. This section outlines the requirements on bearer services in two main groups; Requirements on information transfer, Information quality characteristics, which describe the quality of the user information transferred between two or more access points. It shall be possible to negotiate / renegotiate the characteristics of a bearer service at session / connection establishment and during an on going session / connection.
Information Transfer
Requirements on information transfer, which characterise the networks transfer capabilities for transferring user data between two or more access points. These characteristics include the following: Connection oriented / connectionless services Both Connection oriented and connectionless services shall be supported. Traffic type. It is required that the bearer service provides one of the following: guaranteed/constant bit rate, non-guaranteed/dynamically variable bit rate real time dynamically variable bit rate with a minimum guaranteed bit rate. Real time and non real time applications shall be supported. Real time video, audio and speech shall be supported. This implies the: ability to provide a real time stream of guaranteed bit rate, end to end delay and delay variation. ability to provide a real time conversational service of guaranteed bit rate, end to end delay and delay variation. Non real time interactive and file transfer service shall be supported. This implies the: ability to support message transport with differentiation as regards QoS between different users. Multimedia applications shall be supported. This implies the: ability to support several user flows to/from one user having different traffic types (e.g. real time, non real time)
3-6
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Description of Services Information Transfer Characteristics
Connection Oriented Services Connectionless Services Bearer Service must provide one of the following Guaranteed/Constant Bit Rate Non-guaranteed/Dynamically Variable Bit Rate Real Time/Dynamically Variable Bit Rit With Minimum Guaranteed Bit Rate Real Time Video, Audio and Speech Non Real Time Interactive and File Transfer Services Multimedia Applications
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
3-7
Version 1 Rev 0
Traffic characteristics
It shall be possible for an application to specify its traffic requirements to the network by requesting a bearer service with one of the following configurations Point-to-Point Uni-Directional Bi-Directional Symmetric Asymmetric Uni-Directional Point-to-Multipoint Multicast Broadcast A multicast topology is one in which sink parties are specified before the connection is established, or by subsequent operations to add or remove parties from the connection. The source of the connection shall always be aware of all parties to which the connection travels. A broadcast topology is one in which the sink parties are not always known to the source. The connection to individual sink parties is not under the control of the source, but is by request of each sink party. At USR 2.0 Point to Multipoint Cell Broadcast is supported. Messages are received from the CBC by the RNC over the Iu-BC interface. The message destination is specified by the CBC as a Service Area. This is expanded by the RNC into an actual list of cells that receive the message. The messaging interface between the CBC and RNC is called the Service Area Broadcast Protocol (SABP). This is specified in the 3GPP spec 25.419.
3-8
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Description of Services Traffic Characteristics
Point-to-Point Uni-Directional Bi-Directional Symmetric Asymmetric Uni-Directional Point-to-Multipoint Multicast Broadcast
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
3-9
Version 1 Rev 0
Information Quality
Information quality characterises the bit integrity and delay requirements of the applications. Maximum transfer delay Transfer delay is the time between the request to transfer the information at one access point to its delivery at the other access point. Delay variation The delay variation of the information received information over the bearer has to be controlled to support real-time services. The possible values for delay variation are not a limited set, but a continuous range of values. Bit Error Ratio (BER) The ratio between incorrect and total transferred information bits. The possible values for BER are not a limited set, but a continuous range of values. Data rate The data rate is the amount of data transferred between the two access points in a given period of time.
3-10
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Description of Services Information Quality Characteristics
Error tolerant
Conversational voice and video
Voice messaging
Streaming audio and video
Fax
Error intolerant
Telnet, interactive games
E-commerce, WWW browsing,
FTP, still image paging
E-mail arrival notification
Conversational (delay <<1 sec)
Interactive Streaming (delay approx 1 sec) (delay 10 sec)
Background (delay >10 sec)
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
3-11
Version 1 Rev 0
Supported Bit Rates
Supported Bit Rates

It shall be possible for one application to specify its traffic requirements to the network by requesting a bearer service with any of the specified traffic type, traffic characteristics, maximum transfer delay, delay variation, bit error ratios & data rates. The network should satisfy these requirements without wasting resources on the radio and network interfaces due to granularity limitations in bit rates. It is possible for one mobile termination to have several active bearer services simultaneously, each of which could be connection oriented or connectionless. The only limiting factor for satisfying application requirements shall be the cumulative bit rate per mobile termination at a given instant (i.e. when summing the bit rates of one mobile terminations simultaneous connection oriented and connectionless traffic, irrespective of the traffic being real time or non real time) in each radio environment: At least 144 kbits/s in rural outdoor radio environment. At least 384 kbits/s in urban/suburban outdoor radio environments. At least 2048 kbits/s in indoor/low range outdoor radio environment.
3-12
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Supported Bit Rates
Version 1 Rev 0
Supported Bit Rates
At Least 144 Kbps in Rural Outdoor Radio Environments (<500km/h) At Least 384 Kbps in Urban/Suburban Outdoor Radio Environments (<100km/h) At Least 2048 Kbps in Indoor/Low Range Outdoor Radio Environments (<10km/h)
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
3-13
Version 1 Rev 0
Quality of Service
Quality of Service
Network Services are considered end-to-end, this means from a Terminal Equipment (TE) to another TE. An End-to-End Service may have a certain Quality of Service (QoS) which is provided for the user of a network service. It is the user that decides whether he is satisfied with the provided QoS or not. To realise a certain network QoS a Bearer Service with clearly defined characteristics and functionality is to be set up from the source to the destination of a service. The diagram opposite illustrates the QoS classes for UMTS. The main distinguishing factor between these QoS classes is how delay sensitive the traffic is: Conversational class is meant for traffic which is very delay sensitive while Background class is the most delay insensitive traffic class. Conversational and Streaming classes are mainly intended to be used to carry real-time traffic flows. Interactive class and Background are mainly meant to be used by traditional Internet applications like WWW, Email, Telnet, FTP and News. Due to looser delay requirements, compared to conversational and streaming classes, both provide better error rate by means of channel coding and retransmission.
Conversational Class
The most well known use of this scheme is telephony speech (e.g. GSM). But with Internet and multimedia a number of new applications will require this scheme, for example voice over IP and video conferencing tools. Real time conversation is always performed between peers (or groups) of live (human) end-users. This is the only scheme where the required characteristics are strictly given by human perception. (e.g. The real time data flow is always aiming at a live (human) destination).
Interactive class
Interactive traffic is the other classical data communication scheme that on an overall level is characterised by the request response pattern of the end-user. At the message destination there is an entity expecting the message (response) within a certain time. Round trip delay time is therefore one of the key attributes. Another characteristic is that the content of the packets shall be transparently transferred (with low bit error rate). Examples are: web browsing, data base retrieval, server access.
Streaming Class
This scheme is one of the newcomers in data communication, raising a number of new requirements in both telecommunication and data communication systems. It is characterised by the fact that the time relations (variation) between information entities (i.e. samples, packets) within a flow shall be preserved, although it does not have any requirements on low transfer delay. The delay variation of the end-to-end flow shall be limited, to preserve the time relation (variation) between information entities of the stream. When the user is looking at (listening to) real time video (audio) the scheme of real time streams applies.
Background Task
Background traffic is one of the classical data communication schemes that on an overall level is characterised by that the destination is not expecting the data within a certain time. The scheme is thus more or less delivery time insensitive. Another characteristic is that the content of the packets shall be transparently transferred (with low bit error rate). Examples are background delivery of E-mail notification, SMS, download of databases and reception of measurement records.
3-14
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Quality of Service
Version 1 Rev 0
Quality of Service
Quality of Service Classes Conversational Voice Video Maximum bitrate Guaranteed bitrate
Interactive Voice Messaging Web Browsing, E-Commerce
Delivery order Maximum SDU size SDU format information bits SDU error ratio Residual bit error ratio Delivery of erroneous SDUs Transfer Delay Traffic Handling Priority Allocation/Retention Priority
Streaming Audio/Video Streaming, FTP Still Image, Paging
Background E-mail Arrival Notification Fax
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
3-15
Version 1 Rev 0
QoS Attributes
QoS Attributes
UMTS bearer service attributes describe the service provided by the UMTS network to the user of the UMTS bearer service. A set of QoS attributes (QoS profile) specifies this service.
Maximum bitrate (kbps)

Maximum number of bits delivered by UMTS and to UMTS at a SAP within a period of time, divided by the duration of the period.
Guaranteed bitrate (kbps)

Guaranteed number of bits delivered by UMTS at a SAP within a period of time (provided that there is data to deliver), divided by the duration of the period.
Delivery order (y/n)

Indicates whether the UMTS bearer shall provide in-sequence SDU delivery or not.
Maximum SDU size (octets)

The maximum allowed SDU size.
SDU format information (bits)

List of possible exact sizes of SDUs
SDU error ratio

Indicates the fraction of SDUs lost or detected as erroneous. SDU error ratio is defined only for conforming traffic.
Residual bit error ratio

Indicates the undetected bit error ratio in the delivered SDUs. If no error detection is requested, Residual bit error ratio indicates the bit error ratio in the delivered SDUs.
Delivery of erroneous SDUs (y/n/-)

Indicates whether SDUs detected as erroneous shall be delivered or discarded.
Transfer delay (ms)

Indicates maximum delay for 95th percentile of the distribution of delay for all delivered SDUs during the lifetime of a bearer service, where delay for an SDU is defined as the time from a request to transfer an SDU at one SAP to its delivery at the other SAP.
Traffic handling priority

Specifies the relative importance for handling of all SDUs belonging to the UMTS bearer compared to the SDUs of other bearers.
Allocation/Retention Priority
Specifies the relative importance compared to other UMTS bearers for allocation and retention of the UMTS bearer. The Allocation/Retention Priority attribute is a subscription attribute which is not negotiated from the mobile terminal.
3-16
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
QoS Attributes
Version 1 Rev 0
QoS Attributes
Traffic Class
Conversational class
Streaming class
Interactive class
Background class
Maximum bitrate Delivery order Maximum SDU size SDU format information SDU error ratio Residual bit error ratio Delivery of erroneous SDUs Transfer delay Guaranteed bit rate Traffic handling priority Allocation/Retention priority
X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X X X X X
X X
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
3-17
Version 1 Rev 0
The Security Architecture

Five security feature groups are defined. Each of these feature groups meets certain threats, accomplishes certain security objectives: Network access security (I): the set of security features that provide users with secure access to 3G services, and which in particular protect against attacks on the (radio) access link. Network domain security (II): the set of security features that enable nodes in the provider domain to securely exchange signalling data, and protect against attacks on the wireline network. User domain security (III): the set of security features that secure access to mobile stations. Application domain security (IV): the set of security features that enable applications in the user and in the provider domain to securely exchange messages. Visibility and configurability of security (V): the set of features that enables the user to inform himself whether a security feature is in operation or not and whether the use and provision of services should depend on the security feature.
3-18
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

(IV) Application Stratum Provider Application
User Application
(V) TE
(III) USIM (I)
(I)
(I) HE (II)
Home Stratum/ Serving Stratum
(I)
SN Transport Stratum
(I) MT AN
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
3-19
Version 1 Rev 0
Security and Privacy

User authentication:
The property that the Serving Network (SN) corroborates the identity of the user;
Network authentication:
The property that the user corroborates that he is connected to a serving network that is authorised by the users HE to provide him services; this includes the guarantee that this authorisation is recent.
Confidentiality
Cipher algorithm agreement: the property that the MS and the SN can securely negotiate the algorithm that they shall use subsequently; Cipher key agreement: the property that the MS and the SN agree on a cipher key that they may use subsequently; Confidentiality of user data: the property that user data cannot be overheard on the radio access interface; Confidentiality of signalling data: the property that signalling data cannot be overheard on the radio access interface.
Data integrity
Integrity algorithm agreement: the property that the MS and the SN can securely negotiate the integrity algorithm that they shall use subsequently; Integrity key agreement: the property that the MS and the SN agree on an integrity key that they may use subsequently; Data integrity and origin authentication of signalling data: the property that the receiving entity (MS or SN) is able to verify that signalling data has not been modified in an unauthorised way since it was sent by the sending entity (SN or MS) and that the data origin of the signalling data received is indeed the one claimed.
Mobile equipment identification

In certain cases, SN may request the MS to send it the mobile equipment identity of the terminal. The mobile equipment identity shall only be sent after authentication of SN with exception of emergency calls. The IMEI should be securely stored in the terminal. However, the presentation of this identity to the network is not a security feature and the transmission of the IMEI is not protected. Although it is not a security feature, it should not be deleted from UMTS however, as it is useful for other purposes.
3-20
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Security and Privacy User Authentication Network Authentication Confidentiality Data integrity Mobile equipment identification
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
3-21
Version 1 Rev 0
Authentication and Key Agreement

Authentication and Key Agreement (AKA) achieves mutual authentication by the user and the network showing knowledge of a secret key K which is shared between and available only to the USIM and the AuC in the users HE. In addition the USIM and the HE keep track of counters SEQMS and SEQHE respectively to support network authentication. The method was chosen in such a way as to achieve maximum compatibility with the current GSM security architecture and facilitate migration from GSM to UMTS. The method is composed of a challenge/response protocol identical to the GSM subscriber authentication and key establishment protocol combined with a sequence number-based one-pass protocol for network authentication derived from the ISO standard ISO/IEC 9798-4
Distribution of authentication data from HE to SN

Upon receipt of a request from the VLR/SGSN, the HE/AuC sends an ordered array of n authentication vectors (the equivalent of a GSM "triplet") to the VLR/SGSN. Each authentication vector consists of the following components: a random number RAND, an expected response XRES, a cipher key CK, an integrity key IK and an authentication token AUTN. Each authentication vector is good for one authentication and key agreement between the VLR/SGSN and the USIM.

When the VLR/SGSN initiates an authentication and key agreement, it selects the next authentication vector from the array and sends the parameters RAND and AUTN to the user. The USIM checks whether AUTN can be accepted and, if so, produces a response RES which is sent back to the VLR/SGSN. The USIM also computes CK and IK. The VLR/SGSN compares the received RES with XRES. If they match the VLR/SGSN considers the authentication and key agreement exchange to be successfully completed. The established keys CK and IK will then be transferred by the USIM and the VLR/SGSN to the entities which perform ciphering and integrity functions.
3-22
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
MS
SN/VLR Authentication request
HE/HLR
Distribution authentication vectors from HE to SN
Generate vectors AV (1 . . . n) Authentication data response AV (1 . . . n) Store authentication vectors Select authentication vectors
User authentication request RAND(i) || AUTN(i) Verify AUTN(i) compute User authentication RES(i) Compare RES(i) and XRES(i) Compute CK(i) and IK(i) Select CK(i) and IK(i) Authentication Key
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
3-23
Version 1 Rev 0
Ciphering Algorithms
The ciphering algorithms used in UMTS are shown on the slide opposite. As can be seen a lot of different algorithms are active in the UMTS system. Algorithms f1 to f5 are of the type that are used to compute numbers for use in authentication procedures. Two very important algorithms, f8 and f9 are also shown, they have the following functions.
F8
This algorithm will perform the ciphering function. The ciphering function is performed either in the RLC sub-layer or in the MAC sub-layer according to the following rules: If a radio bearer is using a non-transparent RLC mode (AM or UM), ciphering is performed in the RLC sub-layer. If a radio bearer is using the transparent RLC mode, ciphering is performed in the MAC sub-layer (MAC-d entity). Ciphering when applied is performed in the S-RNC and the ME and the context needed for ciphering (CK, Count-C, etc.) is only known in S-RNC and the ME.
F9
Most of the control signalling information elements that are sent between the MS and the network are considered sensitive and must be integrity protected. Therefore a message authentication function has been developed to solve this problem. The MS will still go through the initial RRC connection establishment sequence and perform the set-up security functions. After this however some signalling messages will be encoded using the f9 algorithm. This will be the case for all RRC, MM, CC, GMM and SM Messages. The MM procedure in the MS will be the process responsible for starting the integrity protection procedure. AK AKA AUTN MAC XRES Anonymity Key Authentication and key agreement Authentication Token The message authentication code included in AUTN, computed using f1 Expected Response
3-24
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
F1 - Message authentication function used to compute MAC F1* - Message authentication function used to compute MAC-S F2 - Message authentication function used to compute RES and XRES F3 - Key generating function used to compute CK F4 - Key generating function used to compute IK F5 - Key generating function used to compute AK in normal procedures F5* - Key generating function used to compute AK in re-synchronisation procedures K-Long-term secret key shared between the USIM and the AuC F8 - Data transfer between the UE and RNC F9 - Signalling elements between the UE and RNC
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
3-25
Version 1 Rev 0
Generation of Authentication Vectors/Tokens

Upon the receipt of the authentication data request from the VLR/SGSN, the HE may have pre-computed the required number of authentication vectors and retrieve them from the HLR database or may compute them on demand. The HE/AuC sends an authentication response back to the VLR/SGSN that contains an ordered array of n authentication vectors AV(1..n). The diagram opposite shows the generation of an authentication vector AV by the HE/AuC.
SQN and RAND

The HE/AuC starts with generating a fresh sequence number SQN and an unpredictable challenge RAND. SQNs are unique to each user (the HE/AuC keeps a counter: SQNHe for each user) and are generated in batches, with a "time stamp" derived from a clock giving universal time. RAND is a randomly generated number.
Authentication Key Management Field

An authentication and key management field AMF is used as a third input variable to the algorithms and is also included in the authentication token of each authentication vector. AMF may be used by the operator to "switch" functions in the USIM (e.g to indicate the algorithm and key used to generate a particular authentication vector, or set the number of entries in a Sequence list (the list size)
Algorithms f1 -f5
Subsequently the following values are computed using the various algorithms (f1 - f5): A message authentication code MAC = f1K(SQN || RAND || AMF) where f1 is a message authentication function. An expected response XRES = f2K (RAND) where f2 is a (possibly truncated) message authentication function. A cipher key CK = f3K (RAND) where f3 is a key generating function. An integrity key IK = f4K (RAND) where f4 is a key generating function. An anonymity key AK = f5K (RAND) where f5 is a key generating function.
AUTN and AV
Finally the authentication token (AUTN = SQN AK || AMF || MAC) and the authentication Vector (AV:=RAND||XRES||CK||IK||MAC) are constructed from the products of the algorithms. Here, AK is an anonymity key used to conceal the sequence number as the latter may expose the identity and location of the user. The concealment of the sequence number is to protect against passive attacks only. If no concealment is needed then f5 0 (AK = 0).
3-26
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

Generate SQN
Generate RAND SQN AMF K RAND
f1
f2
f3
f4
f5
MAC
XRES
CK
IK
AK
AUTN := SQN AK || AMF || MAC AV := RAND || XRES || CK || IK || AUTN
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
3-27
Version 1 Rev 0
USIM Authentication Function

The VLR/SGSN invokes the procedure by selecting the next unused authentication vector from the ordered array of authentication vectors in the VLR/SGSN database. The VLR/SGSN sends to the USIM the random challenge RAND and an Authentication Token AUTN for network authentication from the selected authentication vector. Upon receipt the user proceeds as shown in the diagram opposite.
Retrieval of SQN
Upon receipt of RAND and AUTN the USIM first computes the anonymity key AK = f5K (RAND) and retrieves the sequence number SQN = (SQN AK) AK.
Computation of X-MAC
Next the USIM computes XMAC = f1K (SQN || RAND || AMF) and compares this with MAC which is included in AUTN. If they are different, the user sends user authentication reject back to the VLR/SGSN with an indication of the cause and the user abandons the procedure. In this case, VLR/SGSN shall initiate an Authentication Failure Report procedure towards the HLR. VLR/SGSN may also decide to initiate a new identification and authentication procedure towards the user.
Verification of SQN
Next the USIM verifies that the received sequence number SQN is in the correct range. If the USIM considers the sequence number to be not in the correct range, it sends synchronisation failure back to the VLR/SGSN including an appropriate parameter, and abandons the procedure. If the sequence number is considered to be in the correct range however, the USIM computes RES = f2K (RAND) and includes this parameter in a user authentication response back to the VLR/SGSN.
Computation of CK and IK
Finally the USIM computes the cipher key CK = f3K (RAND) and the integrity key IK = f4K (RAND). USIM shall store original CK, IK until the next successful execution of AKA.
User Authentication Response

Upon receipt of user authentication response the VLR/SGSN compares RES with the expected response XRES from the selected authentication vector. If XRES equals RES then the authentication of the user has passed. The VLR/SGSN also selects the appropriate cipher key CK and integrity key IK from the selected authentication vector. If XRES and RES are different, VLR/SGSN shall initiate an Authentication Failure Report procedure towards the. VLR/SGSN may also decide to initiate a new identification and authentication procedure towards the user.
3-28
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

RAND f5 AK SQN AK SQN K (USIM) f1 f2 f3 f4 AUTN AMF MAC
XMAC
RES
CK
IK
Verify MAC = XMAC Verify that SQN is in the correct range
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
3-29
Version 1 Rev 0
Access Link Data Integrity

Most control signalling information elements that are sent between the UEand the network are considered sensitive and must be integrity protected. A message authentication function shall be applied on these signalling information elements transmitted between the UE and the RNC.
Data integrity protection method

The diagram opposite illustrates the use of the integrity algorithm f9 to authenticate the data integrity of a signalling message. Based on the input parameters the user computes message authentication code for data integrity MAC-I using the integrity algorithm f9. The MAC-I is then appended to the message when sent over the radio access link. The receiver computes XMAC-I on the message received in the same way as the sender computed MAC-I on the message sent and verifies the data integrity of the message by comparing it to the received MAC-I.
Input parameters to the integrity algorithm

COUNT-I The integrity sequence number COUNT-I is 32 bits long. There is one COUNT-I value per logical signalling channel. COUNT-I is derived from a count of the number of RRC SDUs send/received. IK The integrity key IK is 128 bits long. There may be one IK for CS connections (IKCS) and one IK for PS connections (IKPS). IK is established during UMTS AKA as the output of the integrity key derivation function f4. FRESH The network-side generated FRESH message is 32 bits long. There is one FRESH parameter value per user. The input parameter FRESH protects the network against replay of signalling messages by the user. At connection set-up the RNC generates a random value FRESH and sends it to the user in the (RRC) security mode command. The value FRESH is subsequently used by both the network and the user throughout the duration of a single connection. This mechanism assures the network that the user is not replaying any old MAC-Is.
DIRECTION The direction identifier DIRECTION is 1 bit long. The direction identifier is input to avoid the use of identical set of input parameter values up-link and down-link messages. The value of the DIRECTION is 0 for messages from UE to RNC and 1 for messages from RNC to UE. MESSAGE The signalling message itself with the radio bearer identity. The latter is appended in front of the message. Note that the radio bearer identity is not transmitted with the message but it is needed to avoid the circumstance where for different instances of message authentication codes the same set of input parameters is used.
3-30
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
COUNT-I MESSAGE
DIRECTION FRESH
COUNT-I MESSAGE
DIRECTION FRESH
IK
f9
IK
f9
MAC-I Sender UE or RNC
XMAC-I Receiver RNC or UE
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
3-31
Version 1 Rev 0
Ciphering of User/Signalling Data

User data and some signalling information elements are considered sensitive and must be confidentiality protected. To ensure identity confidentiality the temporary user identity (P-)TMSI must be transferred in a protected mode at allocation time and at other times when the signalling procedures permit it. These needs for a protected mode of transmission are fulfilled by a confidentiality function which is applied on dedicated channels between the UE and the RNC. The diagram opposite illustrates the use of the ciphering algorithm f8 to encrypt plaintext by applying a keystream using a bit per bit binary addition of the plaintext and the ciphertext. The plaintext may be recovered by generating the same keystream using the same input parameters and applying a bit per bit binary addition with the ciphertext.
Input parameters to the cipher algorithm

COUNT-C The integrity sequence number COUNT-C is 32 bits long. There is one COUNT-C value per logical signalling channel. COUNT-C is derived from a count of the number of RLC/MAC SDUs send/received. CK The Cipher key CK is 128 bits long. There may be one CK for CS connections (CKCS) and one CK for PS connections (CKPS). CK is established during UMTS AKA as the output of the integrity key derivation function f3. BEARER The radio bearer identifier BEARER is 5 bits long. There is one BEARER parameter per radio bearer associated with the same user and multiplexed on a single 10ms physical layer frame. The radio bearer identifier is input to avoid the condition where for different keystream an identical set of input parameter values is used. DIRECTION The direction identifier DIRECTION is 1 bit long. The direction identifier is input to avoid the use of identical set of input parameter values up-link and down-link messages. The value of the DIRECTION is 0 for messages from UE to RNC and 1 for messages from RNC to UE. LENGTH The length indicator LENGTH is 16 bits long. The length indicator determines the length of the required keystream block. LENGTH shall affect only the length of the KEYSTREAM BLOCK, not the actual bits in it.
3-32
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
COUNT-C BEARER
DIRECTION LENGTH
COUNT-C BEARER
DIRECTION LENGTH
CK
f8
CK
f8
PLAINTEXT BLOCK
KEYSTREAM BLOCK
CYPHERTEXT BLOCK
KEYSTREAM BLOCK
Sender UE or RNC
Receiver RNC or UE
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
3-33
Version 1 Rev 0
3-34
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
UMTS Protocols
Version 1 Rev 0
Chapter 4 UMTS Protocols
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
4-1
Version 1 Rev 0
UMTS Protocols
4-2
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Objectives
Version 1 Rev 0
Objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: Describe the General Protocol Model for UMTS. Describe the Interface specific protocol structure for the following interfaces: lu CS lu PS lu b lu r
Describe the Radio Interface Protocol Architecture Describe the functions and service provided by the following Radio Interface Protocols: Medium Access Control (MAC) Radio Link Control (RLC) Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) Broadcast Multicast (BMC) Radio Resource Control (RRC)
Describe selected end-to-end protocol stacks
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
4-3
Version 1 Rev 0
Introduction to UMTS Protocols

As has been outlined in previous chapters, one of the underlying principles in the design and development of UMTS is to prepare a universal infrastructure able to carry both existing and future services. All design work should be such that technological and evolution changes in one part of the network should have no (or at least minimal impact) on other network components or services. From a protocol perspective, this is acheived by confining , as far as is reasonably practicable, protocol functions and services within one or several physical domains. To this end, the 3G protocol architecture can be divided into two strata. Access Stratum Non-Access Stratum
Access Stratum
The Access Stratum (AS) is a functional entity that encompasses radio protocols between the UE and the UTRAN and, terrestrial interface (Iu) protocols between the UTRAN and the Core Network (CN). These protocols all terminate within the UTRAN.
Non-Access Stratum
The Non-access Stratum (NAS) includes CN protocols that form a direct connection between the UE and the CN itself. The NAS is transparent to the UTRAN and thus these protocols do not terminate in the UTRAN. The NAS protocols encompass functions such as; Mobility Management (MM), Call Control (CC), Short Message Services (SMS) and Suplementary Services (SS) associated with the circuit switched CN and, GPRS Mobility Management (GMM), Session Managment (SM) and GPRS SMS assocoiated with the packet switched CN. The NAS tries to remain independent of the underlying radio technology. Thus the NAS protocols can remain unchanged regardless of the Radio Access Network (RAN) that carries them.
4-4
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Introduction to UMTS Protocols UMTS Protocol Architecture
UE Core Network Protocols
UTRAN
Core Network Core Network Protocols
Non-Access Stratum
Access Stratum Radio Protocols Radio Protocols Iu Protocols Iu Protocols
Uu-Interface
Iu-Interface
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
4-5
Version 1 Rev 0
General Protocol Model

The protocols in the UTRAN are designed according to a set protocol model. The structure consists of Layers (Horizontal) and Planes (Vertical). All these entities are independent of each other and can be changed at any time. It is also important to note that these protocol stacks are not developed for specific entities e.g. RNC or Node-B etc, but rather for the interfaces between these different entities. Lets have a closer look at the Layers and Planes.
Horizontal Layers
The General protocol stack only consists of two layers, the Transport Network Layer and the Radio Network Layer. From the bottom, the Physical layer (Part of the Transport Network Layer) will provide the physical medium for transmission. Above the Physical layer is the Transport layer (Part of the Transport Network Layer) which contains the transport protocols. These protocols are not defined within the UMTS specifications. The Transport Network Protocol proposed for UMTS is ATM. The top layer is called the Radio Network layer, this is the layer responsible for all UTRAN related tasks. The tasks performed on Radio Network Layer are transparent to Transport Network Layer.
Vertical Planes
Control Plane The Control plane only exists on L3 of the Horizontal planes and is responsible for all UMTS specific signalling. The protocols used for the control plane are the RANAP protocol for the Iu interface, the RNSAP protocol for the Iur interface and the NBAP protocol for the Iub interface. These are all termed Application protocols and will be used for tasks like setting up bearers to the UE. Operation & Maintenance actions will always set up the signalling Bearers for the Application protocol. User Plane This plane is being used for transfer of all kinds of information e.g. multimedia, e-mail, speech etc. The User Plane consists of the Data Stream that will be transported on the Data Bearer. Each data stream is identified and characterised by one or more frame protocols. Transport Network Control Plane This plane is used for all signalling that must be transferred in the Transport Layer and does not include any Radio Network Layer information. The protocol used for the Control Plane is called Access Link Control Application Protocol (ALCAP). This protocol will handle the setting up of Data Bearers for the User Plane of the Transport layer. The introduction of the ALCAP protocol made it possible for the Application Protocols to run with complete independence of the data bearing technology. It should be noted that we shall not use the ALCAP protocol in the setting up of the Signalling Bearers for the Application Protocols or for ALCAP. Transport Network User Plane Both the Signalling Bearer (for Application Protocol) in the Control Plane and the Data Bearer in the User Plane belong to the Transport Network Layer. The Data bearers in the Transport Network User Plane are directly controlled by the Transport Network Control Plane during real time operations. The control of the Signalling Bearer(s) for Application Protocol are considered Operations and Maintenance functions.
4-6
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

Radio Network Layer Control Plane Application Protocol User Plane Data Stream(s)
Transport Network User Plane Transport Network Layer Signalling Bearer(s)
Transport Network Control Plane ALCAP(S)
Transport Network User Plane
Signalling Bearer(s) Physical Layer
Data Bearer(s)
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
4-7
Version 1 Rev 0
IuCS Protocol Structure

As can be seen form the IuCS protocol stack, it resembles the UMTS Protocol Model very closely and so it will be the case for all other Interfaces. Two different layers can be detected, the Transport Network Layer and the Radio Network Layer. The Physical layer in the Transport Network Layer consist of normal OSI L1 specified protocols like E1, STM, Fibre Optic or even Microwave. On OSI L2 is the ATM protocol, one thing to note is that the first two layers will form a common bearer for all three planes above.
Control Plane Protocol Stack

The Protocol used on the radio Network Layer is called Radio Access Network Application Part (RANAP). This protocol will run on top of Broadband SS7 protocols. The function of this protocol includes the following: SRNS relocation and Hard Handover procedures Radio Access Bearer (RAB) Management. (Set-up, Maintenance and Clearing) Reporting of unsuccessful data transfer for Charging Applications Common ID Management Paging of the UEs Transparent UE to CN transfers. Security Mode Control with integrity checking. Overload Management. Management of reset procedures. Location Management and Reporting.
On the Transport Network Layer the following protocols can be seen: SCCP MTP3-b SAAL-NNI SSCF SSCOP AAL5 Signalling Connection Control Part Message Transfer Part - Broadband Signalling ATM Adaptation Layer for Network to Network Interfaces Service Specific Co-ordination functions Service Specific Connection Orientated Protocol ATM Adaptation Layer 5
Transport Network Control Plane Protocol Stack

The Transport Network Protocol Stack consists of Signalling protocols for setting up of the AAL2 Connections in the User Plane. Again broadband SS7 signalling protocols are being used.
User Plane Protocol Stack

This is a very simple combination of protocols with the User plane being directly on top of AAL2, which is responsible for segmenting the data to ATM cells. Note that a dedicated AAL2 connection will be reserved for each users CS service.
4-8
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

Control Plane Radio Network Layer RANAP User Plane Iu UP Protocol Layer
Transport Network Control Plane

Q.2630.1
Transport Network Layer
SCCP MTP3b SSCF-NNI SSCOP AAL5
Q.2150.2 MTP3b SSCF-NNI SSCOP AAL5 AAL2
ATM Physical Layer
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
4-9
Version 1 Rev 0
IuPS Protocol Structure

Again, two different layers can be detected, the Transport Network Layer and the Radio Network Layer. The Physical layer in the Transport Network Layer consist of normal OSI L1 specified protocols like E1, STM, Fibre Optic or even Microwave.

The Protocol used on the Radio Network Layer is again RANAP and the functions are the same then for the IuCS. The broadband SS7 part of the Transport Network will stay the same. We will however, have additional protocols that could be used. These are the IP based signalling bearer for packet switched information. M3UA SCTP IP SS7 and MTP3b User Adaptation Layer Stream Control Transmission Protocol (Designed for signalling transport in the Internet) Internet Protocol

This Plane is not applied to the IuPS.

Normal GPRS Tunnelling Protocol (GTP) tunnelling will be used over User Datagram Protocol (UDP) which is a connectionless protocol. Multiple packets and flows will be multiplexed on one or more AAL.
4-10
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
IuPS Protocol Structure IuPS Protocol Stack
Control Plane Radio Network Layer RANAP
User Plane Iu UP Protocol Layer
SCCP MTP3b
SSCF-NNI
M3UA SCTP IP GTP-U UDP IP AAL5
SSCOP AAL5
ATM Physical Layer
ATM Physical Layer
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
4-11
Version 1 Rev 0
Iub Protocol Structure

As with the Iu interface, two different layers can be detected, the Transport Network Layer and the Radio Network Layer. The Physical layer in the Transport Network Layer consist of normal OSI L1 specified protocols like E1, STM, Fibre Optic or even Microwave. On OSI L2 is the ATM protocol, one thing to note is that the first two OSI layers will form a common bearer for all three planes above.

The Protocol used on the Radio Network Layer is called NBAP. This protocol is in turn divided into the Common NBAP (C-NBAP) and Dedicated NBAP (D-NBAP). The C-NBAP defines all common procedures carried out like Operations & Maintenance task through channels like Random Access Channel (RACH) and Paging Channel (PCH). The main functions of C-NBAP are: Setting up of the Radio Link to the UE Selection of the Traffic Termination Point Cell Configuration Fault management Handling of the Common Transport Channels Reporting and Initialization of Node-B and/or Cell specific measurements
The main functions of D-NBAP are: Set-up, release and reconfiguration of radio links for the UE Context Softer Combining Management Compressed Mode Control Dedicated and Shared Channel Management Reporting and Initialisation of Radio Link specific measurement Downlink Power Drifting Correction Radio link Fault Management

Again the usage of broadband SS7 signalling can be seen.

The User Plane Protocol Stack consists of all the Control and User frame protocols being used in order to pass the information on to the Node-B and then finally the UE. Three basic type of transmissions are defined. Transparent, Unacknowledged or Acknowledged. The lower layers is a simple combination of protocols with the User plane being directly on top of AAL2 which is responsible for segmenting the data to ATM cells.
4-12
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Iub Protocol Structure Iub Protocol Stack
RACH FP
NBAP

Q.2630.1
Q.2150.2 SSCF-UNI SSCOP AAL5 SSCF-UNI SSCOP AAL5 AAL2
ATM Physical Layer
FACH FP PCH FP
DCH FP
Radio Network Layer
Radio Network Control Plane
User Plane
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
4-13
Version 1 Rev 0
Iur Protocol Structure

The Iur was originally developed to support Soft Handovers, but has since been changed to have 4 main distinct functions that will be discussed in this section. Again two different layers can be detected, the Transport Network Layer and the Radio Network Layer. The Physical layer in the Transport Network Layer consist of normal OSI L1 specified protocols like E1, STM, Fibre Optic or even Microwave. On OSI L2 is the ATM protocol, one thing to note is that the first two layers will form a common bearer for all three planes above.

The Protocol used on the Radio Network Layer is called RNSAP, this protocol could run on broadband SS7 protocols or IP based signalling. The 4 main functions of this protocol include the following: Support Support Support Support for basic Inter RNC Mobility for Dedicated Channel Traffic for Common Channel Traffic of Global Resource Management

The Transport Network Protocol Stack is more complex than any other interface. This is mainly due to four different uses as specified above. Signalling and Data will be carried between different Node-Bs on either broadband SS7 Interfaces or IP based Interfaces.

This is a very simple combination of protocols with the User plane being directly on top of AAL2, which is responsible for segmenting the data to ATM cells.
4-14
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Iur Protocol Structure Iur Protocol Stack
Control Plane Radio Network Layer RNSAP
User Plane DCH FP CCH FP

Q.2630.1
SCCP MTP3b
SSCF-NNI
Q.2150.1 MTP3b
SSCF-NNI
M3UA SCTP IP
M3UA SCTP IP AAL2
SSCOP AAL5
SSCOP AAL5
ATM Physical Layer
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
4-15
Version 1 Rev 0
Radio Interface Protocol Architecture

The radio interface is layered into three protocol layers: The physical layer (L1); The data link layer (L2); The network layer (L3). Layer 1 provides the Physical layer service between the UTRAN and the UE and is described in detail in later chapters Layer 2 is split into following sublayers: Medium Access Control (MAC), Radio Link Control (RLC), Packet Data Convergence Protocol (PDCP) and Broadcast/Multicast Control (BMC). Layer 3 and RLC are divided into Control (C-) and User (U-) planes. PDCP and BMC exist in the U-plane only. In the C-plane, Layer 3 is partitioned into sublayers where the lowest sublayer, denoted as Radio Resource Control (RRC), interfaces with layer 2 and terminates in the UTRAN. The next sublayer provides Duplication avoidance. It terminates in the CN but is part of the Access Stratum; it provides the Access Stratum Services to higher layers. The higher layer signalling such as Mobility Management (MM) and Call Control (CC) are assumed to belong to the non-access stratum. The diagram opposite shows the radio interface protocol architecture. Each block in represents an instance of the respective protocol. Service Access Points (SAP) for peer-to-peer communication are marked with circles at the interface. The SAP between MAC and the physical layer provides the transport channels. The SAPs between RLC and the MAC sublayer provide the logical channels. In the C-plane, the interface between Duplication avoidance and higher L3 sublayers (CC, MM) is defined by the General Control (GC), Notification (Nt) and Dedicated Control (DC) SAPs. Also shown in the figure are connections between RRC and MAC as well as RRC and L1 providing local inter-layer control services. An equivalent control interface exists between RRC and the RLC sublayer, between RRC and the PDCP sublayer and between RRC and BMC sublayer. These interfaces allow the RRC to control the configuration of the lower layers. For this purpose separate Control SAPs are defined between RRC and each lower layer (PDCP, RLC, MAC, and L1).
4-16
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

C-plane signalling GC Nt DC U-plane information
Duplication avoidance GC Nt DC UuS boundary
L3
RRC control control control control control
PDCP PDCP BMC
L2/PDCP L2/BMC
RLC RLC RLC RLC RLC RLC RLC
RLC
L2/RLC
Logical Channels MAC
L2/MAC
Transport Channels
PHY
L1
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
4-17
Version 1 Rev 0
RRC Functions
RRC Functions
The Radio Resource Control (RRC) layer handles the control plane signaling of Layer 3 between the UEs and UTRAN. The RRC performs the following functions:
Broadcast of information provided by the non-access stratum (Core Network)

The RRC layer performs system information broadcasting from the network to all UEs. The system information is normally repeated on a regular basis. The RRC layer performs the scheduling, segmentation and repetition. This function supports broadcast of higher layer (above RRC) information. This information may be cell specific or not. As an example RRC may broadcast Core Network location service area information related to some specific cells.
Broadcast of information related to the access stratum

The RRC layer performs system information broadcasting from the network to all UEs. The system information is normally repeated on a regular basis. The RRC layer performs the scheduling, segmentation and repetition. This function supports broadcast of typically cell-specific information.
Establishment, re-establishment, maintenance and release of an RRC connection between the UE and UTRAN
The establishment of an RRC connection is initiated by a request from higher layers at the UE side to establish the first Signalling Connection for the UE. The establishment of an RRC connection includes an optional cell re-selection, an admission control, and a layer 2 signalling link establishment. An RRC Connection Request message from the UE with an Establishment Cause of Emergency Call is supported. If no resources are available, other users will be removed to allow the emergency call to be processed. The release of an RRC connection can be initiated by a request from higher layers to release the last signalling connection for the UE or by the RRC layer itself in case of RRC connection failure. In case of connection loss, the UE requests re-establishment of the RRC connection. In case of RRC connection failure, RRC releases resources associated with the RRC connection.
Establishment, reconfiguration and release of Radio Bearers

The RRC layer can, on request from higher layers, perform the establishment, reconfiguration and release of Radio Bearers in the user plane. A number of Radio Bearers can be established to an UE at the same time. At establishment and reconfiguration, the RRC layer performs admission control and selects parameters describing the Radio Bearer processing in layer 2 and layer 1, based on information from higher layers.
Assignment, reconfiguration and release of radio resources for the RRC connection
The RRC layer handles the assignment of radio resources (e.g. codes, CPCH channels) needed for the RRC connection including needs from both the control and user plane. The RRC layer may reconfigure radio resources during an established RRC connection. This function includes coordination of the radio resource allocation between multiple radio bearers related to the same RRC connection. RRC controls the radio resources in the uplink and downlink such that UE and UTRAN can communicate using unbalanced radio resources (asymmetric uplink and downlink). RRC signals to the UE to indicate resource allocations for purposes of handover to GSM or other radio systems.
RRC connection mobility functions

The RRC layer performs evaluation, decision and execution related to RRC connection mobility during an established RRC connection, such as handover, preparation of handover to GSM or other systems, cell re-selection and cell/paging area update procedures, based on e.g. measurements done by the UE.
4-18
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
RRC Functions
Version 1 Rev 0
RRC Functions Broadcast of information related to the non-access stratum (Core Network) Broadcast of information related to the access stratum Establishment, maintenance and release of an RRC connection between the UE and UTRAN Establishment, reconfiguration and release of Radio Bearers Assignment, reconfiguration and release of radio resources for the RRC connection RRC connection mobility functions Control of requested QoS UE measurement reporting and control of the reporting Outer loop power control Control of ciphering Slow Dynamic Channel Allocation (TDD mode) Paging Initial cell selection and cell re-selection Arbitration of radio resources on uplink DCH RRC message integrity protection Timing advance (TDD mode) CBS control.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
4-19
Version 1 Rev 0
RRC Functions
RRC Functions
Paging/notification
The RRC layer can broadcast paging information from the network to selected UEs. Higher layers on the network side can request paging and notification. The RRC layer can also initiate paging during an established RRC connection.
Routing of higher layer PDUs

This function performs at the UE side routing of higher layer PDUs to the correct higher layer entity, at the UTRAN side to the correct RANAP entity.
Control of requested QoS

This function shall ensure that the QoS requested for the Radio Bearers can be met. This includes the allocation of a sufficient number of radio resources.
UE measurement reporting and control of the reporting

The measurements performed by the UE are controlled by the RRC layer, in terms of what to measure, when to measure and how to report, including both UMTS air interface and other systems. The RRC layer also performs the reporting of the measurements from the UE to the network.
Outer loop power control

The RRC layer controls setting of the target of the closed loop power control.
4-20
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
RRC Functions
Version 1 Rev 0
RRC Functions Broadcast of information related to the non-access stratum (Core Network) Broadcast of information related to the access stratum Establishment, maintenance and release of an RRC connection between the UE and UTRAN Establishment, reconfiguration and release of Radio Bearers Assignment, reconfiguration and release of radio resources for the RRC connection RRC connection mobility functions Control of requested QoS UE measurement reporting and control of the reporting Outer loop power control Control of ciphering Slow Dynamic Channel Allocation (TDD mode) Paging Initial cell selection and cell re-selection Arbitration of radio resources on uplink DCH RRC message integrity protection Timing advance (TDD mode) CBS control.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
4-21
Version 1 Rev 0
RRC Functions
RRC Functions
Control of ciphering
The RRC layer provides procedures for setting of ciphering (on/off) between the UE and UTRAN.
Arbitration of radio resources on uplink DCH

This function controls the allocation of radio resources on uplink DCH on a fast basis, using a broadcast channel to send control information to all involved users. Note: This function is implemented in the CRNC.
Initial cell selection and re-selection in idle mode

Selection of the most suitable cell based on idle mode measurements and cell selection criteria.
Integrity protection
This function adds a Message Authentication Code (MAC-I) to those RRC messages that are considered sensitive and/or contain sensitive information.
Allocation of radio resources for CBS

This function allocates radio resources for CBS based on traffic volume requirements indicated by BMC. The radio resource allocation set by RRC (i.e. the schedule for mapping of CTCH onto FACH/S-CCPCH) is indicated to BMC to enable generation of schedule messages. The resource allocation for CBS shall be broadcast as system information.
Configuration for CBS discontinuous reception

This function configures the lower layers (L1, L2) of the UE when it shall listen to the resources allocated for CBS based on scheduling information received from BMC.
4-22
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
RRC Functions
Version 1 Rev 0
RRC Functions Broadcast of information related to the non-access stratum (Core Network) Broadcast of information related to the access stratum Establishment, maintenance and release of an RRC connection between the UE and UTRAN Establishment, reconfiguration and release of Radio Bearers Assignment, reconfiguration and release of radio resources for the RRC connection RRC connection mobility functions Control of requested QoS UE measurement reporting and control of the reporting Outer loop power control Control of ciphering Slow Dynamic Channel Allocation (TDD mode) Paging Initial cell selection and cell re-selection; Arbitration of radio resources on uplink DCH RRC message integrity protection Timing advance (TDD mode) CBS control.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
4-23
Version 1 Rev 0
RLC Protocol
RLC Protocol
The Radio Link Control (RLC) protocol provides segmentation and retransmission services for both user and control data The diagram opposite gives an overview model of the RLC layer. The figure illustrates the different RLC peer entities. Each RLC instance is configured by RRC to operate in one of three modes Transparent Mode (Tr) Unacknowledged Mode (UM) Acknowledged Mode (AM) The mode to be used is determined by the SAP into which the higher layer deliver their PDUs. The mode chosen indicates which services and functions are to be applied and what (if any) response will be passed to higher level protocols regarding error detection. For all RLC modes, CRC error detection is performed by the physical layer and the result of the CRC check is delivered to RLC together with the actual data.
4-24
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
RLC Protocol
Version 1 Rev 0
RLC Protocol RLC Protocol Model
Tr-SAP
UM-SAP
AM-SAP
UM-SAP
Tr-SAP
Transmit Tr-Entity
Transmit UM-Entity
AM-Entity
Receive Receive UM-Entity Tr-Entity
Transmitting Side
Receiving Side
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
4-25
Version 1 Rev 0
MAC Layer Functions
MAC Layer Functions

Mapping between logical and Transport channels
The MAC layer performs cross mapping of information between logical channels (to/from higher level protocols) and the appropriate transport channel, according to the type of information to be transferred. Logical and transport channel types are covered in more detail in a later chapter.
Transport format selection

MAC will select the most appropriate Transport format (from the transport format combination set) for each transport channel, depending upon the instantaneous source rate.
MAC Multiplexing Algorithm

The MAC multiplexing algorithm schedules transport channel resources based on traffic priorities of different UEs and data flows and the RANAP RAB parameter Traffic Handling Priority is used to map the priorities.
Dynamic Scheduling
Under certain circumstances UEs may use common or shared transport channels to receive data in the downlink. Use of these shared resources is dynamically scheduled by the MAC-sh layer according the UEs QoS requirements.
Identification of UEs on Common Channels

When a common transport channel carries data from dedicated-type logical channels, the MAC-sh will identify the source or destination UE by including a Radio Network Temporary Identifier (RNTI) in the MAC header.
MUX/DEMUX of PDUs into Transport Blocks

MAC handles the service multiplexing for both common and dedicated transport channels. However, it should be noted that MAC multiplexing of dedicated channels can only be performed for services with the same QoS parameters, while physical layer multiplexing makes it possible to multiplex any type of service, including those with different QoS parameters.
4-26
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
MAC Layer Functions
Version 1 Rev 0
MAC Layer Functions Mapping of Logical Channels to transport Channels Transport Format Selection MAC Multiplexing Algorithm Priority Handling of Handling Between UEs by Dynamic Scheduling Identification of UEs on Common Channels MUX/DEMUX of Higher Layer PDUs Into/ Transport Blocks Traffic Volume Monitoring Dynamic Transport Channel Switching Ciphering (Transport RLC Mode Only) Access Service Class Selection
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
4-27
Version 1 Rev 0
MAC Layer Functions
MAC Layer Functions

Traffic Volume Monitoring
MAC receives RLC PDUs together with status information on the amount of data in the RLC buffer. MAC compares the amount of status corresponding to a transport channel with the thresholds set by RRC. If the amount of data is too high or too low, MAC sends a traffic volume status measurement to RRC. RRC uses these reports to trigger reconfiguration of the Radio Bearers/Transport channels.
Dynamic Transport Channel Type Switching

Based upon a switching decision received from RRC, MAC is able to execute switching of data flows between common and dedicated transport channels.
Ciphering
The MAC-D entity performs ciphering if a logical channel is using transparent RLC mode. Ciphering is an XOR function where data is XORd with a ciphering mask produced by a ciphering algorithm.
Access Service Class Selection

UEs are allocated to one of eight Access Service Classes, to provide different priorities for service resources. MAC indicates the ASC associated with a PDU received from the physical layer.
4-28
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
MAC Layer Functions
Version 1 Rev 0
MAC Layer Functions Mapping of Logical Channels to transport Channels Transport Format Selection Priority Handling of Data Flows of one UE Priority Handling of Handling Between UEs by Dynamic Scheduling Identification of UEs on Common Channels MUX/DEMUX of Higher Layer PDUs Into/ Transport Blocks Traffic Volume Monitoring Dynamic Transport Channel Switching Ciphering (Transport RLC Mode Only) Access Service Class Selection
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
4-29
Version 1 Rev 0
Protocol Stacks
Protocol Stacks
The following pages construct the protocol stacks for each UMTS network entity. The exact protocol structure is dependent upon which Core Network domain (CS or PS) is providing the Bearer Service, and whether the information transfer is user plane or control plane.
User Plane Protocol Stack (Dedicated Channels CS-Domain)

The diagram opposite shows the User plane protocol stack for user plane data transfer, using dedicated channels via the CN-PS. The user CS payload will be received at the MSC from the external network (e.g. the PSTN). The protocols used to transfer the Payload across this interface may vary and are not described in this course. AAL, ATM and physical layers will be described in detail in later chapters. Iu UP Frame Protocol The Iu UP protocol is located in the User plane of the Radio Network layer over the Iu interface and is used to convey user data associated to Radio Access Bearers (RABs) . One Iu UP protocol instance is uniquely associated to each RAB. If several RABs are established towards one given UE, then these RABs make use of several Iu UP protocol instances. These Iu UP instances are established, relocated and released together with the Associated RAB. The Iu UP Protocol is defined with modes of operation, which can be activated on a RAB basis rather than on A CN domain or service basis. This makes the protocol independent of the CN domain and to have limited or no dependency with the Transport Network Layer. This provides the flexibility to evolve services regardless of the CN domain. The Iu UP mode of operation determines if and which set of features shall be provided. Currently two mode of operation are defined: Transparent Mode (TrM) Support modes TrM is intended for those RAB that do not require any particular feature from the Iu UP protocol other than transfer of user data. In this mode the Iu UP protocol does not perform any peer-to-peer information transfer over the Iu interface. The Iu UP protocol layer is crossed though by PDUs being exchanged between upper layers and the transport network layer, no Iu UP overhead is added to the payload. The support modes are intended for those RABs that do require particular features from the Iu UP protocol in addition to transfer of user data. When operating in support mode, the peer Iu UP protocol instances exchange Iu UP frames, adding overhead to the payload. The Iu UP Support mode is prepared to support variations. However, the only support mode currently defined in 3GPP specifications; namely Support Mode for Predefined SDU size (SMpSDU), and provides the following functions. Transfer of user data; Initialisation Rate Control Time Alignment Handling of Error Events Frame Quality Classification
4-30
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Protocol Stacks
Version 1 Rev 0
Protocol Stacks User Plane Protocol Stack (Dedicated Channels CS-Domain)
CS Payload RLC MAC-d RLC MAC-d Split/ Select Split/ Comb Split/ Comb DCH FP AAL2 DCH FP AAL2 lu-UP AAL2 lu-UP AAL2
CS Payload
ATM Phys
B
ATM Phys
ATM Phys
ATM Phys Phys Phys

PSTN
Phys
UE
Phys
Node
SRNC
MSC
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
4-31
Version 1 Rev 0
Protocol Stacks
Protocol Stacks
Dedicated Channel Frame Protocol (DCH FP)
User data is received at the SRNC, via the transport layer and Iu UP protocol and the passed to the Radio Interface Control protocols for RLC and MAC processing as appropriate. The resultant Transport Blocks are delivered to the DCH FP. DCH FP transfers DCH data frames every transmission time interval from the SRNC to the Node B for downlink transfer and from Node B to the SRNC for uplink transfer. An optional error detection mechanism may be used to protect the data transfer if needed. At the transport channel set-up it shall be specified if the error detection on the User data is used. In addition to the transfer of user data, DCH FP provides the following services Transport of outer loop power control information between SRNC and Node B. Support of transport channel synchronisation mechanism. Support of Node Synchronisation method. Transfer of DSCH TFI from SRNC to Node B. Transfer of radio interface parameters from the SRNC to the Node B.
The specification of Iub DCH data streams is also valid for the Iur DCH data streams.
4-32
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Protocol Stacks
Version 1 Rev 0
Protocol Stacks User Plane Protocol Stack (Dedicated Channels CS-Domain)
CS Payload RLC MAC-d RLC MAC-d Split/ Select Split/ Comb Split/ Comb DCH FP AAL2 DCH FP AAL2 lu-UP AAL2 lu-UP AAL2
CS Payload
ATM Phys
B
ATM Phys
ATM Phys
ATM Phys Phys Phys

PSTN
Phys
UE
Phys
Node
SRNC
MSC
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
4-33
Version 1 Rev 0
Dedicated control services
Protocol Stacks
Control Plane Protocol Stack (UE-CN SIGNALLING, Dedicated Channels, CS-Domain & PS-Domain)
The diagram opposite illustrates the protocol stack for UE to CN signalling, when the UE is connected to the network and operating in dedicated mode. RANAP Services RANAP provides the signalling service between UTRAN and the CN that is required to fulfil the RANAP functions. RANAP services are divided into three groups based on Service Access Points.
General control services

General control services are related to the whole Iu interface instance between RNC and logical CN domain, and are accessed in CN through the General Control SAP. They utilise connectionless signalling transport provided by the Iu signalling bearer.
Notification services
Notification services are related to specified UEs or all UEs in specified area, and are accessed in CN through the Notification SAP. They utilise connectionless signalling transport provided by the Iu signalling bearer.

Dedicated control services are related to one UE, and are accessed in CN through the Dedicated Control SAP. RANAP functions that provide these services are associated with Iu signalling connection that is maintained for the UE in question. The Iu signalling connection is realised with connection oriented signalling transport provided by the Iu signalling bearer. SCCP SCCP provides connectionless service, class 0, connection oriented service, class 2, separation of the connections mobile by mobile basis on the connection oriented link and establishment of a connection oriented link on a mobile by mobile basis. MTP3-B MTP3-b provides message routing, discrimination and distribution (for point-to-point link only), signalling link management load sharing and changeover/back between link within one link-set. SAAL-NNI SAAL-NNI consists of the following sub-layers: - SSCF [3], - SSCOP [2] and - AAL5 [6]. The SSCF maps the requirements of the layer above to the requirements of SSCOP. Also SAAL connection management, link status and remote processor status mechanisms are provided. SSCOP provides mechanisms for the establishment and release of connections and the reliable exchange of signalling information between signalling entities. Adapts the upper layer protocol to the requirements of the Lower ATM cells.
4-34
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Protocol Stacks Control Plane Protocol Stack (UE-CN SIGNALLING, Dedicated Channels, CS-Domain & PS-Domain)
RRC RLC MAC-d
RRC RLC MAC-d Split/ Comb DCH FP AAL2 Split/ Comb DCH FP AAL2 SCCP MTP3-b SAALNNI SCCP MTP3-b SAALNNI RANAP RANAP
Combining
ATM Phys
ATM Phys
ATM Phys
ATM Phys
MS
Phys
UE
Phys
Node
SRNC
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
4-35
Version 1 Rev 0
Protocol Stacks
Control Plane Protocol Stack (UE-CN Signalling, Shared Channels, CS-Domain)
The diagram opposite illustrates the protocol stack for UE to CN signalling, when the UE is connected to the network and operating on shared or common channels. The stack differs from that of dedicated mode, in that the CRNC is no longer transparent. This continues to provide the majority of the Layer 2 services (RRC, RLC, MAC-d), However, the CRNC is responsible for terminating the MAC-c/sh entity. On the diagram, the MUX-1 box in the CRNC represents the multiplexing of the various AAL2 connections coming from multiple SRNCs into MAC-c/sh. The MUX-2 box represents the multiplexing of various instances of MAC-d from the same SRNC into AAL2, for transfer to the MAC-c/sh at the CRNC. RACH/FACH Frame Protocol RACH/FACH Frame Protocols (FPs) are responsible for the transfer of Transport Blocks between the Node B and the DRNC for common/shared channels. These FPs will always add overhead to the payload, in the form of a header. In addition to providing a data transfer function, the common/shared FPs provide the following services: Support of transport channel synchronisation mechanism. Support of Node synchronisation mechanism.
4-36
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Protocol Stacks Control Plane Protocol Stack (UE-CN Signalling, Shared Channels, CS-Domain)
RRC RLC MAC-d MACc/sh MUX1 MACc/sh
RRC RLC MAC-d RANAP MUX2 RANAP
RACH/ FACH FP AAL2 ATM
RACH/ FACH FP
AAL2 ATM
AAL2
SCCP
AAL2
SCCP MTP3-b SAALNNI ATM
MTP3-b SAALNNI
ATM
ATM
ATM
Phys
UE
Phys
Phys
Phys
Phys
Phys Phys
SRNC
Phys
CN
Node B
CRNC
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
4-37
Version 1 Rev 0
IP
Protocol Stacks
User Plane Protocol Stack (Dedicated Channels, PS-Domain)
The diagram opposite shows the user plane protocol stack for user data transfer, using dedicated channels via the CN-PS. The user CS payload will be received at the GGSN from the external network (e.g. the Internet). The protocols used to transfer the payload across this interface may vary and are not described in this document. GPRS Tunnelling Protocol, User Plane (GTP-U) The user payload data packets, known as T-PDUs, arrive at the GGSN from the external PDN. Typically these will be IP based and addressed to an application running on the target UE. Alternate transport mechanisms, such as X25, may also be used. The T-PDUs will be presented to GTP, via the appropriate NSAPI for the source protocol. For UMTS the second version of GTP (version 1) will be used. GTP allows multi-protocol packets to be tunnelled through the UMTS/GPRS Backbone between GSNs and is necessary to forward packets between an external packet data network and an MS user. In the user plane, GTP uses a tunnelling mechanism (GTP-U) to provide a service for carrying user data packets. The GTP-U protocol is implemented by SGSNs and GGSNs in the UMTS/GPRS Backbone and by Radio Network Controllers (RNCs) in the UTRAN. No other systems need to be aware of GTP. UMTS/GPRS UEs are connected to an SGSN without being aware of GTP. A GTP tunnel in the GTP-U plane is defined for each PDP Context in the GSNs and/or each RAB in the RNC. A GTP tunnel is identified in each node with a Tunnel Endpoint ID (TEID), a UDP port number and an IP address. The TEID unambiguously identifies a tunnel endpoint in the receiving GTP-U protocol entity. The TEID values are negotiated and exchanged between tunnel endpoints using control plane procedures defined in protocols such as GTP-C (or RANAP, over the Iu) messages during the activation of the PDP context or RAB. Path Protocols UDP/IP is the only path protocol defined to transfer GTP messages in the version 1 of GTP.
UDP
A User Datagram Protocol (UDP) compliant with STD 0006 shall be used. The UDP destination port number for GTP-U messages is 2152.
IP
An Internet protocol compliant with STD 0005 shall be used. The IP destination address in a GTP message shall be the IP address of the destination GSN/RNC. The source address shall be the IP address of the originating GSN/RNC.
4-38
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
IP
Version 1 Rev 0
Protocol Stacks User Plane Protocol Stack (Dedicated Channels, PS-Domain)
AAP
AAP
IP
IP PDCP RLC MAC-d Split Comb DCH FP AAL2 ATM
IP
IP
PDCP RLC MAC-d
GTP-U UDP IP AAL5 ATM
GTP-U GTP-U UDP IP AAL5 ATM UDP IP
GTP-U UDP IP
Comb Split/ Comb
DCH FP AAL2 ATM
L2
L2
Phys UE
Phys
Phys
Phys
Phys
Phys
Phys
Phys
Phys
Phys PDN
Node B
SRNC
SGSN
GGSN
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
4-39
Version 1 Rev 0
IP
4-40
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Data Flow and Terrestrial Interfaces
Version 1 Rev 0
Chapter 5 Data Flow and Terrestrial Interfaces
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
5-1
Version 1 Rev 0
Data Flow and Terrestrial Interfaces
5-2
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Objectives
Version 1 Rev 0
Objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: State the transport mechanisms used for the UMTS transport network. Describe the basic principles of ATM. Describe the use of PDH and SDH bearers for UMTS.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
5-3
Version 1 Rev 0
Terrestrial Interfaces
One very important aspect that is sometimes overlooked is the transport medium required between the different entities. In the case of UMTS the Network Operator will run into problems if the wrong links are utilised. Speed of transfer and cost will be two of the major determining factors when planning the UMTS network. Other issues that need to be addressed are the types of converting equipment used between the different types of terrestrial interfaces. In the following pages a closer look will be taken at these aspects. It should also be mentioned that as data rates increase the use of E1/T1 systems become more difficult. ATM is the preferred transport mechanism on the CN. Voice and IP over ATM is conducted using ATM adaptation layers.
5-4
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Uu Iub Iu-PS Iu-CS RNC SGSN MSC Gn PSTN GGSN GMSC Gi/Gp PSTN PS or CS Network
UE
Node B
CDMA - FDD CDMA - TDD
ATM E1
ATM SDH
IP PCM
IP X25 PCM
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
5-5
Version 1 Rev 0
ATM Principles
ATM Principles
ATM is used to transfer different types of information with different rate factors over one or more common link with a high bit rate. This properties makes ATM an extremely useful system when it comes to wideband or broadband data transfer. With the standards in place it is now possible for packet switching techniques like Frame Relay or ATM to deliver high quality speech. Some of the intrinsic advantages ATM has over other network technologies are listed below: Considering data, voice, and video payload requirements, ATM was constructed. ATM cells are of fixed size, 53 bytes each with 48 bytes for payload and 5 for ATM header. This helps in reducing the packetization delay significantly, which is one of the major delay parameters. It supports extensive Quality of Service (QoS) parameters, which allows voice traffic to be transmitted across the network in a reliable jitter-free way. Various ATM Adaptation Layers (AALs) support various service classes capabilities. ATM switches have always been designed with effective traffic management capabilities, for example, call admission control, usage parameter control, traffic shaping, etc. Single network for voice, data, and video. Interworking with PSTN is relatively straightforward.
5-6
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
ATM Principles
Version 1 Rev 0
ATM Principles
Fixed Bit Stream Variable Bit Stream
Discontinues Bit Stream
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
5-7
Version 1 Rev 0
Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM)

Asynchronous Transfer Mode (ATM) is a technology originally designed for LANs that have transport, switching and network management facilities built into it. Maximum data rates for STM1 and STM4 respectively are: Primary User 155.2 Mb/s Network Interface 622.08 Mb/s In general terms ATM is a packet switching protocol made up of fixed length packets. The standard packet length is 53 Octets, 5 being header information and the remaining 48 user data, called the payload. The fixed length cell gives some key advantages over variable length structures. The first is that short cells can be switched quickly and economically. Secondly the queuing caused by long, variable length frames can be reduced to the wait time for a single 53 Octet frame, allowing time dependent voice and video to be transported. ATM can provide both ABR, CBR, VBR, UBR and UBR+ transport. These are described below: Constant Bit Rate (CBR), or Class A quality of service, is an ATM bandwidth-allocation service that requires the user to determine a fixed bandwidth requirement at the time the connection is set up so that the data can be sent in a steady stream. CBR service is often used when transmitting fixed-rate uncompressed video. Variable Bit Rate (VBR), or Class B quality of service, is an ATM bandwidth-allocation service that allows users to specify a throughput capacity (i.e., a peak rate) and a sustained rate but data is not sent evenly. VBR is often used when transmitting compressed packetized voice and video data, such as videoconferencing. Available Bit Rate (ABR), or Class C quality of service, is an ATM bandwidth-allocation service that adjusts the amount of bandwidth based on the amount of traffic in the network. ABR service provides a guaranteed minimum bandwidth capacity but allows data to be bursted at higher capacities when the network is free. Unspecified Bit Rate (UBR), or Class D quality of service, an ATM bandwidth-allocation service that does not guarantee any throughput levels and uses only available bandwidth. UBR is often used when transmitting data that can tolerate delays. Unspecified Bit Rate + (UBR+), is a best-efforts delivery service, but with a minimum cell rate (MCR) that allows you to choose a guaranteed delivery level. Of course, if there is bandwidth available, your UBR+ PVCs can burst up to the port speed. For USR 1.0 CBR is supported. From USR 2.0 UBR and UBR+ are also supported within the Node B, RNC and CN, the main benefits are shown below. UBR provides more efficient usage of ATM bandwidth for O&M (upload & download). UBR allows most of an E1 link to be dedicated downloading (were unlikely to be servicing any calls if emergency downloads are required, which is less cumbersome and time consuming without UBR. This is because there would be a need to reconfigure CBR O&M link before and after O&M download For Iub, having UBR allows over provisioning of the OAM VC and thus better efficiency for download of large code/config files as well as upload of large performance measurement files. For Iu-PS, having UBR allows over provisioning of the Iu-PS packet data traffic and better efficiency in the Iu-PS user plane. Benefit of UBR+ is that a specified amount of bandwidth will always be available. In the case of receiving a code download or sending a statistics upload with UBR+ the specified value for Minimum Download Cell Rate (MDCR) will be always available even during e.g. busy times in the middle of the day.
5-8
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Data transferred in Cells Fast Switching Supports Real-Time Services Connection Orientated - Virtual Circuits Resource Allocation on Requirement Basis Primary User Rate - 155.2 Mbps Network Interface - 622.08 Mbps No Error Correction or Flow Control
Header 5 Bytes
Payload 48 Bytes
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
5-9
Version 1 Rev 0
Virtual Channels and Paths

On a physical level ATM connects via the specification of Virtual Paths (VPs) and Virtual Channels (VCs). A Virtual Channel will be located inside a Virtual Path. A Virtual Channel Identifier (VCI) will identify the Virtual Channel and the Virtual Path Identifier (VPI) will identify the Virtual Path (VP). In total we could have up to 256 addresses for a VP User to Network Interface (UNI) and 4096 for a VP Network to Network Interface (NNI). When VCIs are used, up to 216 channels per path can be addressed.
Use of Virtual Channels and Paths

A virtual channel provides an end-to-end connection, referred to as a Virtual Channel Connection. This connection in turn may consist of a number of VC and VP components. These components are illustrated opposite and are defined as follows: Virtual Channel Link A virtual channel link is a unidirectional facility transporting ATM cells between two consecutive ATM entities where a VCI value is assigned, remapped or removed. For example, between an ATM endpoint and a VC Switch, or between two VC switches. Virtual Channel Connection A virtual channel connection is a concatenation of virtual channel connections. Virtual Path Link A virtual path link is a unidirectional facility transporting ATM cells between two consecutive ATM entities where a VPI value is assigned, remapped or removed. For example, between an ATM endpoint and a VC Switch, or between two VC switches. Virtual Path Connection A virtual path connection is a concatenation of virtual path connections.
5-10
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

Virtual Path (VP)
ATM Path
Virtual Channel (VC)
Each VP within the physical layer has a different VPI value Each VC within a VP has a different VCI value
Use of Virtual Channels and Paths

Virtual Channel Connection Endpoints Virtual Channel Connection Virtual Channel Link Virtual Channel Link
ATM END SYSTEM
VP Switch
VC Switch VC Switch - VCI and VPI values change
ATM END SYSTEM
Virtual Path Link
Virtual Path Link
Virtual Path Connection Virtual Path Connection Endpoints
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
5-11
Version 1 Rev 0
Virtual Path and Virtual Connection Switching

When addressing is carried out on VP level only a VP address would be needed since all the VCs are inside the VP. Therefore we would only switch on VP level like illustrated in the diagram. If however VCs need to be switched a VP Switch combined with a VC Switch would be needed. The switching in ATM could get complicated at times therefore special tools have been developed to help with this aspect.
5-12
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

VC Switch
Endpoint of VPC
VP Switch
VP Switch
Representation of VP Switching
Representation of VC and VP Switching
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
5-13
Version 1 Rev 0
ATM Adaptation Layers (AALs)

The ATM Adaptation Layer (AAL) is the protocol used between the ATM layer itself and higher layers. The main functionality is to adapt the information coming in from the higher layers so they can be transferred onto ATM. This is what gives ATM its powerful property of transferring many traffic types, and ensures appropriate service characteristics are provided. The AALs are divided into 5 different categories, where AAL1 has the lowest delay and AAL5 the highest. This means that services like speech will tend to go towards a lower AAL number. Horizontally the AAL protocol is divided into the Convergence Sublayer (CS) and the Segmentation and Reassembly Sublayer (SAR).
5-14
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

Class A Timing Relation Required Class B Class C Class D
Not Required
Bit Rate
Constant
Variable Connection Orientated
Available
Unspecified Connection Less
Connection Rate Emulation of Circuits CPCM AAL 1
Examples Service Type to be used
Variable Bit Rate Video AAL 2
Connection Orientated Data Transmission
Connection Less Data Transmission
AAL 3/4 or AAL 5
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
5-15
Version 1 Rev 0
The ATM Adaptation Process

The AAL consists of two sub-layers; The Convergence sub-layer (CS) and the segmentation and reassembly sub-layer (SAR).
Convergence Sub-Layer (CS)

The function of the CS is to divide very long packets into fixed-length packets called CS-service data units (CS-SDUs). It may add header and/or trailer information to the CS-SDU to generate a CS-protocol data unit (CS-PDU). Finally it passes the CS-PDUs to the SAR.
Segmentation and Reassembly (SAR)

At the source end, the SAR sub-layer is responsible for segmenting each CS-PDU received from the CS sub-layer into fixed-length SAR-SDUs according to the application traffic type. The SAR then appends a header and/or trailer to each SAR-SDU to generate an SAR-PDU that it sends to the ATM layer, to be built into the cell. At the destination end, the SAR is responsible for reassembling all SAR-PDUs belonging to the same CS-PDU and presenting the reassembled CS-PDU to the CS.
5-16
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
The ATM Adaptation Process Generic AAL Process
User Data
Header
CS PROCESS H CS-SDU T
User Data
Trailer
CS-SDU
CS-SDU
CS-PDU
H SAR PROCESS ATM LAYER
SAR-SDU
SAR-SDU
T SAR-PDU
SAR-PDU
SAR-PDU
ATM Cell
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
5-17
Version 1 Rev 0
ATM Adaptation Layer 2 (AAL2)

AAL 2 is designed for applications with a variable bit rate but requiring real time delivery. It supports mechanisms, which can identify and multiplex multiple users over a common ATM layer connection. AAL2 is a lot more efficient at transporting voice as there is a more efficient use of bandwidth due to silence detection and suppression as well as idle channel detection. In This type of AAL, the convergence sub-layer further divided into two parts. Common Part Convergence Sub-layer (CPCS), over which may operate zero or more Service Specific Convergence Sub-layers (SSCS). In UMTS the Higher level protocols used, do not require the support of an SSCS.
CPCS
User information, from multiple users is received at the CPCS sub-layer and placed into a container of variable length CPS-Information Field (1-64 Octets) and a three octet CPS Header. The header contains; the Channel ID(CID) which identifies the sub-stream within the AAL2 connection. The Length Indication(LI) indicates the length of the CPS-INFO payload. The User-to-User Indication(UUI) carries information between the SSCSs/Applications running above the CPS. The Header Error Control(HEC) can be used to report errors within the header. Dependent upon size multiple CPS Packets, from different sources, can be multiplexed to form 47 Octet CPS-SDUs, (If necessary, padding can be added to give 47-Octets). A further header is added to the SDU to yield a 48 Octet CPS-PDU. The CPS-PDU header contains an Offset Field(OSF) which is a pointer to the first octet of the next CPS-Packet in the CPS-SDU. The 1 bit sequence number is an alternating logic-1, logic-0, logic-1, etc sequence. A single parity bit is also included. The Complete CPS-PDU is now 48-octets, and is now passed unchanged to the ATM layer, to be built directly into an ATM cell.
5-18
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

3-Octet CPS Header User Data
CID 8bits
LI 6bits
UUI 5bits
HEC 5bits
CPS-Information field VARIABLE 1 - 64 Octets
CPS-Packet
Start Field CPS-SDU
OSF 6bits
SN P 1bit 1bit
Info packets or padding 47 Octets
CPS-PDU
HEADER
OSF
SN
Info Packets or padding
ATM Cell (53-Octets)
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
5-19
Version 1 Rev 0
ATM Adaptation Layer 5 (AAL 5)

The most recent of the adaptation layers, AAL 5 is also becoming the most popular and has largely superseded AAL3/4. Often referred to as the Simple And Efficient Adaptation Layer (SEAL), it supports a wide variety of applications. It is the adaptation layer of choice for the ATM signalling protocol on VCI 5. MPEG video and Frame Relay also use AAL 5. Unlike AAL2 (or AAL 3/4) AAL5 does not support multiplexing of data from multiple higher layer applications AAL 5 takes any user data, normally as a frame, adds some padding and an 8-byte trailer so that the whole of the resulting CPCS PDU is n x 48-bytes long. The PDUs are then sent for segmentation by SAR and forwarded 48-bytes at a time to the ATM layer. When the last cell from the PDU is given to the ATM layer, the ATM layer is informed that it is the last cell. The ATM layer then sets the "End of User Data" bit in the ATM header to inform the receiving end. In the receiver, the ATM layer passes the payloads up to the SAR sublayer. When the last cell arrives, it is recognised by the ATM layer. The ATM layer informs the SAR layer that the payload is the last for that frame. The SAR presents the assembled PDU to the CS. The CS performs a CRC on the PDU and compares this with the last 4 bytes in the trailer. If the CRCs match, the CS then checks the 2-byte Length Indicator (LI). The LI field indicates the amount of user data in the PDU so that the CS can remove the padding and recover the user data. Should the CRC not match, then the whole PDU is discarded. AAL 5 relies on the application to recover from lost frames. For video applications, the last correct frame received would be repeated. For LAN data, the transport protocol would arrange for re-transmission of the missing frame. CPI PDU SDU CPCS Common Part Indicator Protocol Data Unit Service Data Unit Common Part Convergence Sub-layer LI AAL CRC SAR Length Indicator ATM Adaptation Layer Cyclic Redundancy Check Segmentation and Re-assembly
5-20
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

User Data
AAL 5 SDUs
1 - 65,535 bytes
CPCS-PDU Payload
0-47
PAD
1
UUI
1
CPI
2
LI
4
CRC
CPCS PDUs
SAR Payload
SAR Payload
SAR Payload
SAR PDUs
H SAR Payload
H SAR Payload
H SAR Payload
ATM CELLS
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
5-21
Version 1 Rev 0
E1/T1 Architecture
E1/T1 Architecture
Logical Links
We have seen some of the mediums over which the data is transmitted, now let us consider the format of the data that is carried over these mediums. In GSM all the data is in digital form, and the path that the data takes is called a logical link. The format of the data is dependent on where in the system the data is and what sort of data needs to be transferred.
E1
In the European GSM system the basic building block of data that gets carried around the network is based around the multiplexed 2.048 Mbit/s frame. This frame contains 32 channels of 64 Kbit/s. 30 are used for user information. Channel 0 is reserved for timing and synchronisation and channel 16 is used for signalling. E1 also specifies the sampling rate, frequency bandwidth, bits per sample, time slots per frame, output bit rate, encoding law and the dedicated signalling and synchronisation channels.
T1
T1 is the American version of E1. There are significant differences in the make up of the TDM frame. T1 uses 24 time slots per frame, with 24 PCM channels per frame. The output bit rate is 1.544 Mbit/s and the signalling used in the frame is only used once every 6th frame, instead of every frame in E1.
5-22
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
E1/T1 Architecture
Version 1 Rev 0
E1/T1 Architecture
E1 Frequency Range Sample Rate Bits per Sample Time Slots per Frame Output Bit Rate Encoding Law Signalling Capabilities 300 - 3400Hz 8000Hz 8 32 2.048 Mbps A LAW TS0 Sync TS16 Signalling T1/DS1 Frequency Sampling Rate Bits per Sample Bits per Frame PCM Channels per Frame Output Bit Rate Encoding Law Signalling Capabilities 300 - 3400Hz 8000Hz 8 193 24 1.544 Mbps Law 1st bit in frame - Sync 1 bit in timeslots 6 and 12
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
5-23
Version 1 Rev 0
ATM Cell to E1 Cell Mapping

The ATM cell is mapped into bits 9 to 128 and bits 137 to 256 (i.e. time slots 1 to 15 and time slots 17 to 31) of the 2048 kbit/s frame as specified in ITU-T Recommendation G.704[2] and as shown in the Figure opposite. The ATM cell octet structure shall be aligned with the octet structure of the frame. There shall be no relationship between the beginning of an ATM cell and the beginning of an 2048 kbit/s transmission frame. Since the frame payload capacity (30 octets) is not an integer multiple of cell length (53 octets), ATM cells will cross the E1 frame boundary.
5-24
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

TS0 Synch ATM Mapping Field 15 Octets TS16 Sig ATM Mapping Field 15 Octets
125 s E1 frames - 256 bits per frame
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
5-25
Version 1 Rev 0
E1 Link Multiplexing
The standard E1 and T1 streams can be further multiplexed to put more channels over one transmission path.
5-26
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
E1 Link Multiplexing E1 Series Hierarchies
E1 2.048 Mb/s
E2 8.448 Mb/s
E3 34.368 Mb/s
E4 139.264 Mb/s
E5 564.992 Mb/s
30 TCH x4 120 TCH x4 480 TCH x4 1,920 TCH x4 7,680 TCH
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
5-27
Version 1 Rev 0
Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA)

Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) is a methodology which provides a modular bandwidth, for user access to ATM networks and for connection between ATM network elements, at rates between the traditional order multiplex level. An example is to achieve rates between the DS1/E1 and DS3/E3 levels in the asynchronous digital hierarchies. DS2/E2 physical links are not necessarily readily available throughout a given network. Therefore the introduction of ATM Inverse Multiplexers provides an effective method of combining the transport bandwidths of multiple links (e.g., DS1/E1 links) grouped to collectively provide higher intermediate rates. The ATM Inverse Multiplexing technique involves inverse multiplexing and de-multiplexing of ATM cells in a cyclical fashion among links grouped to form a higher bandwidth logical link whose rate is approximately the sum of the link rates. This is referred to as an IMA group. The figure opposite provides a simple illustration of the ATM Inverse Multiplexing technique in one direction. The same technique applies in the opposite direction. IMA groups terminate at each end of the IMA virtual link. In the transmit direction, the ATM cell stream received from the ATM layer is distributed on a cell by cell basis, across the multiple links within the IMA group. At the far-end, the receiving IMA unit recombines the cells from each link, on a cell by cell basis, recreating the original ATM cell stream. The aggregate cell stream is then passed to the ATM layer. The IMA interface periodically transmits special cells that contain information that permit reconstruction of the ATM cell stream at the receiving end of the IMA virtual link. The receiver end reconstructs the ATM cell stream after accounting for the link differential delays, smoothing CDV introduced by the control cells, etc. These cells, defined as IMA Control Protocol (ICP) cells, provide the definition of an IMA frame. The transmitter must align the transmission of IMA frames on all links. This allows the receiver to adjust for differential link delays among the constituent physical links. Based on this required behavior, the receiver can detect the differential delays by measuring the arrival times of the IMA frames on each link. At the transmitting end, the cells are transmitted continuously. If there are no ATM layer cells to be sent between ICP cells within an IMA frame, then the IMA transmitter sends filler cells to maintain a continuous stream of cells at the physical layer. The insertion of Filler cells provides cell rate decoupling at the IMA sublayer. The Filler cells should be discarded by the IMA receiver.
5-28
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Inverse Multiplexing for ATM (IMA) Inverse Multiplexing and De-multiplexing of ATM cells
IMA Group PHY
Physical Link #0
IMA Group PHY
PHY
Single ATM CellStream from ATM Layer
Physical Link #1
PHY
Original ATM Cell Stream to ATM Layer
PHY
Physical Link #2
PHY
Tx direction: cells distributed across links in round robin sequence Rx direction: cells recombined into single ATM stream
IMA Frames
IMA Frame 2
ATM ATM ATM F ICP2 F
IMA Frame 1
F ATM F ICP1 ATM
IMA Frame 0
F ATM F ICP0 Link 0
M-1 F
1 F
0 F
M-1 ATM
M-1
1 F
0 F Link 1
ICP2 ATM
ICP1 ATM ATM ATM ATM
ICP0 ATM
ATM ATM ICP2
ATM
ATM ICP1 ATM ATM
ATM ICP0 ATM
Link 2
Time
ICP1 ICP Cell in Frame # 1 F Filler Cell ATM ATM Layer Cell
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
5-29
Version 1 Rev 0
Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH)

With the advent of fully digital and synchronous networks the CCITT defined a new multiplexing hierarchy called Synchronous Digital Hierarchy (SDH). In the USA is called Synchronous Optical Network (SONET) with the two major differences being terminology and the basic line rates used (SONET - 51.84 Mbps). SDH uses a basic transmission rate of 155.52 Mbps (abbreviated to 155 Mbps) and multiples of 4n. This basic rate is known as a Synchronous Transport Module level 1 (STM-1), higher rates are STM-4 and STM-16. As with PDH, the signal is repetitive frames with a repeat period of 125s. Any of the PDH rates can be multiplexed into the STM-1. The main advantages of SDH are: It allows direct access to tributary signals without demultiplexing the composite signal. It supports advance operations, administration and maintenance by dedicating channels for this purpose. The network can therefore be reconfigured under software control from remote terminals. Overhead bytes have been preserved for growth to support services and technologies of the future.
5-30
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

SDH Bit Rates Synchronous Transport Module STM - 1 STM - 4 STM - 16 STM - N Transmission Rate 155.52 Mbps 622.08 Mbps 2,488.32 Mbps N x 155.52 Mbps
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
5-31
Version 1 Rev 0
SDH Drop and Insert
SDH Drop and Insert

SDH overcomes the limitations of plesiochronous networks, and will allow transmission networks to evolve to meet the demands of emerging broadband services.
Network Simplification
Synchronous transmission equipment eliminates the multiplexer mountain, leading to lower equipment and maintenance costs, and improved service provisioning. The diagram shows how 2Mbps channels can be dropped and inserted from a Synchronous Transfer Module, Type 1 (STM-1) by means of remote commands at a network management station. The flexibility of SDH transmission is attractive to carriers because it offers the potential of generating new revenues.
Survivability
SDH includes overheads for end-to-end monitoring and maintenance of transmission equipment; the network management station can immediately identify the failure of links and equipment. Furthermore, as shown in the diagram, an SDH network can be constructed with a self-healing ring architecture that automatically reroutes traffic until the faulty segment is repaired; there will be no disruption of service to the end user, allowing carriers to guarantee service levels.
Software Control
SDH also includes overheads for management channels; these are used for performance monitoring, equipment configuration, resource management, network security, inventory management, network planning and network design. Since all of these management operations can be performed remotely, SDH offers the possibility of centralised network management and provisioning, with associated cost savings.
Bandwidth on Demand
The flexibility of SDH allows carriers to allocate network capacity dynamically in that users will be able to subscribe at very short notice to large bandwidth services e.g. video-conferencing. This feature opens up the possibility of providing new services e.g. high-speed LAN interconnection and High Definition TV.
5-32
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SDH Drop and Insert
Version 1 Rev 0
SDH Drop and Insert

SDH Drop and Insert
155Mbps alternate routing using ring topology
SDH Mux
2Mbps interface
Management of 2Mbps traffic
SDH Mux
2Mbps interface
12
63
155Mbps
155Mb/s
SDH Mux 155Mbps SDH Mux

2Mbps interface 2Mbps interface
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
5-33
Version 1 Rev 0
Principles of SDH
Principles of SDH
Although a full description of SDH is beyond the scope of this course, this section will cover the main principles. The diagram shows the SDH multiplex structure, indicating how an STM is formed from various PDH traffic rates. The following terms are used in the diagram, and further explained below: C - Container VC - Virtual Container TU - Tributary Units TUG - Tributary Unit Group AU - Administrative Unit AUG - Administrative Unit Group STM - Synchronous Transfer Module
The following table lists the container size suffices used when referring to equivalent PDH traffic rates within SDH signals: Container Suffix 0 11 12 21 22 31 32 4 Bit rate kbps 64 1,554 2,048 6,312 8,448 34,368 44,736 139,264
5-34
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Principles of SDH
Version 1 Rev 0
Principles of SDH
SDH Multiplex Structure
STM-N AUG x1 AU-4 VC-4 x3 x3 TUG-3 x7 AU-3 VC-3 x7 C-3 C-4 140 Mbit/s
x1
TU-3
VC-3
45 Mbit/s 34 Mbit/s
TUG-2
x1 x3
TU-2
VC-2
C-2
6 Mbit/s
x4
TU-12
VC-12
C-12
2 Mbit/s
TU-11
VC-11
C-11
1.5 Mbit/s
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
5-35
Version 1 Rev 0
Typical UMTS Transport Network

The diagram opposite shows a typical implementation of an ATM transport network to support the UMTS interfaces. The UMTS nodes as shown are connected to a single SDH ring, whereas there may actually be several rings involved depending on the network providers configuration and may include PDH interfaces as well. Node Bs use E1 physical interfaces and in the case where multiple E1s are used IMA is utilised by the Node B. The ATM Mux shown in the figure is expected to provide E1 (VC-12) to STM-1 (VC-4) mapping and vice versa in addition to providing IMA and reverse IMA capability. For a large number of Node Bs, the transport network will have to provide a significant number of E1 interfaces. The ATM switch will be utilised for VP and VC switching and will be expected to provide aggregation of logical interfaces to physical interfaces via VP and VC switching. The ATM network is also expected to be configurable to limit the throughput of a given physical interface. For example, the RNC STM-1 physical interfaces need to be limited to a bandwidth of 100Mbps due to the hardware limitations.
Daisy Chaining
From USR 2.0 it will be possible to configure Node Bs in a daisy chain. All types of daisy chain are supported with the exception of closed loop. Up to 3 Node Bs (4 including hub node B) can be daisy chained.
Circuit Emulation
From USR 2.0 the node B has the ability to terminate an ATM AAL1 connection and generate a circuit data stream for use by another piece of network equipment connected to the Node B. Using circuit emulation, the E1 connections are routed first through the UMTS base station where it uses its ATM data, and converts the ATM AAL1 data to circuit data. The resulting circuit data is sent out another E1 connection to the attached network equipment. This is likely to be a BTS as operators move from GSM to UMTS.
ATM Protection Switch

From USR 2.0 this feature provides higher availability radio network system, especially improved availability, when it is used in addition to a lower layer protection (e.g. SDH). This is done by providing 1:1 redundancy for important Permanent Virtual Circuits(PVCs), these are NCP PVC, ALCAP PVC, NodeB OM PVC, it is set by configuration. The system switches from the primary PVCs to the secondary ones automatically under the following conditions: Detection of signal failure of the primary PVCs Detection of signal degradation of the primary PVCs OAM command from operator Others scenarios specified in I.630 not covered in this course. To determine that a PVC is not functioning properly, the equipment collects PM statistics on quality of the PVC (lost packets, buffer overflow, etc), in order to indicate to the OAM that a switch to the secondary PVC is needed.
5-36
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

Ethernet (Option under investigation) STM-1
RNC
OMC
STM-1 Ethernet
ATM Switch
MSCu
RNC
STM-1
SDH Ring (STM-1/STM-4/STM-16)

Node B Node B
E1, IMA E1, IMA
ATM Switch ATM Mux

STM-1 E1, IMA STM-1
SGSN
E1, IMA
Node B
Node B Node B
BTS
RNC
Circuit Emulation
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
5-37
Version 1 Rev 0
5-38
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
W-CDMA Theory
Version 1 Rev 0
Chapter 6 W-CDMA Theory
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
6-1
Version 1 Rev 0
W-CDMA Theory
6-2
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Objectives
Version 1 Rev 0
Objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: Describe various options for multiple access schemes. State the Characteristics of UMTS W-CDMA. State why W-CDMA has been chosen for the UMTS multiple access scheme. Describe W-CDMA spreading and despreading procedures. Describe the use of orthagonal codes and the channelisation code tree. Describe the scrambling and summation process. Describe the effects of multi-path radio channels and the purpose of the RAKE receiver.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
6-3
Version 1 Rev 0
Multiple Access Schemes

There are 3 forms of multiple access schemes, frequency, time and code. The major issue with the first two is the requirement to have guard bands.
Frequency Division Multiple Access (FDMA)

FDMA divides radio channels into a range of radio frequencies and is used in the traditional analogue system. With FDMA, only one subscriber is assigned to a channel at one time. Other subscribers cannot access this channel until the original call is terminated or handed off to a different channel.
Time Division Multiple Access (TDMA)

TDMA is a common multiple access technique employed in digital cellular systems. It divides radio channels into time slots to obtain higher capacity. As with FDMA, no other conversations can access an occupied channel until that channel is vacated.
Code Division Multiple Access (CDMA)

CDMA assigns each subscriber a unique code to put multiple users on the same channel at the same time. CDMA users can share the same frequency channel because their conversations are distinguished only by digital code.
6-4
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Power FDMA Power
Time
Time
Frequency
TDMA Codes Frequency
Time
CDMA Frequency
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
6-5
Version 1 Rev 0
W-CDMA Characteristics
The vital statistics for our W-CDMA UMTS system is shown opposite. Dont be confused by the slots and frames, this is not a TDMA system, every user does share the same band. The frames and slots are used for interleaving, power control. The major points are: FDD requires paired frequencies for up and down channels. The chip rate of 3.84 Mcps provides a bandwidth of 5 MHz. A chip is the original signal split or chipped by the spreading code. The carrier spacing of 200 kHz is used to allow re-farming of GSM frequencies which have been set at 200 kHz spacing. The frame length is set at 10 ms. Each frame is split into 15 timeslots, each timeslot contains user data, power control and signalling data. The UMTS system does not require synchronisation due to the framing structure and use of matched filters for the framing alignment. The spreading factor is the ratio between the user data and the chip rate. As the user data increases this factor will vary between 4 and 512. The spreading factor is a rough indication of the number of users in the system. The user data rates available in the FDD system is up to 384 Kbps.
6-6
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Multiple Access Scheme Duplexing Method Chip Rate Bandwidth Carrier Spacing Frame Length Slots per Frame Inter-cell Synchronization Spreading Factor User Data Rate
CDMA FDD 3.84 Mcps 5 MHz 200 kHz Raster 10 ms 15 None Variable (4-512) 3-384 Kbps
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
6-7
Version 1 Rev 0
Re-Use of Frequency
Re-Use of Frequency
Mobile telephones and cell broadcast networks use cellular radio, a technique developed in recent years to enable the use of mobile telephones. It would be impossible to provide each phone with an individual radio frequency, so the idea of cellular radio evolved. A region is divided into geographical areas called cells, varying in size depending on the number of users in the area. In cities cells are small whereas in rural areas cells are much larger. In GSM cells use a set of frequencies that are different from any neighbouring cell, but can be the same as another cell as long as it is far enough away. For UMTS, a frequency re-use of one, may be employed. This means that all cells within a given geographical area, or even an entire network may use the same carrier frequency. An alternate method of discriminating between neighbouring cells must therefore be found.
6-8
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Re-Use of Frequency
Version 1 Rev 0
Re-Use of Frequency
2 4 1 5 7 4 1 3 5 7 4 1 3 6 1 2 7 4 6 1 3 5 2 7 4 6 3 5 2 6 1 7
5 4 6 3 5 7 4 1 3 3 2 6 2 2
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
6-9
Version 1 Rev 0
Re-Use of Codes
Re-Use of Codes
Codes are used to uniquely identify a cell in the network. Frequency planning is more or less a thing of the past but code planning will have to be implemented. Code planning will be much easier then frequency planning since we have 512 Codes to play with, the code re-use pattern will thus be extremely large. Codes can be reused when the separation between cells containing the same channel set is far enough apart so that co-channel interference can be kept below acceptable levels. The number of cells in a cluster is 512, which provides greater separation between co-channel cells than GSM.
6-10
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Re-Use of Codes
Version 1 Rev 0
Re-Use of Codes
31 1
30 29 26 32 36
7 28 27 25 34 35
5 6 7 14 2 37
1 4 15 4 13 33 41
2 17 16 6 5 40
10 4 12 22 23 24
11 19 18 21 38 20 39
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
6-11
Version 1 Rev 0
Spectral Efficiency (GSM and UMTS)

The Slide opposite shows how spectrally efficient UMTS and GSM is in comparison to each other when employed in a multi-cellular structure. The capacity, which Shannon derived in 1947, provided a Law, which we now call Shannons Law. This details the digital capacity of the link given the transmit power and the bandwidth. If we are using, FDMA, TDMA or CDMA, the capacity is still controlled by this law. However, some gains are made by technology and coding methods.
6-12
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

GSM 8 Calls = 200 kHz Carrier 1 Call = 25 kHz UMTS 256 Calls = 5 MHz Carrier 1 Call = 19.4 kHz
7 x 200 kHz = 1.4 MHz 1 Call = 25 kHz
7 Cells, 5 MHz 1 Call = 2.8 kHz
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
6-13
Version 1 Rev 0
Direct Spread (DS)-CDMA Implementation

Transmitter
The digital modulator will take digital speech/data and multiply it with the spreading code. The radio modulator moves the baseline signal from the digital modulator onto a 2GHz carrier to produce the W-CDMA output.
Receiver
The modulated carrier is moved by the radio demodulator to the digital demodulator which can be very complicated due to the large number of users. Here the input is multiplied by the de-spreading codes to produce digital speech.
6-14
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Single User Channel
Multiple User Channel
Multiple User Channel
Output
5 MHz
5 MHz
5 MHz
Digital Signal
Digital Modulator
Radio Modulator
W-CDMA Modulated Carrier C o m b i n e r S p l i t t e r
Radio Demodulator
Digital Demodulator
Digital Signal
Tx
Spreading Code Generator Digital Modulator
Radio Carrier
Radio Carrier
Spreading Code Generator Digital Demodulator
Rx
Digital Signal
Radio Modulator
Radio Demodulator
Digital Signal
Input
External Interference
t0
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
6-15
Version 1 Rev 0
Spreading
Spreading
The spreading operation is the multiplication of each user data bit with a "Spreading Code" , which is a pre-defined bit pattern. To discriminate between User data "bits" and spreading code "bits", the symbols in the spreading code are referred to as "Chips". The chip rate for UMTS is fixed at 3.84 Mcps. After the spreading operation each "Bit" of the data signal is represented by a number of "chips". The number of chips representing each bit is referred to as the Spreading Factor (SF) and is given by dividing the chip rate by the source signal bit rate; in this example: 3.84 Mcs / 480 kbps = (SF=8) The spreading operation has resulted in an increase of the "signalling rate of the user data, in this case by a factor of 8, and corresponds to a widening of the "spectrum" occupied by the user data signal. Due to this, CDMA systems are more generically referred to as "Spread Spectrum" systems. The SF is also referred to as the Processing Gain (PG), which is expressed as a Decibel ratio and describes the gain or amplitude increase that will be applied to the signal at the receiving station as a result of the de-spreading operation. This concept is described in more detail later in this chapter
6-16
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Spreading
Version 1 Rev 0
Spreading
Data 480 kB/s
1 1
Spreading Code 3.84 Mcs
1 1
Spread Data
1 1
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
6-17
Version 1 Rev 0
De-spreading
De-spreading
De-spreading is performed at the receiving station (UE or Node B) by multiplying the chip rate, spread user data signal by a chip rate spreading code. By using the same spreading code as used at the transmitting station for the spreading operation, the multiplication of the two chip rate signals will reproduce the original bit rate user data signal. To aid accurate recovery of the user data, a Correlation Receiver is employed in most CDMA systems. The correlation receiver integrates the product of the de-spreading process on a chip-by-chip basis. In the upper diagram opposite, the example shown illustrated that for a perfectly received de-spread signal, the correlation receiver output has effectively "Lifted" the amplitude of the received signal by a factor of 8, a function of the processing gain.
6-18
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
De-spreading
Version 1 Rev 0
De-spreading
Spread Data
1 1
Spreading Code
1 1
Correlation RX Integrator O/P
Recovered Data
1 1
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
6-19
Version 1 Rev 0
Orthogonal Codes
Orthogonal Codes
Transmissions from a single source are separated by channelisation codes. The channelisation codes of UTRA are based upon the Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor (OVSF) technique. There are a finite number of OVSF codes available, and some restrictions in their use. OVSF codes are, as their name implies, orthogonal codes. Orthogonal codes possess good cross correlation properties allowing easy discrimination between signals produced using correctly selected codes. For OVSF the cross correlation between codes is zero, meaning interferer signals between different codes is effectively "zero" after correlation.
Channelisation Code Tree

For separating channels from the same source, channelisation codes called Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factors are used. The lines in the diagram represent codes, these are Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor (OVSF) codes, allowing to mix in the same timeslot channels with different spreading factors while preserving the orthogonality. The OVSF codes can be defined using the code tree shown opposite. Each level in the code tree defines a Spreading Factor (SF) indicated in the figure. All codes within the code tree cannot be used simultaneously in a given timeslot. A code can be used in a timeslot if and only no other code on the path from the specific code to the root of the tree or in the sub-tree opposite the specific code is used in this timeslot. This means that the number of available codes in a slot is not fixed but depends on the rate and spreading factor of each physical channel. The spreading codes can be used to identify individual channels, but a mobile usually has to identify the base station that it is currently parented on. A long code is usually used for that.
6-20
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Orthogonal Codes
Version 1 Rev 0
Orthogonal Codes Channelisation Code Tree
Cch, 8, 0
Cch, 4, 0 Cch, 2, 0 (1, 1) Cch, 4, 1 Cch, 1, 0 (1, 1, -1, -1) (1, 1, 1, 1)
(1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1, 1)
Cch, 8, 1
(1, 1, 1, 1, -1, -1, -1, -1)
Cch, 8, 2
(1, 1, -1, -1, 1, 1, -1, -1)
Cch, 8, 3
(1, 1, -1, -1,- 1, -1, 1, 1)
(1)
Cch, 4, 2 Cch, 2, 1 (1, -1) Cch, 4, 3 (1, -1, -1, 1) (1, -1, 1, -1)
Cch, 8, 4
(1, -1, 1,- 1, 1, -1, 1, -1)
Cch, 8, 5
(1, -1, 1, -1, -1, 1, -1, 1)
Cch, 8, 6
(1, -1, -1, 1, 1, -1, -1, 1)
Cch, 8, 7
(1, -1, -1, 1, -1, 1, 1, -1)
SF = 1
SF = 2
SF = 4
SF = 8
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
6-21
Version 1 Rev 0
De-spreading Other Users Signals

It must be remembered that in a CDMA system, all users are potentially transmitting on the same frequency. This means that at any given receiver station, in addition to the desired signal, multiple interferer signals will also be received. It is the task of the correlation receiver to reject these interferer signals. The diagram opposite shows the effect of de-spreading and correlation at a given receiving station (e.g UE "A"), on an interferer signal, (e.g a signal transmitted on the same carrier for reception by UE "B"). The de-spreading/correlation of the interferer signal will result in a cross correlation of zero (i.e. the output of the integration process will be zero). This process is only true when correctly selected orthogonal spreading codes are employed.
6-22
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

Data for UE B 1 -1
Spreading Code 1 -1 for UE B
Spread Data for UE B
1 -1
Spread Code for UE A
1 -1
Correlation RX Integrator O/P at UE A
Recovered Data 1 at UE A -1
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
6-23
Version 1 Rev 0
Processing Gain
Processing Gain
Processing Gain can be defined as the Chip Rate divided by the bit rate. This gives a ratio that can be converted to decibels by using the following formula. PG = 10 x log SF The gain that we get from the Processing Gain is an extremely important part of CDMA. It is in fact because of this relationship that CDMA is so effective and is used even in space transmissions. Processing gain will determine how much the received signal can be lifted out of the noise floor. There is one simple rule to follow, the higher the SF the higher the processing gain will be, the lower the SF the lower the processing gain. As we know, the SF is also inversely proportional to the speed of the transmission. This means that the higher the speed of transmission the lower the processing gain will be. Due to this relationship the power output must be increased for any transmitter if the transmission rate is increased due to the loss in Processing Gain. This will also mean that if the Frame Erasure Rate (FER) is increased on the receiver side the power must be increased or the transmission rate must drop on the transmitter side to meet the FER requirement.
6-24
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Processing Gain
Version 1 Rev 0
Processing Gain
PG = 10 x log (Chip Rate/Bit Rate) or PG = 10 x log (SF)
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
6-25
Version 1 Rev 0
Exercise 1 - Spreading
This Exercise demonstrates the Modulo-2 Addition, Spreading Factor usage, Code Lengths and in general will give the student a feel for the Spreading Principle.
NOTES
____________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
6-26
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Spreading Data 1 -1
Spreading Code 1 -1
Spread Data
1 -1 De-spreading
Spreading Code 1 -1
De-spread Data
1 -1
Calculation Box SF = 4 PG = 4 (ratio) PG = 6 dB
S/N = 5dB
C/I = 5 dB - 6 dB = -1 dB
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
6-27
Version 1 Rev 0
Exercise 2 - Spreading/Despreading
To gain some experience in Spreading the student can complete the following exercise. The student can complete the despreading part of the exercise and then calculate the SF and PG. See if it matches with the answers provided. Note the irregular structure in the answer. NOTES
____________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
6-28
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Spreading Data 1 -1
Spreading Code 1 -1 Spread Data 1 -1 De-spreading Spreading Code 1 -1 De-spread Data 1 -1
1 Wrong Spreading Code -1 De-spread Data 1 Wrong Code -1

Calculation Box SF = 4 PG = 4 (ratio) PG = 6 dB
S/N = 5dB
C/I = 5 dB - 6 dB = -1 dB
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
6-29
Version 1 Rev 0
In this exercise the student must complete the following: 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. Determine the SF used? Do the spreading part of the exercise? Do the despreading part of the exercise using the right code? Do the despreading part of the exercise using the wrong code? Complete the calculation?
NOTES
____________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
____________________________________________________________________________________________
6-30
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Spreading Data 1 -1
Spreading Code 1 -1 Spread Data 1 -1 De-spreading Spreading Code 1 -1 De-spread Data 1 -1
Wrong 1 Spreading Code -1 De-spread Data 1 Wrong Code -1

Calculation Box SF = PG = PG = C/I = = -1 dB
S/N = 5dB
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
6-31
Version 1 Rev 0
Scrambling
Scrambling
As previously described, OVSF spreading codes can be used to separate individual users on a common RF carrier freq. However, because of the need to maintain orthogonality of codes, the number of codes available is very limited (512 Downlink, 256 Uplink). These 512 code must be reused in every cell, as such they do not become unique to a cell and users located at the boundaries of cells, would receive transmissions using the same OVSF code, from more than one cell. For UMTS therefore, OVSF codes are used only as channelisation codes, used identify individual physical channels. A further coding, process, known as a "Scrambling" is performed, in order to discriminate between the transmissions between different cells on the downlink and different UEs on the uplink. Each physical channel is first individually spread to chip rate using a channelisation code (Cch sf,k) taken from the OVSF code tree, resulting in an increase in bandwidth of the signal form "Bit Rate" to "Chip Rate" The Sequence of chips produced by the channelisation process is then "Scrambled", using a chip-to-chip multiplication with a complex-valued scrambling code (Csc). The code chosen is used to identify the source of the signal. As scrambling is performed on top of spreading, it has no further effect on the bandwidth of the signal. Although the primary purpose of using a scrambling code is to identify all channels from a single source, that single source may use more than scrambling code. For example, in the downlink, a cell may transmit using one of 16 possible scrambling codes. After scrambling, all physical channels are then combined, using complex addition, before being forwarded to the RF Modulator for transmission.
6-32
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Scrambling
Version 1 Rev 0
Scrambling
Channel x Data
Cch SF,x Csc,x
Channel y Data
Cch SF,x Csc, x
Channel z Data
Cch SF,x Csc,x
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
6-33
Version 1 Rev 0
Scrambling Codes vs Channelisaton Codes

The Slide shows the major differences between Scrambling Codes (SC) and Channelisation Codes (CC).
6-34
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
CC Usage Uplink Usage Downlink Length Uplink Length Downlink Number of Codes available Separation of Data & Control Channels (from the same UE) Separation of channels to different UEs 4 - 256 Chips 4 - 512 Chips 512 Uplink and Downlink
SC Separation of UEs Separation of Cells LC - 10ms=38400 Chips or SC = 66.7us = 256 Chips LC =38400 Chips Uplink = 2 1 = 16,777,215 18 Downlink = 2 1 = 262,143 (truncated to 8,192) LC=10ms = Gold Code SC = Extended S2 Family No effect on Bandwidth
24
Code Family Spreading
OVSF Increases Tx Bandwidth
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
6-35
Version 1 Rev 0
Short Codes vs Long Codes

Short codes and Long codes are both used in the UMTS system. The main advantage of Short Codes is that they have good Auto Correlation properties. This means that they are very easy to synchronise to. The main advantage of long codes is that they have excellent cross correlation properties. This means that they are very resistant to interference from other codes in the network.
6-36
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Short codes Code sequence length <Timeslot Code sequence repeated within every timeslot Good auto correlation properties Bad cross correlation properties Planning Difficult
Long codes Code sequence length >> Timeslot Code sequence repeated for each Radio Frame Bad auto correlation properties (long repetition cycle) Good cross correlation properties Planning easy
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
6-37
Version 1 Rev 0
Scrambling and Summation

The diagram opposite illustrates the process of scrambling and summation of multiple channels, prior to modulation onto the RF carrier and transmission over the UMTS air interface (Uu). For the purposes of this example, three separate data streams (Channels X, Y and Z), each carrying a user bit sequence of "1,0,0,1", have been spread using channelisation codes of Cch 8,1 , Cch 8,2 and Cch 8,3 respectively. The spread signals are then independently scrambled using a single scrambling code. The resultant chip sequences are then combined using complex addition, to produce the multi level digital baseband signal, that will be used to modulate the RF carrier.
6-38
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Spread Data Channel X Cch 8,1 Spread Data Channel Y Cch 8,2 Spread Data Channel Z Cch 8,3 Scrambling code Channel X after scrambling Channel Y after scrambling Channel Z after scrambling Complex added scrambled codes
1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 1 -1 +3 +2 +1 -1 -2 -3
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
6-39
Version 1 Rev 0
De-Scrambling and Data Recovery

The diagram opposite illustrates the processes of de-scrambling of a complex scrambled signal and the recovery of user data from one channel. The input signal, (derived from the example on the preceding page) is first de-scrambled by multiplication with the specified scrambling code. The result is a combined version of all received channels, represented by a complex chip sequence. The dispreading process must now be performed to recover the user data. The example illustrates the recovery of the data for Channel "X" from the preceding page. By performing a direct multiplication of the complex signal with the appropriate channelisation code, the illustrated correlation receiver output will be obtained. As can be seen, the integrated output indicates bit values of 1,0,0,1", the expected result for this example.
6-40
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

Received Scrambled
+1
-1 -2 -3 1 -1 +3 +2 +1 -1 -2 -3
+3 +2
Scrambling Code De-scrambled Signal
Chan Code for Chan Y (Cch8,2)
Correlation Output
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
6-41
Version 1 Rev 0
Multi-path Radio Channels

Radio propagation for mobile communications suffers greatly from the effects of mulipath reflections, diffractions and attenuation of the signal energy. These effects are causes by objects such as buildings, hills, etc, resulting in "Multipath Propagation", which has two main effects upon the signal.
Inter-symbol Interference
Inter-symbol interference occurs when the signal energy from more than one radio path, pertaining to a single symbol (or chip in the case of W-CDMA), such that the energy from the various paths overlaps. This results in the smearing of the signal, such that is hard to define where one chip starts and one chip ends and the true value of the chips may be distorted. This problem can be resolved, providing the delay between the two paths is greater than one chip period (0.26s at 3.84 Mcs). This equates to a path length difference of 78 m). Delays of 1 or 2 s are typical in urban areas, with 20s possible in hilly areas.
Signal Fade
In multi-path situations where path lengths are multiples of half a wavelength of the received frequency (7cm at 2GHz), the signals on two (or more) paths will arrive in anti-phase to each other. This results in cancellation of the signals, causing fast or Rayleigh fading. Such fading can result in signal level drops in the order of 20 to 30dB, making the reception of error free data bits very difficult.
6-42
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
6-43
Version 1 Rev 0
Matched Filter Operation

The main task of the matched filter is to determine the timing reference of the information as it arrives at the receiver. The filter will perform a chip-by-chip comparison of the received signal against a known "Pilot" reference, to identify multiple copies of the same chip pattern. After several iterations of the multiple paths have been accumulated, the time dispersion between the two paths can be calculated and tracked, allowing the paths to be separated.
6-44
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
RF Front End Circuitry
Matched Filter
Slot Wise Accumulation
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
6-45
Version 1 Rev 0
The Rake Receiver
The Rake Receiver

The Rake receiver performs a similar (but not identical) function to the equaliser in GSM. Instead of training bits, the pilot signals (all zeros) are used as a basis for the search for the best path. The rake receiver then constructs its fingers to track the other multi-path rays by stepping through delays one chip at a time until it finds another, lower level pilot. It can then use the weightings to bring the rays into phase and constructive addition. Note that the different rays are uncorrelated if the delay difference is greater than one chip. The effect of the propagation environment on spread spectrum modulated signals is to produce a series of signal components that have traversed differing paths. This is known as multipath interference and, depending on whether or not there is a significant specula multipath component, the envelope of the multipath signal may be Rician or Rayleigh distributed. Multipath results in two signal perturbations, known as Inter-Symbol Interference (ISI) and fading. Both introduce severe degradation in the system performance. ISI creates signal components that are delayed into the next signal period, making these signals overlap and therefore interfere with one another. Fading is caused by signals of opposite phase cancelling in the receiver. To combat this, a RAKE receiver may be used. This is the type of receiver shown in the figure and contains many signal paths, each with an individual delay. These delays are changed so that the total delay from the transmitter for all paths is the same and thus when combined they are in-phase.
6-46
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
The Rake Receiver
Version 1 Rev 0
The Rake Receiver
D0
t1 Cch sf,k
D1
t2 Cch sf,k
D2
t3 Cch sf,k
D3
Cch sf,k
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
6-47
Version 1 Rev 0
The Rake Receiver
6-48
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
The Physical Layer
Version 1 Rev 0
Chapter 7 The Physical Layer
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-1
Version 1 Rev 0
The Physical Layer
7-2
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Objectives
Version 1 Rev 0
Objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: Describe the procedures performed by the Air Interface Physical Layer Describe the UMTS Channel Structure. Logical Channels Transport Channels Physical Channels
Describe the Downlink and Uplink Flow Processes.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-3
Version 1 Rev 0
Physical Layer Services

The Physical Layer (L1) will be the main discussion in this section since this is where most of the air interface tasks are performed. The physical layer offers data transport services to higher layers. The access to these services is through the use of transport channels via the MAC sub-layer. The physical layer is expected to perform the following functions in order to provide the data transport service. Macrodiversity distribution, combining and soft handover execution. Error detection on transport channels and indication to higher layers. FEC encoding/decoding of transport channels. Multiplexing of transport channels and demultiplexing of coded composite transport channels (CCTrCHs). Rate matching of coded transport channels to physical channels. Mapping of coded composite transport channels on physical channels. Power weighting and combining of physical channels. Modulation and spreading/demodulation and despreading of physical channels. Frequency and time (chip, bit, slot, frame) synchronisation. Radio characteristics measurements including FER, SIR, Interference Power, etc., and indication to higher layers. Inner - loop power control. RF processing.
When network elements (UEs and network) provide compatible service bearers (for example support a speech bearer) they should be assured of successful interworking. Moreover, different implementation options of the same (optional) feature would lead to incompatibility between UE and network. Therefore, this shall be avoided.
7-4
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

Macrodiversity distribution, combining and soft handover execution. Error detection on transport channels. FEC encoding & decoding of transport channels. Mux & Demux of transport channels and CCTrCHs. Rate matching of coded transport channels to physical channels. Mapping of coded composite transport channels on physical channels. Power weighting and combining of physical channels. Modulation demodulation and spreading of physical channels. Frequency and time synchronisation. Radio characteristics measurements. Inner - loop power control. RF processing.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-5
Version 1 Rev 0
QPSK
QPSK
The modulation scheme used in W-CDMA is quadrature phase shift keying (PSK) which allows 2 bits to be sent per symbol (I and Q). The reason for using QPSK is that it is fairly resilient to amplitude variations. The major problem with CDMA is that all users are on the same frequency and thus interfering with each other.
7-6
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
QPSK
Version 1 Rev 0
QPSK
QPSK
Q
(0,1) (0,0)
I
(1,1) (1,0)
2 bits per symbol
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-7
Version 1 Rev 0
Structure of Transmission
The physical layer receives information, on a transport channel, as Transport Blocks (or Transport Block sets) from Layer 2. This information will consist of User Plane or Control Plane streams. In addition the physical layer will generate Layer 1 control information, used to maintain the radio bearer between the UE and the UTRAN. This layer 1 control information must be transmitted on the physical channel along with the transport channel information. As previously discussed, even when FDD mode is in use, a radio frame/timeslot structure is observed. (A 10 ms radio frame is divided into 15 timeslots). Though it is important to note that any given radio bearer is able to use all timeslots in every radio frame.
Downlink Transmission
On the downlink each timeslot will contain transport channel information and Layer 1 control information in time-multiplex. Each timeslot will contain fields supporting transport block information, interspersed with Layer 1 control fields. The exact structure of the fields is dependent upon the type of physical channel in use, and is described in detail later in this chapter.
Uplink Transmission
On the Uplink a time-multiplex structure is not practical as Discontinuous Transmission (DTX) is frequently employed. The combination of DTX and Time-multiplex would result in a "Bursty" transmission, which would generate audio band noise perceptible to the other party in a voice call. To overcome this problem, the transport channel information and Layer 1 control information are I/Q code multiplexed within each timeslot, allowing them to be transmitted in parallel. This make the transmission of Layer 1 control information continuous and hence prevents bursty transmission, even when DTX is applied.
7-8
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
I Q
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-9
Version 1 Rev 0
Channel Locations
Channel Locations
The radio interface is the section of the network between the UE and the Network. This section of the network is where the biggest limitation lies at the moment, it is the most vulnerable section and therefore very complex methods have to be invented in order to transmit the required data at the high speeds that is demanded of todays networks. The radio interface is composed of Layers 1, 2 and 3. The slide opposite shows the UTRA radio interface protocol architecture around the physical layer (Layer 1). The physical layer interfaces with the Medium Access Control (MAC) sub-layer of Layer 2 and the Radio Resource Control (RRC) Layer of Layer 3. The physical layer offers different Transport channels to MAC. A transport channel is characterized by how the information is transferred over the radio interface. MAC offers different Logical channels to the Radio Link Control (RLC) sub-layer of Layer 2. The type of information transferred characterizes a logical channel. Physical channels are defined in the physical layer. In FDD mode, physical channels are defined by a specific carrier frequency, scrambling code, channelization code (optional), time start and stop (giving duration) and, on the uplink, relative phase (0 or /[Symbol_ps2]). In the TDD mode the physical channels is also characterized by the timeslot. The physical layer is controlled by RRC.
7-10
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Channel Locations
Version 1 Rev 0
Channel Locations
Layer 2
RLC
Logical Channels
Layer 2
MAC
Transport Channels
Layer 1
Physical Layer
Physical Channels
UE
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-11
Version 1 Rev 0
Channels on the Air Interface

The diagram opposite shows the most common channels used on the air interface. The channels are divided horizontally into the Physical Channels (PCHs), the Transport Channels (TCHs) and the Logical Channels (LCHs). Vertically they are divided into 2 channel types, the Dedicated Channels and the Common Channels. Dedicated Channels are dedicated to one UE only and Common Channels can be shared by multiple UEs.
7-12
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

DCCH DTCH BCCH PCCH CCCH CTCH
Logical Channels
PTM CCH DCH BCH PCH FACH RACH

Transport Channels
PDCH
PCCH
P-CCPCH DPDCH DPCCH
S-CCPCH
PICH
PRACH
SCH
CPICH
AICH Physical Channels
P-SCH
S-SCH
Primary
Secondary
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-13
Version 1 Rev 0
Logical Channels
Logical Channels
The MAC layer provides data transfer services on logical channels. A set of logical channel types is defined for different kinds of data transfer services as offered by MAC. Each logical channel type is defined by what type of information is transferred. A general classification of logical channels is into two groups: Control Channels (for the transfer of control plane information). Traffic Channels (for the transfer of user plane information).
Control Channels
Broadcast Control Channel (BCCH) A downlink channel for broadcasting system control information. Paging Control Channel (PCCH) A downlink channel that transfers paging information. This channel is used when the network does not know the location cell of the UE, or, the UE is in the cell connected state (utilising UE sleep mode procedures). Common Control Channel (CCCH) Bi-directional channel for transmitting control information between network and UEs. This channel is commonly used by the UEs having no RRC connection with the network and by the UEs using common transport channels when accessing a new cell after cell reselection. Dedicated Control Channel (DCCH) A point-to-point bi-directional channel that transmits dedicated control information between a UE and the network. This channel is established through RRC connection set-up procedure.
Traffic Channels
Dedicated Traffic Channel (DTCH) A Dedicated Traffic Channel (DTCH) is a point-to-point channel, dedicated to one UE, for the transfer of user information. A DTCH can exist in both uplink and downlink. Common Traffic Channel (CTCH) A point-to-multipoint unidirectional channel for transfer of dedicated user information for all or a group of specified UEs.
7-14
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Logical Channels
Version 1 Rev 0
Logical Channels
Between MAC and RLC
DCCH
DTCH
BCCH
PCCH
CCCH
CTCH
U-RNTI
PTM
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-15
Version 1 Rev 0
Transport Channels
Transport Channels
The physical layer offers information transfer services to MAC and higher layers. The physical layer transport services are described by how and with what characteristics data is transferred over the radio interface. An adequate term for this is Transport Channel. A general classification of transport channels is into two groups: Common transport channels (where there is a need for inband identification of the UEs when particular UEs are addressed. Dedicated transport channels (where the UEs are identified by the physical channel, i.e. code and frequency for FDD and code, time slot and frequency for TDD).
Random Access Channel (RACH)

A contention based uplink channel used for transmission of relatively small amounts of data, e.g. for initial access or non-real-time dedicated control or traffic data.
Forward Access Channel (FACH)

Common downlink channel without closed-loop power control used for transmission of relatively small amount of data.
Broadcast Channel (BCH)

A downlink channel used for broadcast of system information into an entire cell.
Paging Channel (PCH)

A downlink channel used for broadcast of control information into an entire cell allowing efficient UE sleep mode procedures. Currently identified information types are paging and notification. Another use could be UTRAN notification of change of BCCH information.
Dedicated Channel (DCH)

A channel dedicated to one UE used in uplink or downlink.
7-16
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Transport Channels
Version 1 Rev 0
Transport Channels
Between the Physical Layer and MAC

CCH
DCH
BCH
PCH
FACH
RACH
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-17
Version 1 Rev 0
Physical Channels
Physical Channels
Common Physical Channels (CPCHs)
P-SCH ; S-SCH P-CCPCH S-CCPCH Primary Synchronisation Channel; Secondary Synchronisation Channel Synchronisation to the network Primary Common Control Physical Channel Cell Information and Frequency info Secondary Common Control Physical Channel Paging Information and Transfer of small amounts of user data. Downlink only. PRACH Physical Random Access Channel Initial message when UE wants to gain access to the network; Transfer of small amounts of data; Uplink only PICH AICH Paging Indicator Channel Provides UEs with efficient sleep mode operation Acquisition Indicator Channel Acknowledges an effective request for access after preamble has been send up P-CPICH; S-CPICH DPDCH/DPCCH Primary Common Pilot Indicator Channel; Secondary Pilot Indicator Channel Helps with channel estimation and shows the attractiveness of the cell Dedicated Physical Channels Uplink and downlink control and data information; Dedicated to a single user
7-18
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Physical Channels
Version 1 Rev 0
Physical Channels
PDCH
PCCH
P-CCPCH DPDCH DPCCH
S-CCPCH
PICH
PRACH
SCH
CPICH
AICH
P-SCH
S-SCH
Primary
Secondary
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-19
Version 1 Rev 0
Channel Mapping
Channel Mapping
The diagram opposite summarises the mapping of logical channels onto transport channels, and transport channels onto physical channels. The DCHs are coded and multiplexed, as described later in this chapter, and the resulting data stream is mapped sequentially (first-in-first-mapped) directly to the physical channel(s). The mapping of BCH and FACH/PCH is equally straightforward, where the data stream after coding and interleaving is mapped sequentially to the Primary and Secondary CCPCH respectively. Note that the BCCH logical channel can be mapped to both BCH and FACH, so as to be available to idle mode and connected mode UEs respectively. Also for the RACH, the coded and interleaved bits are sequentially mapped to the physical channel, in this case the message part of the PRACH.
Physical signals
Physical signals are entities with the same basic on-air attributes as physical channels but do not have transport channels or indicators mapped to them. Physical signals may be associated with physical channels in order to support the function of physical channels. SCH, CPICH, and AICH are classified as physical signals and hence are not shown on the diagram opposite.
7-20
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Channel Mapping
Version 1 Rev 0
Channel Mapping
Uplink
CCCH DCCH DTCH PCCH
Paging Control Channel
Downlink
BCCH CCCH CTCH
Common Traffic Channel
DCCH DTCH
Dedicated Control Channel Dedicated Traffic Channel
Common Broadcast Control Channel Contro Channel
RACH
DCH
PCH
BCH
FACH
DCH
Primary CCPCH DPDCH DPCCH Sec CCPCH
PRACH
DPDCH DPCCH
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-21
Version 1 Rev 0
Generic Frame Structure

The diagram opposite illustrates the generic frame structure, use to delimit the transfer of units of information on the UMTS air interface.
Radio Frame
As previously outlined the basic unit of the air interface is the radio frame. A radio frame is defined as a processing duration which consists of 15 timeslots. The length of a radio frame corresponds to 38,400 chips." With a system chip rate of 3.84 Mcps being employed, a radio frame thus has a duration of 10 ms.
System Frame
Several physical layer procedures (e.g. Paging and Random Access) span more than a single frame. To accommodate these procedures, a system frame is defined. The frame within the system frame structure is identified by a System Frame Number (SFN), which is a 12 bit binary number, thus a System Frame can consist of 4096 frames.
Timeslot
Each radio frame consists of 15 timeslots. A slot duration consists of fields containing bits. The length of the slot always corresponds to 2560 chips. The time duration of a timeslot is approximately 666 s. The number of fields within each timeslot is dependent upon the physical channel in use. Similarly the number of bits which can be accommodate by a timeslot is dependent upon the spreading factor in use for that physical channel.
7-22
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

666s
SLOT
Time Slot = 2560 chips
FRAME
TS0 TS1 TSn TS13 TS14
SYSTEM FRAME
Frame 1 Frame n 10ms 40.96 secs Frame 4094 Frame 4095
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-23
Version 1 Rev 0
Synchronisation Channel (SCH)

The Synchronisation Channel (SCH) is a downlink signal used for cell search. The SCH consists of two sub channels, the Primary and Secondary SCH. The 10 ms radio frames of the Primary and Secondary SCH are divided into 15 slots, each of length 2560 chips. The diagram opposite illustrates the structure of the SCH radio frame.
The Primary SCH

The Primary SCH consists of a modulated code of length 256 chips, the Primary Synchronisation Code (PSC) denoted cp in the diagram, transmitted once every slot. The PSC is the same for every cell in the system.
The Secondary SCH

The Secondary SCH consists of repeatedly transmitting a length 15 sequence of modulated codes of length 256 chips, the Secondary Synchronisation Codes (SSC), transmitted in parallel with the Primary SCH. The SSC is denoted csi,k in the diagram, where i = 0, 1, , 63 is the number of the scrambling code group, and k = 0, 1, , 14 is the slot number. Each SSC is chosen from a set of 16 different codes of length 256. This sequence on the Secondary SCH indicates which of the code groups the cells downlink scrambling code belongs to.
Modulation Symbol "a"

The primary and secondary synchronization codes are modulated by the symbol a shown in the diagram, which indicates the presence/ absence of Space Time Transmit Diversity (STTD) encoding on the P-CCPCH and is given by the following table: P-CCPCH STTD encoded P-CCPCH not STTD encoded a = +1 a = -1
7-24
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

Tslot = 2560 chips 256 chips Primary SCH
acp
acp
acp
acp
acp
Secondary SCH
acsi,0
acsi,1
acsi,2
acsi,3
acsi,14
One 10ms SCH radio frame
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-25
Version 1 Rev 0
Synchronisation (Cell Search) Procedure

During the cell search, the UE searches for a cell and determines the downlink scrambling code and frame synchronisation of that cell. The cell search is typically carried out in three steps:
Step 1: Slot synchronisation

During the first step of the cell search procedure the UE uses the SCHs primary synchronisation code to acquire slot synchronisation to a cell. This is typically done with a single matched filter (or any similar device) matched to the primary synchronisation code which is common to all cells. The slot timing of the cell can be obtained by detecting peaks in the matched filter output.
Step 2: Frame synchronisation and code-group identification

During the second step of the cell search procedure, the UE uses the SCHs secondary synchronisation code to find frame synchronisation and identify the code group of the cell found in the first step. This is done by correlating the received signal with all possible secondary synchronisation code sequences, and identifying the maximum correlation value. Since the cyclic shifts of the sequences are unique the code group as well as the frame synchronisation is determined.
Step 3: Scrambling-code identification

During the third and last step of the cell search procedure, the UE determines the exact primary scrambling code used by the found cell. The primary scrambling code is typically identified through symbol-by-symbol correlation over the CPICH with all codes within the code group identified in the second step. After the primary scrambling code has been identified, the Primary CCPCH can be detected, and the system and cell specific BCH information can be read. If the UE has received information about which scrambling codes to search for, steps 2 and 3 above can be simplified.
7-26
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

Synchronisation
ScramblingCode Group #0 Group 0 Group 1 Group 2 Group 3 Group 4 Group 5 Group 6 Group 7 Group 8 Group 9 Group 10 Group 11 Group 12 Group 13 Group 14 Group 15 Group 16 Group 17 Group 18 Group 19 Group 20 Group 21 Group 22 Group 23 Group 24 Group 25 Group 26 Group 27 Group 28 Group 29 Group 30 Group 31 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 #1 1 1 2 2 2 3 4 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 11 12 12 15 16 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 #2 2 5 1 3 16 4 11 6 10 13 8 10 12 14 2 15 9 14 12 15 4 3 5 12 6 8 7 13 9 11 2 9 #3 8 16 15 1 6 7 3 6 10 2 5 9 9 10 15 6 11 4 13 5 3 12 10 3 16 2 9 12 9 7 13 7 #4 9 7 5 8 6 4 4 14 4 14 7 16 9 14 15 16 15 13 14 4 7 11 16 15 12 9 5 12 3 2 3 7 #5 10 3 5 6 11 1 10 9 11 2 2 7 4 1 16 2 7 2 7 14 6 9 11 5 16 15 4 7 12 11 3 16 slot number #6 15 14 12 5 15 5 9 10 7 6 4 9 13 15 10 13 6 9 2 3 10 13 3 8 3 14 9 15 8 9 12 13 #7 8 16 16 2 5 5 2 2 13 5 3 15 16 15 7 14 4 10 8 16 13 5 10 3 13 3 11 10 14 4 9 3 #8 10 3 6 5 12 3 11 13 16 5 8 1 5 8 8 10 16 12 14 7 12 8 11 5 13 14 2 5 15 16 7 12 #9 16 10 11 8 1 6 2 9 11 13 3 8 1 5 1 11 5 16 2 8 5 2 8 14 6 9 14 2 12 7 16 2 #10 2 5 2 4 15 2 10 2 13 10 2 16 13 11 10 7 2 8 1 6 14 14 5 12 7 5 5 15 14 16 6 13 #11 #12 7 12 16 4 12 8 12 5 6 9 6 8 5 4 8 4 12 5 13 2 16 7 13 9 9 5 14 5 5 9 9 12 15 14 11 6 16 7 12 14 4 1 6 15 12 10 2 5 13 3 11 10 8 4 3 8 2 15 11 13 3 14 16 9 #13 7 12 15 3 11 6 9 1 1 14 4 2 4 5 16 12 3 15 8 11 2 10 13 9 12 8 16 7 2 14 13 16 #14 16 10 12 7 2 8 3 13 16 10 5 2 8 4 9 3 14 6 11 13 11 15 8 14 7 12 16 4 15 4 12 6
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-27
Version 1 Rev 0

ScramblingCode Group #0 Group 32 Group 33 Group 34 Group 35 Group 36 Group 37 Group 38 Group 39 Group 40 Group 41 Group 42 Group 43 Group 44 Group 45 Group 46 Group 47 Group 48 Group 49 Group 50 Group 51 Group 52 Group 53 Group 54 Group 55 Group 56 Group 57 Group 58 Group 59 Group 60 Group 61 Group 62 Group 63 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 9 9 9 #1 7 7 8 9 10 11 16 3 3 4 4 4 5 6 7 7 8 8 10 13 14 5 6 6 7 9 10 10 13 10 11 12 #2 12 14 5 13 3 15 4 4 6 5 9 16 12 4 8 16 7 15 10 11 7 8 11 13 9 6 10 12 15 13 12 10 #3 15 16 12 4 2 3 5 6 5 14 16 10 11 10 8 11 15 4 15 5 9 14 7 8 10 8 12 6 15 10 15 15 #4 2 5 5 2 13 11 16 11 16 4 10 5 14 6 16 4 4 16 16 4 14 16 10 13 7 10 8 5 14 11 12 13 #5 12 9 2 13 16 6 14 12 9 6 4 10 5 5 11 15 8 4 5 12 10 13 8 5 11 9 11 12 8 15 9 14 slot number #6 4 2 14 8 8 14 7 13 15 12 16 4 11 9 12 3 15 8 4 4 13 6 5 7 6 8 9 8 6 15 13 9 #7 10 9 14 11 10 10 11 6 5 13 15 9 13 15 4 15 12 7 6 11 8 14 8 7 12 12 7 9 7 9 13 14 #8 13 16 8 6 8 15 4 12 9 5 3 9 3 4 15 11 3 7 16 6 7 13 7 6 9 5 8 7 16 16 11 15 #9 15 11 15 4 13 10 11 14 10 13 5 16 6 15 11 12 16 15 4 6 8 7 12 16 12 11 9 6 8 12 14 11 #10 13 11 3 6 11 6 14 4 6 6 10 15 14 5 4 12 4 12 3 5 10 8 12 14 11 10 5 7 7 14 10 11 #11 #12 4 5 9 8 11 7 9 5 4 11 5 6 6 16 7 4 16 11 15 3 4 15 10 15 8 11 12 8 13 13 16 13 5 7 12 15 16 7 9 13 15 11 15 3 13 16 16 7 12 3 9 14 4 6 6 8 8 12 6 11 14 16 15 12 #13 5 4 15 15 3 14 7 5 4 12 6 5 4 9 3 8 11 16 6 13 13 15 9 16 6 7 7 11 5 14 14 16 #14 10 14 9 11 5 3 5 14 10 14 6 15 4 10 15 16 11 12 9 12 9 7 11 15 10 7 6 9 16 11 16 10
7-28
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
7-29
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Common Pilot Channel (CPICH)

The CPICH is a fixed rate (30 kbps, SF=256) downlink physical channel that carries a pre-defined bit/symbol sequence. The diagram opposite shows the frame structure of the CPICH. In case transmit diversity (open or closed loop) is used on any downlink channel in the cell, the CPICH shall be transmitted from both antennas using the same channelization and scrambling code. In this case, the pre-defined symbol sequence of the CPICH is different for Antenna 1 and Antenna 2, see lower diagram opposite. In case of no transmit diversity, the symbol sequence of Antenna 1 in the lower diagram opposite is used. There are two types of Common pilot channels, the Primary and Secondary CPICH. They differ in their use and the limitations placed on their physical features.
Primary Common Pilot Channel (P-CPICH)

The Primary Common Pilot Channel (P-CPICH) has the following characteristics: The same channelization code is always used for the P-CPICH (SF=256,0). The P-CPICH is scrambled by the primary scrambling code. There is one and only one P-CPICH per cell. The P-CPICH is broadcast over the entire cell.
The Primary CPICH is the phase reference for the following downlink channels: SCH, Primary CCPCH, AICH, PICH. The Primary CPICH is also the default phase reference for all other downlink physical channels.
Secondary Common Pilot Channel (S-CPICH)

A Secondary Common Pilot Channel (S-CPICH) has the following characteristics: An arbitrary channelization code of SF=256 is used for the S-CPICH. A S-CPICH is scrambled by either the primary or a secondary scrambling code. There may be zero, one, or several S-CPICH per cell. A S-CPICH may be transmitted over the entire cell or only over a part of the cell. A Secondary CPICH may be the reference for the Secondary CCPCH and the downlink DPCH. If this is the case, the UE is informed about this by higher-layer signalling.
7-30
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Common Pilot Channel (CPICH) Frame Structure
Pre-defined symbol sequence Tslot = 2560 chips, 20 bits = 10 symbols
Slot #0 Slot #1
Slot #i 1 radio frame: Tf = 10ms
Slot #14
Modulation Pattern for Common Pilot Channel
Antenna 1
A AA A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
Antenna 2 -A -A A A -A -A A A -A -A A A -A -A A A -A -A A A -A -A
slot #14 Frame#i Frame Boundary slot #0 Frame#i+1 slot #1
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-31
Version 1 Rev 0
P-CCPCH Frame Structure

The Primary CCPCH is a fixed rate (30 kbps, SF=256) downlink physical channels used to carry the BCH. The frame structure of the Primary CCPCH is illustrated opposite. The frame structure differs from the downlink DPCH in that no Transmit Power Control (TPC) commands, no Transport Format Combination Indicator (TFCI) and no pilot bits are transmitted The Primary CCPCH is not transmitted during the first 256 chips of each slot. Instead, Primary SCH and Secondary SCH are transmitted during this period.
7-32
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

256 chips (Tx OFF) Data 18 bits Tslot = 2560 chips, 20 bits
Slot #0 Slot #1
Slot #i Tf = 10ms
Slot #14
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-33
Version 1 Rev 0
SCH and P-CCPCH
SCH and P-CCPCH

The diagram opposite shows the construction of the SCH and the P-CCPCH. It is thus clear that different channels can be multiplexed onto one link. The structure of these 2 Physical Channels are very important to the synchronization process.
7-34
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SCH and P-CCPCH
Version 1 Rev 0
SCH and P-CCPCH

SCH SCH SCH
Frame 0 Data on P-CCPCH
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-35
Version 1 Rev 0
Paging Indicator Channel (PICH)

PICH Channel Structure.
The Paging Indicator Channel (PICH) is a fixed rate (SF=256) physical channel used to carry the Paging Indicators (PI). The PICH is always associated with a S-CCPCH to which a PCH transport channel is mapped.
7-36
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

288 bits for paging indication b 0 b1 12 bits (transmission off) b287 b288 b299
One radio frame (10ms)
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-37
Version 1 Rev 0

Discontinuous Reception (DRX) on the PICH
The PICH Channel is used to alert the mobile that a possible paging message will be broadcast to it on the PCH channel. Each mobile will calculate a paging occasion, which it listens to for such an alert. In order to save on UE battery life the time between monitoring the paging occasions can be altered, also the number of paging indicators per frame that carry the alerts may be configured. These settings are all broadcast in the cell system information messages. The main parameters that determine the time between the UE monitoring its paging indicator are as follows: DRX Cycle length. The DRX Cycle Length is made up of a number of system Frames (each 10ms duration). It is this period that determines how long the mobile is actually in DRX mode thus conserving battery power. The cycle is repeated continuously and the UE must only become active once during each cycle. The duration of the cycle is variable and maybe altered to suit network conditions. Paging Occasion. The Paging Occasion determines the frame number the UE becomes active in, during the DRX Cycle. Paging Indicator. The Paging Indicator is repeated multiple times per system frame. The UE calculates which paging indicator to listen to using network-determined parameters. The mobile listens to the system information messages to obtain the parameters required for receiving paging indicators in the selected cell. It then performs a standard calculation using the cell parameters and its IMSI. The result of this calculation is a single paging indicator during the DRX cycle time. In other words the mobile must power up and listen to the calculated paging indicator (now know as its paging occasion) between a repetition period of 80ms to 5.12s (DRX Cycle Period). The diagram opposite illustrates the frame structure of the PICH.
7-38
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

DRX Cycle, 80s to 5.12s Paging Indicators 18,36,72 or 144 per 10msecs PICH Frame.
Frame. 10s
Calculated Paging Occasion UE is in DRX until this Paging Indicator
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-39
Version 1 Rev 0
Secondary Common Control Physical Channel (S-CCPCH)

The Secondary CCPCH is used to carry the FACH and PCH. There are two types of Secondary CCPCH: those that include TFCI and those that do not include TFCI. It is the UTRAN that determines if a TFCI should be transmitted, hence making it mandatory for all UEs to support the use of TFCI. The set of possible rates for the Secondary CCPCH is the same as for the downlink DPCH. The frame structure of the Secondary CCPCH is shown opposite. The parameter k in the diagram determines the total number of bits per downlink Secondary CCPCH slot. It is related to the spreading factor SF of the physical channel as SF = 256/2k. The spreading factor range is from 256 down to 4. The values for the number of bits per field are given in the table opposite. The channel bit and symbol rates given in the table are the rates immediately before spreading. The FACH and PCH can be mapped to the same or to separate Secondary CCPCHs. If FACH and PCH are mapped to the same Secondary CCPCH, they can be mapped to the same frame. The main difference between a CCPCH and a downlink dedicated physical channel is that a CCPCH is not inner-loop power controlled. The main difference between the Primary and Secondary CCPCH is that the transport channel mapped to the Primary CCPCH (BCH) can only have a fixed predefined transport format combination, while the Secondary CCPCH support multiple transport format combinations using TFCI. Furthermore, a Primary CCPCH is transmitted over the entire cell while a Secondary CCPCH may be transmitted in a narrow lobe in the same way as a dedicated physical channel (only valid for a Secondary CCPCH carrying the FACH). For slot formats using TFCI, the TFCI value in each radio frame corresponds to a certain transport format combination of the FACHs and/or PCHs currently in use. This correspondence is (re-)negotiated at each FACH/PCH addition/removal.
7-40
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

TFCI NTFCIbits Data Ndatabits Tslot = 2560 chips, 20*2kbits (k = 0..6) Pilot Npilotbits
Slot #0 Slot #1
Slot #i 1 radio frame: Tf = 10ms
Slot #14
Secondary CCPCH Fields

Slot Format #i 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 Channel Bit Rate (kbps) 30 30 30 30 60 60 60 60 120 120 240 240 480 480 960 960 1920 1920 Channel Symbol Rate (ksps) 15 15 15 15 30 30 30 30 60 60 120 120 240 240 480 480 960 960 SF Bits/ Frame 300 300 300 300 600 600 600 600 1200 1200 2400 2400 4800 4800 9600 9600 19200 19200 Bits/ Slot 20 20 20 20 40 40 40 40 80 80 160 160 320 320 640 640 1280 1280 Ndata Npilot NTFCI
256 256 256 256 128 128 128 128 64 64 32 32 16 16 8 8 4 4
20 12 18 10 40 32 38 30 72 64 152 144 312 296 632 616 1272 1256
0 8 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 8 0 16 0 16 0 16
0 0 2 2 0 0 2 2 8* 8* 8* 8* 8* 8* 8* 8* 8* 8*
* If TFCI bits are not used, then DTX shall be used in TFCI field.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-41
Version 1 Rev 0
Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH)

Structure of the PRACH
The random-access transmission is based on a Slotted ALOHA approach with fast acquisition indication. The UE can start the random-access transmission at the beginning of a number of well-defined time intervals, denoted access slots. There are 15 access slots per two frames and they are spaced 5120 chips apart, see diagram opposite. Information on what access slots are available for random-access transmission is given by higher layers and is based upon the Access Service Class (ASC) of the UE
Random Access Transmission

The structure of the random-access transmission is also shown opposite. The random-access transmission consists of one or several preambles of length 4096 chips and a message of length 10ms or 20ms.
PRACH Pre-amble
Each preamble is of length 4096 chips and consists of 256 repetitions of a signature of length 16 chips. There are a maximum of 16 available signatures
7-42
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Physical Random Access Channel (PRACH) RACH access slot numbers and their spacing
radio frame: 10ms 5120 chips
radio frame: 10ms
Access slot
#0
#1
#2
#3
#4
#5
#6
#7
#8
#9
#10 #11 #12 #13 #14
Random Access Transmission Random Access Transmission
Random Access Transmission Random Access Transmission
Structure of the random-access transmission
Preamble 4096 chips
Preamble
Preamble
Message part 10ms (one radio frame)
Preamble 4096 chips
Preamble
Preamble
Message part 20ms (two radio frames)
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-43
Version 1 Rev 0

Structure of PRACH Message Part
The structure of the Random-access message part is shown opposite. The 10ms message is split into 15 slots, each of length Tslot = 2560 chips. Each slot consists of two parts, a data part that carries Layer 2 information and a control part that carries Layer 1 control information. The data and control parts are transmitted in parallel. The data part consists of 10*2k bits, where k=0,1,2,4. This corresponds to a spreading factor of 256, 128, 64, and 32 respectively for the message data part. The value for the number of bits in the data field are given in the table opposite. The control part consists of 8 known pilot bits to support channel estimation for coherent detection and 2 TFCI bits. This corresponds to a spreading factor of 256 for the message control part. The total number of TFCI bits in the random-access message is 15*2 = 30. The TFCI value corresponds to a certain transport format of the current Random-access message. The Random Access Channel(s) (RACH) is characterised by: Existence in uplink only Limited data field Collision risk Open loop power control
7-44
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

Data Data Ndatabits
Control
Pilot Npilotbits Tslot = 2560 chips, 10*2kbits (k = 0..3)
TFCI NTFCIbits
Slot #0 Slot #1
Slot #i Message part radio frame TRACH = 10ms
Slot #14
Random-access message data fields

Slot Format #i Channel Bit Rate (kbps) 15 30 60 120 Channel Symbol Rate (ksps) 15 30 60 120 SF 256 128 64 32 Bits/ Frame 150 300 600 1200 Bits/Slot Ndata
0 1 2 3
10 20 40 80
10 20 40 80
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-45
Version 1 Rev 0
Acquisition Indicator Channel (AICH)

The Acquisition Indicator Channel (AICH) is a fixed rate (SF=256) physical channel used to carry Acquisition Indicators (AI). Acquisition Indicator AIs corresponds to signature s on the PRACH. The diagram opposite illustrates the structure of the AICH. The AICH consists of a repeated sequence of 15 consecutive access slots (AS), each of length 5120 chips. Each access slot consists of two parts, an Acquisition-Indicator (AI) part consisting of 32 real-valued symbols a0, , a31 and a part of duration 1024 chips with no transmission that is not formally part of the AICH. The part of the slot with no transmission is reserved for possible use by CSICH or possible future use by other physical channels. The spreading factor (SF) used for channelization of the AICH is 256. The phase reference for the AICH is the Primary CPICH.
7-46
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

Al part = 4096 chips, 32 real-valued symbols 1024 chips
a0 a1 a 2
a30 a31
Transmission Off
AS # 14 AS # 0
AS # 1
AS # i 20ms
AS # 14
AS # 0
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-47
Version 1 Rev 0
Relationship Between PRACH and AICH

The PRACH contains two sets of access slots as shown below. Access slot set 1 contains PRACH slots 0 - 7 and starts p-a chips before the downlink P-CCPCH frame for which SFN mod 2 = 0. Access slot set 2 contains PRACH slots 8 - 14 and starts (p-a -2560) chips before the downlink P-CCPCH frame for which SFN mod 2 = 1.
7-48
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

AICH access slots
Tp-a
SFN mod 2 = 0 #0 #2 #1 #3 #2 #4 #3 #5 #4 #6 #5 #7 #6 #8 #7 #9 #8
SFN mod 2 = 1 #9 #10 #11 #12 #13 #14
#0 PRACH access slots
#1
#10 #11 #12 #13 #14 Access slot set 2
Access slot set 1
10ms
10ms
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-49
Version 1 Rev 0
Downlink Dedicated Physical Channels (DL-DPCH)

DL-DPCH Structure
There is only one type of downlink dedicated physical channel, the Downlink Dedicated Physical Channel (Downlink DPCH). Within one Downlink DPCH, dedicated data generated at Layer 2 and above, i.e. the Dedicated Transport Channel (DCH), is transmitted in time-multiplex with control information generated at Layer 1 (known pilot bits, TPC commands, and an optional TFCI). The downlink DPCH can thus be seen as a time multiplex of a downlink DPDCH and a downlink DPCCH. The diagram opposite shows the frame structure of the downlink DPCH. Each frame of length 10ms is split into 15 slots, each of length Tslot = 2560 chips, corresponding to one power-control period. The parameter k in the diagram determines the total number of bits per downlink DPCH slot. It is related to the spreading factor SF of the physical channel as SF = 512/2k. The spreading factor may thus range from 512 down to 4. The exact number of bits of the different downlink DPCH fields (Npilot, NTPC, NTFCI, Ndata1 and Ndata2) is dependent upon the SF. What slot format to use is configured by higher layers and can also be reconfigured by higher layers. There are basically two types of downlink Dedicated Physical Channels; those that include TFCI (e.g. for several simultaneous services) and those that do not include TFCI (e.g. for fixed-rate services). It is the UTRAN that determines if a TFCI should be transmitted and it is mandatory for all UEs to support the use of TFCI in the downlink. The Pilot bits are provided to permit frame synchronisation and channel estimation at the receiving node. TPC symbol will indicate a step increase or decrease of transmitter power by the receiving node. TPC Bit Pattern NTPC = 2 11 00 NTPC = 4 1111 0000 NTPC = 8 1111 1111 00000000 1 0 Transmitter power control command
7-50
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

DPDCH Data 1 DPCCH TPC DPDCH Data 2 DPCCH Pilot Npilot bits Tslot = 2560 chips
TFCI
Slot #0 Slot #1
Slot #i One radio frame = 10ms K = 0.........7
Slot #14
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-51
Version 1 Rev 0

Downlink Slot Formation in Case of Multi-Code Transmission
For slot formats using TFCI, the TFCI value in each radio frame corresponds to a certain combination of bit rates of the DCHs currently in use. This correspondence is re-negotiated at each DCH addition/removal. When the total bit rate to be transmitted on one downlink CCTrCH exceeds the maximum bit rate for a downlink physical channel, multicode transmission is employed, i.e. several parallel downlink DPCHs are transmitted for one CCTrCH using the same spreading factor. In this case, the Layer 1 control information is put on only the first downlink DPCH. The additional downlink DPCHs belonging to the CCTrCH do not transmit any data during the corresponding time period. TFCI DCH CCTrCH DPCH TPC Transport Formation Combination Indicator Dedicated Channel Coded Composite Transport Channel Dedicated Physical Channel Transmit Power Control
7-52
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

DPDCH TPC Transmission Power TFCI DPDCH Pilot
Physical Channel 1
Transmission Power
Physical Channel 2
Transmission Power
Physical Channel L
One Slot (2560 chips)
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-53
Version 1 Rev 0
Uplink Dedicated Physical channels (UL-DPCH)

There are two types of uplink dedicated physical channels, the Uplink Dedicated Physical Data Channel (Uplink DPDCH) and the Uplink Dedicated Physical Control Channel (uplink DPCCH). The DPDCH and the DPCCH are I/Q code multiplexed within each radio frame. The uplink DPDCH is used to carry the DCH transport channel. There may be zero, one, or several uplink DPDCHs on each radio link. The uplink DPCCH is used to carry control information generated at Layer 1. The Layer 1 control information consists of known pilot bits to support channel estimation for coherent detection, Transmit Power Control (TPC) commands, Feedback Information (FBI), and an optional Transport Format Combination Indicator (TFCI). The transport-format combination indicator informs the receiver about the instantaneous transport format combination of the transport channels mapped to the simultaneously transmitted Uplink DPDCH radio frame. There is one and only one Uplink DPCCH on each radio link. The diagram opposite shows the frame structure of the Uplink dedicated physical channels. Each radio frame of length 10ms is split into 15 slots, each of length Tslot = 2560 chips, corresponding to one TPC period. The parameter k in the diagram determines the number of bits per uplink DPDCH slot. It is related to the spreading factor SF of the DPDCH as SF = 256/2k. The DPDCH spreading factor may range from 256 down to 4, giving data rates between 15kbs and 960kbs The spreading factor of the uplink DPCCH is always equal to 256, i.e. there are 10 bits per uplink DPCCH slot. What slot format to use is configured by higher layers and can also be reconfigured by higher layers. The FBI bits are used to support techniques requiring feedback from the UE to the UTRAN Access Point, including closed loop mode transmit diversity and Site Selection Diversity Transmission (SSDT). There are two types of Uplink Dedicated Physical Channels; those that include TFCI (e.g. for several simultaneous services) and those that do not include TFCI (e.g. for fixed-rate services). It is the UTRAN that determines if a TFCI should be transmitted and it is mandatory for all UEs to support the use of TFCI in the uplink. Multi-code operation is possible for the uplink Dedicated Physical Channels. When multi-code transmission is used, several parallel DPDCH are transmitted using different channelization codes. However, there is only one DPCCH per radio link.
7-54
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

DPDCH Data Ndatabits
DPCCH
Pilot Npilotbits
TFCI NTFCIbits
FBI NFBIbits
TPC NTPCbits
Tslot = 2560 chips, 10*2kbits (k = 0..6)
Slot #0 Slot #1
Slot #i Tf = 10ms
Slot #14
K = 0........7
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
7-55
Version 1 Rev 0
Downlink Flow Process

The downlink flow process consists of the following physical layer functions. Data arrives to the coding/multiplexing unit in the form of transport block sets once every transmission time interval. The transmission time interval is transport-channel specific from the set {10ms, 20ms, 40ms and 80ms}. The following coding/multiplexing steps can be identified for downlink: Add CRC to each transport block Transport block concatenation and code block segmentation Channel coding Rate matching First insertion of discontinuous transmission (DTX) indication bits First interleaving Radio frame segmentation Multiplexing of transport channels Second insertion of DTX indication bits Physical channel segmentation Second interleaving Mapping to physical channels
It should be noted that not every step is applicable to every data type.
7-56
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

CRC attachment TrBk concatenation / Code block segmentation Channel coding Rate matching 1st insertion of DTX indication 1st interleaving Radio frame segmentation TrCH Multiplexing 2nd insertion of DTX indication CCTrCH Physical channel segmentation 2nd interleaving Physical channel mapping
PhCH#2 PhCH#1
7-57
Rate matching
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Uplink Flow Process
Uplink Flow Process

The uplink flow process is largely the same as that for the downlink, and is illustrated in the diagram opposite. The differences in the individual process steps are as follows.
Radio Frame Equalisation

Radio frame size equalisation is padding the input bit sequence in order to ensure that the output can be segmented in data segments of equal size. Radio frame size equalisation is only performed in the UL (DL rate matching output block length is always an integer multiple of the frame length).
Rate Matching
The rate matching operation in the uplink, is a much more dynamic process that may vary on a frame-by-frame basis. The rate matching operation needs to take into account the the number of bits coming from all transport channels. When the data rate of one service, the dynamic rate matching adjusts the rates of the remaining service as well so that all symbols in the radio frame will be used. For example if with two transport channels, one has a momentary zero rate, rate matching used repetition to increase the symbol rate for the other service sufficiently so that all uplink channel symbols are used.
DTX
Because Uplink rate matching ensures that all unused transport channel bits are filled, there is no requirement for DTX indication bits to be inserted in the uplink flow
7-58
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Uplink Flow Process
Version 1 Rev 0
Uplink Flow Process

CRC attachment TrBk concatenation / Code block segmentation Channel coding Radio Frame equalisation 1st interleaving Radio frame segmentation Rate matching Rate matching
TrCH Multiplexing CCTrCH Physical channel segmentation 2nd interleaving Physical channel mapping
PhCH#1 PhCH#2
7-59
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Uplink Flow Process
7-60
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Radio Resource Management Functions
Version 1 Rev 0
Chapter 8 Radio Resource Management Functions
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
8-1
Version 1 Rev 0
Radio Resource Management Functions
8-2
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Objectives
Version 1 Rev 0
Objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: Describe basic Radio Resource and Mobility Management functions.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
8-3
Version 1 Rev 0
Radio Resource Management

Radio Resource Management (RRM) is responsible for the air Interface utilisation. RRM guarantees that services will be provided according to the necessary quality that is expected from the network. It is divided into 5 different sections: Cell Selection/Reselection Handover Power Control Admission Control Load Control
8-4
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Cell Selection / Reselection Handovers Power Control Admission Control Load Control
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
8-5
Version 1 Rev 0
UE RRC States
UE RRC States
The two basic operational modes of the UE are Idle Mode and Connected Mode. The connected mode can be further divided into service states, which define what kind of physical channels a UE is using. The diagram opposite shows the main RRC service states in the connected Mode. It also shows the transitions between idle mode and connected mode, and the possible transitions within connected mode.
Idle Mode
In idle mode, after the UE is switched on, it selects (either automatically or manually) a PLMN to contact. The UE looks for a suitable cell of the chosen PLMN, chooses that cell to provide available services and tunes to the control channel. This is known as "Camping on a cell". After camping on a cell in idle mode, the UE is able to receive system information messages broadcast from the cell. The UE stays in idle mode until such time as it transmits a request to establish a RRC connection. In Idle mode the UE is identified by IMSI, TMSI and P-TMSI. The UTRAN has no information of its own about individual idle mode UEs and can only address, for example, all UEs in a cell or all UEs monitoring a paging group.-
Connected Mode
Cell DCH In Cell DCH state a dedicated physical channel is allocated to the UE and the UE is known by its serving RNC on a cell or active set level. The UE performs measurements and sends measurement reports according to measurement control information received from the RNC. The DSCH can also be used in this state, and UEs with certain capabilities are also able to monitor the FACH channel for system information messages. Cell FACH In Cell FACH state no dedicated channel is allocated to the UE, but the RACH and FACH channels can be used, both for transferring signalling messages and small amounts of data. In this state the UE is also capable of monitoring the broadcast channel to acquire system information. The CPCH can also be used when instructed by the UTRAN. In this state the UE performs cell reselections, and after a reselection always sends a Cell Update message to the RNC so the RNC knows the UE location on a cell level. For Identification, a C-RNTI in the MAC PDU header separates UEs from each other in a cell. When the UE performs cell reselection it uses an U-RNTI when sending the Cell Update message, so the UTRAN can route the message to the current serving RNC of the UE, even if the first RNC receiving the message is not the current SRNC. The U-RNTI is part of the RRC message, not in the MAC header. If the new cell belongs to another RAN system, such as GPRS, the UE enters idle mode and accesses the other system according to that systems access procedure
8-6
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
UE RRC States
Version 1 Rev 0
UE RRC States
Cell DCH
Cell PCH
Idle Mode
Cell FACH
URA PCH
UTRAN Connected Mode
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
8-7
Version 1 Rev 0
UE RRC States
UE RRC States
Cell PCH In the Cell PCH state the UE is still known on a cell level in the SRNC, but it can be reached only via the paging channel. In this state the battery consumption is less than in cell FACH, since the monitoring of the paging channel includes a discontinuous reception (DRX) functionality. The UE also listens to system information on the broadcast channel. A UE supporting the CBS is also capable of receiving BMC message in this state. If the UE performs cell reselection, it moves autonomously to the Cell FACH state to execute the Cell Update procedure, after which it re-enters the Cell PCH state if no other activity is triggered during the Cell Update procedure. If the new cell belongs to another RAN system, such as GPRS, the UE enters idle mode and accesses the other system according to that systemss access procedure URA PCH The URA PCH state is very similar to the Cell PCH, except that the UE does not execute Cell Update after each reselection, but instead reads UTRA Registration Area (URA) identities from the broadcast channel, and only if the URA changes does the UE pass its location to the SRNC. This is achieved with the URA Update procedure (the UE enters the Cell_FACH state to execute the procedure and then reverts to the URA PCH state). One cell can belong to one or many URAs, and only if the UE cannot find its latest URA identification from the list of URAs in a cell does it need to execute the URA Update Procedure. This overlapping URA feature is needed to avoid pin-pong effects in possible network configuration, where geographically succeeding base stations are controlled by different RNCs. The UE leaves the connected mode and returns to idle mode when the RRC connection is released or at RRC connection failure.
RRC State Change Support via Iur

At USR 1.0 support for cell dch on Iur is already supported. From USR 2.0 this support is extended to Cell FACH, Cell PCH and URA PCH. Supporting RRC Common Channel States on Iur allows the provision to facilitate data transfers on rach/fach without incurring a delay involved in an SRNS relocation.
8-8
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
UE RRC States
Version 1 Rev 0
UE RRC States
Cell DCH
Cell PCH
Idle Mode
Cell FACH
URA PCH
UTRAN Connected Mode
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
8-9
Version 1 Rev 0
Physical Layer Measurements

The majority of radio resource management functions rely on the exchange of Layer 1 measurement reports between the UTRAN and the UE. To initiate a specific measurement at the UE, the UTRAN transmits a measurement control message to the UE including a measurement ID and type, a command (setup, modify, release), the measurement objects and quantity, the reporting quantities, criteria (periodical/event-triggered) and mode (acknowledged or unacknowledged). In idle mode the measurement control message is broadcast in a System Information message. When the reporting criteria is fulfilled the UE shall answer with a measurement report message to the UTRAN including the measurement ID and the results.
UE Measurements
CPICH RSCP Received Signal Code Power, the received power on one code measured on the Primary CPICH. SIR Signal to Interference Ratio, defined as: (RSCP/ISCP)(SF/2). The SIR shall be measured on DPCCH after RL combination. UTRA carrier RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator, the wide-band received power within the relevant channel bandwidth. Measurement shall be performed on a UTRAN downlink carrier. GSM carrier RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator, the wide-band received power within the relevant channel bandwidth. Measurement shall be performed on a GSM BCCH carrier. CPICH Ec/No The received energy per chip divided by the power density in the band. The Ec/No is identical to RSCP/RSSI. Measurement shall be performed on the Primary CPICH. Transport channel BLER Estimation of the transport channel Block Error Rate (BLER). The BLER estimation shall be based on evaluating the CRC on each transport block after RL combination. UE transmitted power The total UE transmitted power on one carrier. UE Rx-Tx time difference The difference in time between the UE uplink DPCCH/DPDCH frame transmission on the first significant path, of the downlink DPCH frame from the measured radio link. Measurement shall be made for each cell included in the active set. The Observed time difference to GSM The Observed time difference to GSM cell is defined as: TRxGSMj - TRxSFNi, where: TRxSFNi is the time at the beginning of the P-CCPCH frame with SFN=0 from cell i. TRxGSMj is the time at the beginning of the GSM BCCH 51-multiframe from GSM frequency j received closest in time after the time TRxSFNi.
8-10
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Physical Layer Measurements UE Measurements
CPICH RSCP SIR UTRA carier RSSI CPICH Ec/No Transport channel BLER UE transmitted power UE Rx-Tx time difference The Observed time difference to GSM
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
8-11
Version 1 Rev 0

UTRA Measurements
RSSI Received Signal Strength Indicator, the wide-band received power within the UTRAN uplink carrier channel bandwidth in an UTRAN access point. SIR Signal to Interference Ratio, is defined as: (RSCP/ISCP)SF. Measurement shall be performed on the DPCCH after RL combination in Node B. Transmitted carrier power Transmitted carrier power, is the ratio between the total transmitted power and the maximum transmission power. Total transmission power is the mean power [W] on one carrier from one UTRAN access point. Maximum transmission power is the mean power [W] on one carrier from one UTRAN access point when transmitting at the configured maximum power for the cell. Transmitted code power Transmitted code power, is the transmitted power on one channelisation code on one given scrambling code on one given carrier. Measurement shall be possible on the DPCCH-field of any dedicated radio link transmitted from the UTRAN access point and shall reflect the power on the pilot bits of the DPCCH-field. Transport channel BER The transport channel BER is an estimation of the average Bit Error Rate (BER) of RL-combined DPDCH data. Transport channel BER is only required to be reported for TrCHs that are channel coded. Physical channel BER The Physical channel BER is an estimation of the average Bit Error Rate (BER) on the DPCCH after RL combination in Node B. Round Trip Time Round Trip Time (RTT), is defined as RTT = TRX - TTX, where TTX = The time of transmission of the beginning of a downlink DPCH frame to a UE. TRX = The time of reception of the beginning (the first significant path) of the corresponding uplink DPCCH/DPDCH frame from the UE. PRACH Propagation delay Propagation delay is defined as one-way propagation delay as measured during either PRACH. Acknowledged PRACH preambles The Acknowledged PRACH preambles measurement is defined as the total number of acknowledged PRACH preambles per access frame per PRACH. This is equivalent to the number of positive acquisition indicators transmitted per access frame per AICH
8-12
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Physical Layer Measurements UTRA Measurements
RSSI SIR Transmitted carrier power Transmitted code power Transport channel BER Physical channel BER Round trip time PRACH Propagation delay Acknowledged PRACH preambles
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
8-13
Version 1 Rev 0
Compressed Mode
Compressed Mode
In addtion to monitoring Node Bs on the same carrier, the UE must be able to monitor for potential target resources on other UMTS carriers, and in the case of dual mode UEs on alternative RAN technologies (e.g GSM/GPRS). This will involve at minimum retuning of the UEs receiver elements to a new radio frequency. As the transfer of information between network and UE is continuous in a CDMA system, time must be "created" for the UE perform this function. This achieved by the use of Compressed Mode. In compressed mode, time slots from Nfirst to Nlast are not used for transmission of data. Instead, the data that would normally be transmitted during those slots is compressed into the remaining timeslots within that radio frame. As illustrated in the figure opposite, the instantaneous transmit power is increased in the compressed frame in order to keep the quality (BER, FER, etc.) unaffected by the reduced processing gain. The amount of power increase depends on the transmission time reduction method What frames are compressed, are decided by the network. When in compressed mode, compressed frames can occur periodically, as illustrated, or requested on demand. The rate and type of compressed frames is variable and depends on the environment and the measurement requirements. The maximum idle length is defined to be 7 slots per 10ms frame (yielding 4.67ms). There are three methods of compressing the data:
Compressed mode by puncturing

During compressed mode, rate matching (puncturing) is applied for creating transmission gap in one frame.
Compressed mode by reducing the spreading factor by 2

During compressed mode, the Spreading Factor (SF) can be reduced by 2 during one radio frame to enable the transmission of the information bits in the remaining time slots of a compressed frame.
Compressed mode by higher layer scheduling

Compressed mode can be obtained by higher layer scheduling. Higher layers then set restrictions so that only a subset of the allowed TFCs are used in compressed mode. The maximum number of bits that will be delivered to the physical layer during the compressed radio frame is then known and a transmission gap can be generated.
8-14
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Compressed Mode
Version 1 Rev 0
Compressed Mode
One frame (10ms)
Transmission gap available for inter-frequency measurements
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
8-15
Version 1 Rev 0
Cell Selection/Re-selection
The goal of the cell selection procedures is to fast find a cell to camp on. To speed up this process, at "power up" or when returning from "out of coverage", the UE shall start with the stored information from previous network contacts. If the UE is unable to find any of those cells the initial cell search will be initiated. If it is not possible to find a cell from a valid PLMN the UE will choose a cell in a forbidden PLMN and enter a "limited service state". In this state the UE regularly attempt to find a suitable cell on a valid PLMN. If a better cell is found the UE has to read the system information for that cell. The cell to camp on is chosen by the UE on link quality basis. However, the network can set cell re-selection thresholds in order to take other criteria into account, such as, for example: available services; cell load; UE speed. In CDMA, it is important to minimise the UE output power, and also to minimise the power consumption in the UE. In order to achieve that, an Immediate Cell Evaluation Procedure at call set up can ensure that the UE transmits with the best cell, while keeping the power consumption low.
Cell Re-selection
The cell reselection procedure is a procedure to check the best cell to camp on. The evaluation of the measurements for this procedure is always active, in idle mode, after the cell selection procedure has been completed and the first cell has been chosen. The goal of the procedure is to always camp on a cell with good enough quality even if it is not the optimal cell all the time. It is also possible to have a "time to trigger" and hysteresis criteria in the cell reselection to control the number of cell reselections. The parameters needed for the cell reselection procedure (e.g., the offset value and the hysteresis) are unique on a cell to neighbour cell relation basis. These have therefore to be distributed, together with time to trigger value, in system information in the serving cell. This implies that the UE does not need to read the system information in the neighbouring cells before the cell reselection procedure finds a neighbouring cell with better quality.
8-16
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
go here whenever a new PLMN is selected cell information stored for the PLMN Stored Information Cell Selection no suitable cell found suitable cell found Cell Selection when leaving connected mode return to idle mode suitable cell found no suitable cell found 1 no cell information stored for the PLMN Initial Cell Selection
no suitable cell found
suitable cell found
Camped normally suitable cell selected trigger
NAS registration rejected
leave idle mode
Connected Mode
Cell Reselection
no suitable cell found
go here when no USIM in the UE 1 no acceptable cell found an acceptable cell found Cell Selection when leaving connected mode return to idle mode Connected Mode (Emergency calls only) USIM inserted
Any Cell Selection
acceptable cell found
Camped on Any Cell acceptable cell selected trigger
suitable cell found
leave idle mode
Any Cell Reselection
no acceptable cell found
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
8-17
Version 1 Rev 0
Macro Diversity
Macro Diversity
Macrodiversity provides an improved error correction capability through the use of combining/splitting at the RNC and Node B. Communications will be sent via the Iur interface from the RNC in the D-RNS to the RNC in the S-RNS and on to the Iu to the core network. This function controls the duplication/ replication of information streams to receive/ transmit the same information through multiple physical channels from/ towards a single mobile terminal. This function also controls the combining of information streams generated by a single source (diversity link), but conveyed via several parallel physical channels (diversity sub-links). Macrodiversity control should interact with channel coding control in order to reduce the BER when combining the different information streams. In some cases, depending on physical network configuration, there may be several entities that combine the different information streams, i.e. there may be combining/splitting at the S-RNC, D-RNC or Node B level. This function is located in the UTRAN.
8-18
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Macro Diversity
Version 1 Rev 0
Macro Diversity
UTRAN
lu D-RNS RNC
Iur
D-RNS RNC
Iur
S-RNS RNC
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
8-19
Version 1 Rev 0
Handover
Handover
Handover Strategy
The handover strategy employed by the network for radio link control determines the handover decision that will be made based on the measurement results reported by the UE/RNC and various parameters set for each cell. Network directed handover might also occur for reasons other than radio link control, e.g. to control traffic distribution between cells. The network operator will determine the exact handover strategies. Possible types of Handover are as follows: Handover 3G -3G; FDD soft/softer handover; FDD inter-frequency hard handover; FDD/TDD Handover; TDD/FDD Handover; TDD/TDD Handover; Handover 3G - 2G (e.g. Handover to GSM); Handover 2G - 3G (e.g. Handover from GSM).
Handover Causes
The following is a non-exhaustive list for causes that could be used for the initiation of a handover process. Uplink quality; Uplink signal measurements; Downlink quality; Downlink signal measurements; Distance; Change of service; Better cell; O&M intervention; Directed retry; Traffic; Pre-emption
8-20
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Handover
Version 1 Rev 0
Handover
Handover Strategy Handover 3G -3G; FDD soft/softer handover; FDD inter-frequency hard handover; FDD/TDD Handover; TDD/FDD Handover; TDD/TDD Handover; Handover 3G - 2G (e.g. Handover to GSM); Handover 2G - 3G (e.g. Handover from GSM). Handover Causes Uplink quality; Uplink signal measurements; Downlink quality; Downlink signal measurements; Distance; Change of service; Better cell; O&M intervention; Directed retry; Traffic Pre-emption
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
8-21
Version 1 Rev 0
Soft and Softer Handover

Soft Handover is a handover in which the mobile station starts communication with a new Node B on a same carrier frequency, or sector of the same site (softer handover), performing at most a change of code. For this reason Soft Handover allows easily the provision of macro-diversity transmission. This intrinsic characteristic terminology tends to identify Soft Handover with macro-diversity even if they are two different concepts. As a result of this definition there are areas of the UE operation in which the UE is connected to a number of Node Bs. With reference to Soft Handover, the "Active Set" is defined as the set of Node Bs the UE is simultaneously connected to (i.e., the UTRA cells currently assigning a downlink DPCH to the UE constitute the active set). The Soft Handover procedure is composed of a number of single functions: Measurements Filtering of Measurements Reporting of Measurement results The Soft Handover Algorithm Execution of Handover.
Based on the measurements of the set of cells monitored, the Soft Handover function evaluates if any Node B should be added to (Radio Link Addition), removed from (Radio Link Removal), or replaced in (Combined Radio Link Addition and Removal) the Active Set. This procedure is known as the "Active Set Update" procedure.
8-22
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

Cell B Cell A
Eb/(No + lo)
Tadd Tdrop
Add A
Drop B
Relative Threshold Absolute Threshold
Time
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
8-23
Version 1 Rev 0
S-RNS Relocation
S-RNS Relocation
This functionality allows moving the Serving RNS functionality from one RNC to another RNC e.g. closer to where the UE has moved during the communication. The Serving RNS Relocation procedure may be applied when active cell management functionality has created a suitable situation for it. Both UTRAN and CN are involved.
8-24
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
S-RNS Relocation
Version 1 Rev 0
S-RNS Relocation
Step 1 Step 2 D-RNS S-RNS lu RNC lur RNC lur lu RNC S-RNS
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
8-25
Version 1 Rev 0
Power Control
Power Control
Power control controls the level of the transmitted power in order to minimise interference and keep the quality of the connections. Three types of Power Control Procedures are identified:
Open Loop Power Control Closed Loop using the Inner Loop method
UL Inner Loop Power Control - located in both the UTRAN and the UE DL Inner Loop Power Control - located in both the UTRAN and the UE
Closed Loop using the Outer Loop method

The main difference between Inner and Outer Loop power control is that the Frame Error Rate (FER) can be set with Outer Loop Power Control. UL Outer Loop Power Control - located in the S-RNC (UTRAN). DL Outer Loop Power Control - located mainly in the UE, but some control parameters are set by the UTRAN
Site Selection Diversity Power Control (SSDT)

A form of power control for the downlink that can be applied in the UE when in a soft handover situation.
8-26
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Power Control
Version 1 Rev 0
Power Control
Open Loop Power Control Closed Loop Power Control (Inner Loop) Closed Loop Power Control (Outer Loop) Site Selection Diversity Power Control
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
8-27
Version 1 Rev 0
Open Loop Power Control

In UTRAN, open loop power control is applied only immediately prior to initiating a transmission on the PRACH. The UE determines an estimation of the downlink pathloss between the base station and the UE by measuring the UTRA carrier received signal strength at the mobile. Through the medium of the System Information messages on the P-CCPCH, the UE will also have access to certain cell parameters, such as Cell ERP, Cell size, receiver sensitivity, etc. Form this information the UE will calculate the required mean output power level required to achieve the access requirements of the cell it wishes to connect to. The UE will now send its first RACH Pre-amble at this calculated value. If no positive or negative acquisition indicator is detected, the UE will increase its power by the required power-ramping factor, (cell defined parameter), and send a second RACH Pre-amble. This process will be repeated until an acknowledgement is received, or the max retries value is exceeded. If a positive Ack is received, the UE will again adjust its output power, according to an offset value notified by the cell, and transmit the RACH message part. On receipt of the RACH Message part, the UTRAN can accurately calculate the uplink path loss and initiate the use of closed loop power control.
8-28
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

UE monitors Common Pilot and Broadcast information, and calculates DL path Loss
Using DL path loss as "perceived" UL path loss, UE calculates TX power O/P required access network
Only used prior to initial transmission on PRACH
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
8-29
Version 1 Rev 0
Closed Loop Power Control (Inner Loop)

The objective of Closed loop power control is to maintain the the received signal strength, at the base station, for all UEs at the same average level. As all UEs in a cell transmit on the same frequency, a single overpowered mobile could block a whole cell to other users. The uplink inner-loop power control adjusts the UE transmit power in order to keep the received uplink Signal-to-Interference Ratio (SIR) at a given SIR Target (SIRtarget). The serving cells (cells in the active set) should Estimate Signal-to-Interference Ratio (SIRest) of the uplink, using the received pilot symbols in each uplink uplink timeslot. The serving cells should then generate TPC commands and transmit the commands once per slot, using the TPC symbols in each time slot, according to the following rule: if SIRest > SIRtarget then the TPC command to transmit is "0", while if SIRest < SIRtarget then the TPC command to transmit is "1". The UE uses this information to derive TPC_cmd. After deriving of the TPC_cmd, the UE shall adjust the transmit power of the uplink with a step (in dB) which is given by: D = DTPC TPC_cmd. The step size TPC is a layer 1 parameter which is derived from the UE-specific higher-layer parameter "TPC-StepSize" which is under the control of the UTRAN. If "TPC-StepSize" has the value "dB1", then the layer 1 parameter TPC shall take the value 1dB and if "TPC-StepSize" has the value "dB2", then TPC shall take the value 2dB. A similar process is used in the downlink, to control the relative power weighting to be applied to each downlink dedicated channel.
8-30
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

UE monitors DL Signal to Interference Ratio (SIR) And compares against Target SIR level
UE sends Transmit Power Control (TPC) information to Node B, adjusting Node B transmit power output in an attempt to acheive target SIR
Inner Loop Power Control command rate is 1500Hz
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
8-31
Version 1 Rev 0
Closed Loop Power Control (Outer Loop)

While Closed loop power control (Inner Loop) is used to maintain a target SIR, Outer loop power control adjusts the SIR target in the base station according to the needs of the individual radio link and aims at a constant quality, usually defined as a certain target Bit Error Rate (BER) or Frame Error Rate (FER). The reason for adjusting the target is to compensate for variations in UE speed and multipath profile when the UE is moving. Outer loop power control is implemented by having the Node B tag each uplink user data frame with a frame error indicator, such as a CRC check result to the serving RNC. Should this indicate to the RNC that the transmission quality is decreasing, the RNC will in turn command the Node B to increase the SIR target proportionally. The reason for having the outer loop power control reside in the RNC is that this function should be performed after a possible soft handover combining has been performed.
8-32
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
SRNC Checks FER and adjusts target quality value for the UL
Node B receives UL dedicated channel data, which is passed serving RNC along with a Quality estimate of the Transport Channel
SRNC
SRNC target quality Value sent to Node B as New Target SIR value for Inner Loop Power Control
Outer Loop Power Control command rate is 10-100 Hz
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
8-33
Version 1 Rev 0
Multi-Cell Power Control

As we have seen the UE has the ability to receive and process the transmitted downlink from several Node Bs simultaneously. By the same token several Node Bs will be sending conflicting power control commands to the one UE. In this situation the UE will always ramp its power down unless all received power control commands require it to power up.
8-34
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

Increase
Node B
Decrease Mobile Decreases Tx Power
Node B
Node B
Increase Mobile Increases Tx Power
Increase
Node B
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
8-35
Version 1 Rev 0
Site Select Diversity Transmission

Site Selection Diversity Transmit (SSDT) Power Control is a form of power control for the downlink that can be applied while a UE is in Soft Handover (SHO). This section explains how SSDT works, and provides some examples when SSDT should be used. In SHO, a UE has DL connections to more than one cell. Thus, one UE contributes to the DL interference in several cells. SSDT is a power control method that reduces the DL interference generated while the UE is in SHO. The principle of SSDT is that the best cell of the active set is dynamically chosen as the only transmitting site, and the other cells involved turn down their DPDCHs. The DPCCH is transmitted as normally. Each cell is given a temporary identification number. The UE measures the pilot power of the PCCPCHs, and chooses the best one as its primary cell. The temporary id of this primary cell (the primary id) is transmitted on the UL DPCCH to all Node Bs of the active set. A cell that has been selected as primary station transmits its dedicated channels with the power necessary to reach the desired SIR target, whereas all other cells switch off their downlink DPDCH transmission. The primary id is updated by the UE at a frequency of 5, 10 or 20ms. The frequency depends on the SSDT mode and is set by the UTRAN. In order for the UE to continuously perform measurements and to maintain synchronisation, the secondary cells continue to transmit pilot information on the DPCCH. The prerequisite for using SSDT during an RRC connection or during a part of an RRC connection is that all Node Bs involved support SSDT. SSDT is controlled by L3 procedures. The control involves assignment of temporary IDs, setting an SSDT mode and switching SSDT on or off. The control information itself (temporary IDs) terminates in the L1 of Node B and UE respectively.
8-36
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
8-37
Version 1 Rev 0
Space Time Transmit Diversity (STTD)

The open loop downlink transmit diversity employs a space time block coding based transmit diversity. The STTD encoding is optional in UTRAN. STTD support is thus mandatory at the UE. A block diagram of the transmitter and a generic STTD encoder are shown in the slide opposite. Channel coding, rate matching and interleaving is done as in the non-diversity mode. The bit sequence at the antennas after encoding, for an input bit sequence of b0, b1, b2, b3 is shown below:
b0
b1
b2
b3
b0
b1
b2
b3
-b2
b3
b0
-b1
8-38
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

Channelizaton code and long scrambling code C, spreading length = M Tx Antenna 1
TPC TFI M U X Interleaver STTD Encoder Ant 2 Pilot Diversity Pilot Ant 1
Ant 2
M U Ant 1 X
Tx Antenna 2
Data
Channel Encoder
Rate Matching
QPSK symbols
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
8-39
Version 1 Rev 0
Closed Loop Mode Transmit diversity

The general transmitter structure to support closed loop mode transmit diversity for DPCH transmission is shown opposite. Channel coding, interleaving and spreading are done as in non-diversity mode. The spread complex valued signal is fed to both TX antenna branches, and weighted with antenna specific weight factors w1 and w2. The weight factors are complex valued signals (i.e., wi = ai + jbi ), in general. The weight factors (actually the corresponding phase adjustments in closed loop mode 1 and phase/amplitude adjustments in closed loop mode 2) are determined by the UE, and signalled to the UTRAN access point (cell transceiver) using the D-bits of the FBI field of uplink DPCCH. For the closed loop mode 1 different (orthogonal) dedicated pilot symbols in the DPCCH are sent on the 2 different antennas. For closed loop mode 2 the same dedicated pilot symbols in the DPCCH are sent on both antennas.
8-40
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

W1 Spread/scramble DPCCH DPCCH DPCCH CPICH1 Ant1
Tx
x
Ant2
x
W2 CPICH2
Rx Rx
Tx
W1
W2
Weight Generation
Determine FBI message from Uplink DPCCH
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
8-41
Version 1 Rev 0
Admission Control
Admission Control
The Radio Resource Module (RRM) makes decisions on whether calls should be admitted or not. It could be a new call, a reconfiguration or a handover. If one of the following events occurs the RRM rejects the admission attempt: a) b) c) d) e) the OVSF code resource is low the Iub bandwidth resource is low the CPU resource is low the call request is rejected by the CAC module for DCH the call request is rejected by the CAC module for HSDPA admission.
Call Admission Control (CAC)

The CAC algorithm for DCH is responsible for the power-based call admission control of the Rel99 channels. It does not check other resources, such as OVSF codes, Iub bandwidth or CPU. The Call Admission Control (CAC) algorithm applies to DCH calls and Rel99 power consuming portions of HSDPA calls, namely, DL DCH, UL DCH and HS-DPCCH. It does not cover FACH/RACH admission control. The CAC is calculated separately for both ul/dl. It takes the requested data rate and signal to noise ratio (QoS) to calculate the requested service load factor. The common ul or dl channels are taken into consideration by using a preset load factor. Finally the current channel service power and noise are used to calculate the new predicted load factor. This predicted load factor is compared against a threshold, if above reject the call, if below accept the call. For an HSDPA call two sets of checks are performed: one with the HSDPA CAC mechanism to determine whether QoS of the dl bearer can be met, and another with the DCH CAC mechanism to check whether the ul DCH as well as HSDPA specific channels (DL DPCCH and HS-DPCCH) can be admitted or not.
System Load
Admission Control is performed according to the current system load and the required service. The call should be blocked if none of the suitable cells can efficiently provide the service required by the UE at call set up (i.e., if, considering the current load of the suitable cells, the required service is likely to increase the interference level to an unacceptable value). This would ensure that the UE avoids wasting power affecting the quality of other communications. In this case, the network can initiate a re-negotiation of resources of the on-going calls in order to reduce the traffic load. An example of Call Admission Control is given on the right side of the page. 1. 2. 3. 4. CN requests SRNC for establishing a Radio Access Bearer (RAB) indicating QoS parameters. According to QoS parameters the requested service is assigned a type of service. CAC is performed according to the type of service. Resources are allocated according to the result of CAC. Acknowledgement is sent back to CN according to the result of CAC. Sub-layers are configured accordingly.
In the case were PS domain interactive and background services are requested (BE service) and the cell loading is relatively heavy, the call could be rejected if the requested resources are above the allowed thresholds. This has resulted in fewer admissions that could have been granted if the initial bearer rate was reduced. An algorithm has been introduced to address this situation call RAB downsizing. If a PS domain interactive and background services are requested (BE service) is requested and the requested rate is high with a heavy cell loading then the algorithm reduces the initial admission rate , again and again until the RAB downsizing load calculation indicates that the admission control is likely to be successful or until the minimum rate has been reached. If the admission request after RAB downsizing is rejected again, it is possible to use queuing , pre-emption, or directed retry to ensure admission.
8-42
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Admission Control
Version 1 Rev 0
Admission Control
1. RANAP Message RANAP 4. RANAP Message RRM Entity 2. Mapping QoS Parameter Type of Service CAC 3. Resource Allocation
RRC 4. CRLC Config RLC 4. CMAC Connection MAC 4. CPHY-RL Setup-REQ
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
8-43
Version 1 Rev 0
Load Congestion Control (LCC)

This Management task ensures that the system will never be overloaded and remains stable. A well planned system will seldom overload, however if such a condition does occur there must be mechanisms in place to reduce the load quickly and efficiently to achieve quality of service among different classes of users. There are two phases of LCC, the Load Reduction (LDR) phase and the Overload Control (OLC) phase.
Detailed Explanation
Downlink and uplink Load Congestion Control (LCC) have similar functions, and are operating independently. There are two stages for downlink and uplink LCC, namely the basic congestion stage and the overload congestion stage. When a LDR threshold is exceeded, the basic congestion stage is entered andLoad Reduction (LDR) actions are taken. During this stage, the cell load is close to but still below the Call Admission Control (CAC) admission threshold for other services. LDR actions such as inter-frequency handover, bit-rate reduction of BE services, bit-rate reduction of rate-controllable streaming services and adjustment of AMR mode will be taken to gradually reduce the system load and make room for the system to admit more new users. When a Overload Control threshold is exceeded, the overload congestion stage is entered and OLC actions such as fast Transport Format (TF) control and selective drop of users will be taken to quickly reduce system load and try to restore system stability. Upon detection of congestion, this feature allows the system to meet different quality of service requirements, to reduce the data rate of low-priority services and if necessary release some of high-priority services until the system returns to a stable un-congested state. When a cell is detected to be in the LDR stage, the following actions are taken in order to reduce load: Reduce the throughput of Best Effort(BE) interactive and background service Inter-Carrier Load Balancing (ICLB) Iu QoS renegotiation (Max bit rate of PS domain real time services renegotiated) Inter-RAT load balancing (Handover to GSM) When a cell is detected to be in the OLC stage, the following actions are taken. In addition the LDR actions are stopped when the OLC threshold is reached. Fast BE control (Progressively decreasing the maximum Transport Format (TF) of the TrCH that carries BE traffic) Selective drop of UEs (different criteria for uplink and downlink).
8-44
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Load Reduction Phase (LDR)

Reduce the throughput of Best Effort (BE) interactive and background service Inter-Carrier Load Balancing (ICLB) Iu QoS renegotiation (Max bit rate of PS domain real time services renegotiated) Inter-RAT load balancing (Handover to GSM)
Overload Congestion Phase (OLC)

Fast BE control (Progressively decreasing the maximum Transport Format (TF) of the TrCH that carries BE traffic) Selective drop of UEs (Different criteria for downlink and uplink)
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
8-45
Version 1 Rev 0
Cell Breathing
Cell Breathing
Load imbalance can happen between cells with same frequency (carrier). When the load of one cell is too heavy, it results in transmission loss and the quality of communications is decreased for the users at the edge of the cell. At the same time, neighbour cells still have many available resources. When this happens, cell breathing can be used to avoid this: the cell size will be reduced when the cell is overloaded and cell size will be increased when the cell is lightly loaded by adjusting the transmitted power of the pilot channel. The UE at the edge of the cell will be switched to the neighbour cells when the cell is overloaded and the UE at the edge of neighbour cells will be switched to the cell when it is lightly loaded. This results more efficient use of the radio resources.
Detailed Explanation
This algorithm can be used to distribute the traffic in a heavily loaded cell to surrounding cells by reducing the Primary CPICH power. On the other hand, if a cell is lightly loaded it can relieve the loading in surrounding cells by increasing the Primary CPICH power. The RNC then informs the Node B of any change in the Primary CPICH power through an NBAP Cell Reconfiguration Request message. On successful receipt of this message, the Node B reconfigures the Primary CPICH power and modifies both the DL common channel power levels and the dedicated channel maximum/minimum code powers that are set relative to the Primary CPICH power.
8-46
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Cell Breathing
Version 1 Rev 0
Cell Breathing
RNC
Primary CPICH power reduced
Node B
Primary CPICH power increased
Heavily loaded cell
Lightly loaded cell
Traffic load moved to provide more even distribution
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
8-47
Version 1 Rev 0
Hierarchical Cell Structure Layered Cell Traffic Absorption

Considering the high-density of the hot-spot in Urban areas, the Hierarchical Cell Structure (HCS) approach is useful to provide radio coverage to these areas. This feature applies to UEs that support Inter-Frequency Hard Handovers. In the microcell coverage area, the RNC supports the cell selection and reselection parameter configurations (via System Information Broadcast messages) to give a higher priority to the microcell over that of macrocell. This ensures that UEs in non cell DCH state (Cell FACH/ Cell PCH) would select a microcell first. In the macrocell coverage when the UE is in cell DCH state, if the CPICH quality of the microcell is above a configurable threshold and all RABs can be accepted by the microcell, the RNC supports the handover from the macrocell to microcell to realize the microcell traffic absorption function. At the boundary between the layered cell (i.e. Macro cell containing a micro cell layer) and non-layered cell (i.e. a cell in which there is no macrocell/ microcell layer), the RNC supports the handover from the microcell to macrocell in the layered cell coverage area, or from the microcell in the layered cell coverage area to a non-layered cell to ensure continuous services for users. The speed factor is taken into account for the handover from macrocell to microcell. That is normally, for the same network quality (CPICH quality) condition, the service priority of microcell is always higher than that of macrocell, but the time spent in the cell is also a factor, if the time is short a handover is not allowed because the UE is fast moving: The microcell layer can use up to 2 carriers. The macrocell layer can use up to 2 carriers. In the overlap areas, the microcell layer and the macrocell layer cannot use the same frequency.
8-48
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

Cell DCH State
Macro
CPICH quality above set threshold and all RABs supported and slow moving Hard handover to Micro
Non hierarchical Macro
Hierarchical Cells
CPICH quality poor hard handover to Macro or fast moving
Micro
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
8-49
Version 1 Rev 0
8-50
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
HSDPA Overview
Version 1 Rev 0
Chapter 9 HSDPA Overview
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
9-1
Version 1 Rev 0
HSDPA Overview
9-2
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Objectives
Version 1 Rev 0
Objectives
On completion of this chapter the Student will be able to: Describe the important changes and characteristics of HSDPA State the new channels of HSDPA and how they operate in principle Describe the extended UTRAN protocol stack with HSDPA State the advantages and disadvantages of HSDPA and future enhancements Describe the concept of HSUPA
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
9-3
Version 1 Rev 0
HSDPA (High Speed Downlink Packet Access) for WCDMA

HSDPA considers the trend that the volume of IP-based traffic has already exceeded that for circuit-switched traffic in most fixed networks. The same change can be anticipated in mobile networks because of new IP-based mobile services becoming available and are used by increasing number of people in their daily communication. Current estimates show that in advanced mobile communication markets, packet-switched traffic will overtake circuit-switched traffic in the near future. Delivery of digital content over mobile networks will generate additional traffic and revenue.
Feature Study
The HSDPA feature in 3GPP Release 5 is the result of a study carried out in the Release 4 time frame. This study considered a number of techniques in order to provide instantaneous high speed data in the downlink. Some of the considerations and goals taken into account in the evaluation of the different techniques were: To focus on the streaming, interactive and background services: services which require a constant and/high throughput or low error rate. To prioritise urban environments and then indoor deployments (but not limited to these environments and supporting full mobility). To enable compatibility with advanced antenna and receiver techniques: transmit and receive diversity methods are used and might be enhanced To take into account User Equipment processing time and memory requirements: UEs limitations are taken into account by the network To minimize changes on existing techniques and architecture: modest changes to NodeB hardware and UTRAN software
Compatibility with Release 99

HSDPA is designed to co-exist on the same carrier as the current Release 99 WCDMA services, enabling a smooth and cost-efficient introduction of HSDPA into existing WCDMA networks.
Demand for Packet Switched Traffic

The increasing demand for capacity in order to provide high data rate multimedia services in wireless environments necessitates enhanced radio transmission techniques and network protocol functionality. Such techniques have to be added to already existing mobile cellular networks. For 3rd generation UMTS networks based on WCDMA, the HSDPA is being introduced to meet this demand and improve spectral efficiency by higher order modulation using 16-QAM. Note: HSDPA achieves gross data rates in downlink up to 14 Mbit/s under ideal conditions. The reverse link (uplink) may remain on 64 kbit/s unless the operator decides to use High Speed Uplink Packet Access (HSUPA).
9-4
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
9-5
Version 1 Rev 0
HSDPA Targets
HSDPA Targets
Higher Data Rates for Streaming-, Interactive- and Background Services
HSDPA is a feature based on a downlink shared channel that allows user net-data rates of up to 10 Mbit/s. It is designed to support services that require instantaneous high rates in the downlink and lower rates on the uplink. This feature also decreases the level of retransmissions (at the radio link and hence higher layers), in turn allowing the reduction of delivery time. Examples of end-user services targeted by HSDPA are internet browsing and video on demand.
Consideration of UE Processing Time and Memory Requirements

HSDPA takes UE limitations like available physical memory for transmission and especially for retransmission into account. Also the physical channel processing capability is considered. (Examples: Minimum inter-TTI interval, transport channel bits per TTI)
Higher Spectrum Efficiency

With 16-QAM applied in downlink, throughput rates can be doubled compared to QPSK which is used for Rel. 99 and Rel. 4 physical channels. The amount of bits/Hz is increased with 16-QAM as one modulation symbol corresponds to 4 chips whereas in QPSK one modulation symbol represents 2 chips. Even when HSDPA is using QPSK modulation the spectrum efficiency increases as HSDPA exploits good C/I conditions. This is achieved by reducing the protection (increasing the code rate) and thus having more capacity for the application data.
Small Changes to existing Techniques and Architectures

HSDPA minimizes the necessary upgrades and changes in UTRAN and UE. Nevertheless some protocol additions are necessary in NodeB and UE as well some enhancements of existing procedures and protocols.
Efficient Resource Sharing in Downlink among Users

HSDPA introduces a new transport channel type that makes efficient use of valuable radio frequency resources. Beside this, it takes into account the bursty nature of packet switched data by sharing the channelization codes, transmission power and infrastructure hardware among users.
9-6
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
HSDPA Targets
Version 1 Rev 0
HSDPA Targets
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
9-7
Version 1 Rev 0
HSDPA Characteristics
High Speed Downlink Packet Access comes with certain characteristics which distinguishes it clearly from Rel. 99 UTRAN.
Modulation Types
QPSK is already known from Rel. 99 UTRAN. Besides QPSK, HSDPA incorporates the 16-QAM modulation to increase the peak data rates for users served under favorable radio conditions. Support for QPSK is mandatory, though the support for 16-QAM is optional for the network and UE. 16-QAM (Quadrature Amplitude Modulation) was newly introduced in Rel .5 with HSDPA. It is a so called higher order modulation which basically doubles the data rate in good radio conditions. Thus it increases the spectrum efficiency of WCDMA.
Higher Throughput Rates

HDSPA supports peak throughput rates far beyond 2 Mbit/s when radio conditions are suitable and therefore it satisfies the demand for instantaneous high throughput of packet switched services e.g. streaming or interactive traffic class. Theoretically, under optimum condition (Code Rate of 1:1) the following maximum throughput can be achieved: (with 16-QAM (Quadrature Amplitude Modulation) and 15 channelization codes simultaneously used) 960kbit/s x 15 = 14.4 Mbit/s
AMC (Adaptive Modulation and Coding)

AMC is a key feature of HSDPA allowing adjustment of modulation between QPSK and 16-QAM according to radio conditions and retransmission ratio. In addition a variable code rate is used to flexibly adapt the data rate to the physical channel capacity depending on the UEs downlink C/I..
Hybrid ARQ
HARQ functionality combines retransmission with the original transmissions. There a two different ways for HARQ to operate. Either identical retransmission of the data block are sent or retransmission are not identical and differ in data and parity bits compared to the original transmission. The first method is known as chase combining and, the latter as incremental redundancy . HARQ operates on an N-channel Stop and Wait principle.
Transmission and Retransmission Scheduling in NodeB

All Rel. 99 transport channels are terminated at the RNC, except BCH; hence the retransmission procedure for packet data is located in the serving RNC. In order to maximize throughput and reduce delays when retransmitting, additional intelligence is put into the NodeB. In this way, retransmission is controlled by the NodeB, leading to faster retransmission and therefore shorter delay for packet data services. A scheduler in NodeB evaluates for different users what the radio channel conditions are, how much data is pending for each user, how much time has passed since a particular user was last served, for which user retransmission are pending etc. From this input data the scheduler in NodeB may derive a decision how to assign resources to certain users.
9-8
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
9-9
Version 1 Rev 0
QPSK versus 16-QAM Modulation

The figure illustrates the I/Q Plane for QPSK and 16-QAM modulation technique.
QPSK
Each symbol corresponds to 2 consecutive input bits. The four symbols are represented by different phase shifts in the I/Q plane.
16QAM
Each symbol corresponds to four consecutive input bits. Thus the data rate can be doubled with 16-QAM compared to QPSK. The 16 symbols are represented in the I/Q plane by different phase shifts and amplitudes. In 16-QAM modulation the symbol value is determined by phase and amplitude. Compared to that, in QPSK the phase is only modulated and variation in amplitude have only minor influence on the decision space in the I/Q diagram. However with 16-QAM the decision space is heavily influenced by amplitude variations, thus higher constraints are put on the transmitter linearity. Note, a more accurate phase estimate is necessary with 16-QAM since constellation points have smaller differences in phase domain compared to QPSK. Note: The number of constellation points in the I/Q-diagram can be calculated with 2m, where m represents the number of bits or chips per modulation symbol. QPSK modulation has four constellation points in the I/Q-diagram: 2^m = 4 m = 2. 16-QAM modulation has 16 constellation points in the I/Q-diagram: 2^m = 16 m = 4
9-10
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
9-11
Version 1 Rev 0
Maximum Throughput Rates

The formulas opposite consider the physical maximum throughput rates available in FDD mode of WCDMA according to releases and modulation. In Rel. 99 and Rel. 4 only QPSK is used whereas Rel. 5 allows also to user higher order modulation scheme 16-QAM. The standard chip rate is 3.84 Mchips/s across all releases. The slot duration is in all releases 0.67ms corresponding to 2560 chips. Note that the physical maximum chip rate achievable with 3.84 Mchips/s and QPSK modulation is: 2 chips/symbol x 3.84 Mchips/s = 7.68 Mchips/s
UMTS Rel. 99 / Rel. 4

Downlink: In the downlink, the DPDCH and DPCCH are time multiplexed onto I and Q plane so the DPDCH data rate also depends on the DPCCH data rate. The physical maximum bit rate (ignoring losses due to DPCCH) using spreading factor 4 is 5.76 Mbit/s. The downlink slot format # 16 allows for 1248 DPDCH bits/slot and per physical channel. The maximum DPDCH data rate considering 3 spreading codes @ sf4 is: 1248 bits/slot x 15 slots x (3 OVSFs) = 5.616 Mbit/s Uplink: In the uplink each channel DPDCH and DPCCH is assigned an orthogonal channelization code. As both physical channels are I/Q multiplexed, (i.e. separated onto I and Q phases), the maximum physical data rate has to be calculated with 1 bit/symbol. The uplink slot format # 6 allows for 640 bits/slot. The maximum DPDCH data rate considering 6 spreading codes @ sf4 is therefore: 5.76 Mbit/s.
HSDPA Rel. 5
In HSDPA the spreading factor for the user plane is fixed to 16. Thus up to 15 physical channels can be allocated at maximum per UE. QPSK: The downlink slot format # 0 allows for 320 bits/slot and per physical channel. This results in 960 bits/ 2 ms subframe. The maximum physical data rate considering 15 spreading codes @ sf16 is: 7.2 Mbit/s. 16-QAM The downlink slot format #1 allows for 640 bits/slot and per physical channel. This results in 1920 bits/ 2 ms subframe. The maximum physical data rate considering 15 spreading codes @ sf16 is: 14.4 Mbit/s.
9-12
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
UMTS Rel. 99 / Rel 4

Downlink
2 bits/symbol x [3.84 Mcps / (4 chips/symbol)] x (3 OVSF's) = 5.76 Mbits/S
Uplink
HSDPA Rel. 5
QPSK
16-QAM
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
9-13
Version 1 Rev 0
Important Changes for HSDPA

HSDPA involves significant changes in the UTRAN providing a high flexibility to react to changing air-interface conditions or variable user QoS.
New 2 ms Subframe for HSDPA

The TTI (Transmission Time Interval) in HSDPA has been reduced to 2 ms in order to be faster in retransmitting erroneous data blocks compared to the minimum TTI of 10 ms in UTRA-FDD. Another advantage of the shorter TTI in HSDPA is that NodeB can adapt literally every data block to fast changing radio conditions by the means of AMC. Thus it is possible to counteract fading on the air-interface by adjusting modulation and coding every 2 ms.
New Physical Channels and Transport Channel with HSDPA

New channels are introduced for HSDPA: HS-PDSCH, HS-SCCH, HS-DPCCH and HS-DSCH.
No Fast Power Control and variable Spreading Factor

With HSDPA, two of the most fundamental features of WCDMA, fast power control and variable spreading factor are disabled and replaced by AMC (Adaptive Modulation and Coding). Note: AMC uses multicode operation (the UE can use more than one channelization code in parallel) in order to increase the data rate for a certain user and adapts the code rate to the air-interface quality. By these means AMC is able to improve the user throughput or at least keep it constant even the downlink channel quality deteriorates between subsequent transmissions.
New UE Capabilities / Categories

The HSDPA feature is optional for both UE and network in Rel. 5. The UE indicates its HSDPA support and its HS-DSCH physical layer category within the radio access capability parameter.. The physical layer category defines among other parameters the maximum number of channelization codes the UE supports in parallel for multicode operation. A UE may support up to 5, 10 or 15 channelization codes in parallel.
New MAC-hs in NodeB and UE

The implementation of Medium Access Control (MAC-hs) in NodeB and UE is a pre-requisite for allowing the NodeB to schedule transmissions and retransmission, to maintain the HSDPA specific channels and to operate with AMC and Hybrid ARQ.
Impact on NBAP and Frame Protocol Procedure

NBAP procedures need to support HSDPA capability and HSDPA related parameters. The increased bandwidth needs to be supported by the frame protocol. Among other parameters the frame protocol needs to cater for HSDPA flow control information, priority queue handling and UE capability information.
9-14
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
9-15
Version 1 Rev 0
New Channels with HSDPA

The support of HSDPA is based on several new physical channels and one new transport channel.
Transport Channel:
HS-DSCH (High Speed Downlink Shared Channel) The HS-DSCH is the actual transport resource carrying the packet data of the user applications. As it also follows the shortened TTI of 2 ms, it allows for short round trip delay in the operation between NodeB and UE. The 2 ms TTI is short when compared to 10, 20, 40 or 80 ms TTIs supported by Rel. 99 and Rel. 4 transport channels. HS-DSCH describes the physical layer processing by MAC-hs of a HSDPA transport block. Dynamic part: TB size = TBS size {1 to 200 000 bits with 8 bit granularity}; modulation scheme {QPSK, 16-QAM}; redundancy / constellation version {1 8}. Static part: TTI {2 ms for FDD}; type of channel coding {turbo coding}; mother code rate {1/3}, CRC size {24 bits} No semi-static attributes are defined for HS-DSCH.
Physical Channels
High Speed Shared Control Channel (HS-SCCH) The HS-SCCH has a fixed spreading factor of value 128 and is configured only in the downlink direction. It also adopts the shortened TTI of 2 ms. In theory, up to 127 HS-SCCHs can be configured in a cell. However, the UE is required only to be able to listen to up to four HS-SCCH in parallel. The HS-SCCH allows the efficient sharing of one or more HS-PDSCHs among different users. Nevertheless every UE needs to be informed on the DCCH via RRC messages about the specific HS-SCCH-set that it shall monitor in order to receive data via the HS-PDSCHs. High Speed Physical Downlink Shared Channel (HS-PDSCH) The HS-PDSCH has a fixed spreading factor of value 16. Thus, it provides for multicode operation using up to 15 channelization codes in parallel. Of course the UE must support the use of up to 15 channelization codes which depends on its category. The HS-PDSCH adopts the shortened TTI of 2 ms. Uplink Dedicated Control Channel Associated with HS-DSCH Transmission (Uplink HS-DPCCH). The HS-DPCCH has a fixed spreading factor of value 256 and is only configured in uplink direction. The HS-DPCCH also follows the shortened TTI of 2 ms. Its purpose is to provide feedback information about the downlink receive quality and whether the packet data received by the UE are error-free or need to be retransmitted. Thus the NodeB is quickly notified of unsuccessful transmissions and/or changing radio conditions in downlink direction.
9-16
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
Transport Channels
Physical Channels
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
9-17
Version 1 Rev 0
Future Enhancements of HSDPA

UMTS UTRA FDD aims to support a variety of multiple antenna transmission techniques in order to enhance coverage, system throughput and spectral efficiency of HSDPA. A major aim of using multiple antenna transmission in macro-cellular environments is to increase the coverage ratio at medium and higher data rates, lets say 2 Mbit/s and beyond. In a typical deployment, two to four or more transmit antennas might be used per sector.
Beamforming
Beamforming makes use of adaptive antennas and can therefore provide a better C/I to UEs in the downlink. At the same time beamforming allows re-use of scarce downlink channelization codes as the individual UEs are separated in space and possibly through different downlink scrambling codes, thus making use of secondary scrambling codes. The signals toward different UEs from the same cell are typically transmitted under the same primary scrambling code and separated by means of orthogonal channelization codes. However, some of the beams may be transmitted under a secondary scrambling code with its associated channelization code tree, thereby increasing the resources in the cell. Note that the loss of the reduced orthogonality between primary and secondary scrambling code can be partly mitigated in the case of beamforming by splitting the cell into multiple scrambling code regions, so the spatial isolation between beams using different scrambling codes helps to compensate the lack of orthogonality.
Transmit Diversity
The downlink capacity could be improved by using receive antenna diversity in the UE. However for small and cheap mobiles it is not feasible to use two antennas and receiver chains. Therefore, the WCDMA standard already supports the use of base station transmit diversity in Rel. 99. There are two modes: open loop (TSTD and STTD) and closed loop mode (mode1 with phase adjustment only and mode 2 with phase and amplitude adjustment). The open loop mode simply transmits the coded information from two antennas, but on the diversity antenna the bits are time reversed and complex conjugated. The STTD method provides two kinds of diversity. The physical separation of the antennas provides space diversity and the time difference derived from a bit-reversing process provides for time diversity, thus the decoding in the receiver becomes more reliable. The closed loop mode can only be applied to the downlink channel, if there is an associated uplink channel. Thus this mode can only be used with dedicated channels (DPCH, PDSCH or HS-PDSCH with an associated uplink DPCCH).
MIMO
With MIMO (Multiple Input Multiple Output) at the transmitter, x independent data streams are transmitted out of the x antennas on the same frequency band. At the receiver, each antenna receives all of the transmitted sub-streams superimposed, not separately. If multipath scattering is sufficient, these x data streams have different spatial signatures to each of the e.g. p receive antennas and they are separable, the signals arrive with different phases. When a transmitter has x antennas and the receiver has p antennas, the link speed increases linearly with min (x,p) given the same power and bandwidth budget.
9-18
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
9-19
Version 1 Rev 0
Preview to HSUPA
Preview to HSUPA
The aim of the HSUPA is to enhance the uplink DCH operation and performance, using several techniques in order to support services like video-clips, multimedia, e-mail, telematics, gaming and video-streaming. A study showed that various techniques such as Node-B controlled scheduling, shorter TTI and a hybrid ARQ layer in the Node-B can enhance the uplink packet transfer performance significantly compared to Release-99/Rel-4/Rel-5. The targeted improvements are a higher air interface capacity in the uplink and a better end user experience by increasing both the cell throughput and the coverage of higher bit rates in uplink. There are fundamental differences between uplink and downlink data transmission, making it impossible to simply introduce the same HSDPA solutions for the uplink.
Total available Transmission Power

The key difference between uplink and downlink is the handling of the total transmission power available. In downlink, the power is centralized whereas in the uplink the power available for an individual UE is limited by the terminal amplifier capabilities. Therefore it can be said, that a pure time division approach, being in place with the maximum data rate in HSDPA, would not work for the uplink.
Much larger Dynamic of the UL Power Control

Furthermore in uplink the power control has much larger dynamics compared to downlink.
UL does not suffer from Channelization Code Shortage

Higher order modulation like 16-QAM alleviates the problem of scarce channelization codes available in downlink, which is not the case for uplink.
Fast Power Control cannot be abandoned in UL

Additionally the fast power control cannot be abandoned in the case of continuous uplink transmission due to the near-far problem. Simulation results have shown a significant improvement compared to Rel. 5, in the order of 50%-70% increase in system capacity, 20%-55% reduction in end-user packet call delay and around 50% increase in user packet call throughput, when simultaneously applying NodeB scheduling, hybrid ARQ with soft combining, and a shortened TTI. Hence, significant technical benefits have been found for a system using these techniques in conjunction. Complexity of hybrid ARQ has been studied in terms of buffering and timing requirements. The enhancements can be introduced into the FDD specifications without impacting the backwards compatibility with Rel. 5 and earlier releases.
9-20
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Preview to HSUPA
Version 1 Rev 0
Preview to HSUPA
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
9-21
Version 1 Rev 0
Preview to HSUPA
9-22
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Annexe A
Version 1 Rev 0
Chapter 10 Annexe A
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
10-1
Version 1 Rev 0
Annexe A
10-2
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Objectives
Version 1 Rev 0
Objectives
On completion of this chapter the student should be able to: Describe selected UMTS Signalling Flow procedures.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
10-3
Version 1 Rev 0
Paging for a UE in Idle Mode

This example shows how paging is performed for a UE in RRC Idle Mode. The UE may be paged for a CS or PS service. Since the UE is in RRC Idle Mode, the location is only known at CN level and therefore paging is distributed over a defined geographical area (e.g. LA). NOTE: The example below illustrates scenario where LA spans across 2 RNCs. 1. The CN initiates the paging of a UE over a LA spanning two RNCs (i.e. RNC1 and RNC2) via a RANAP message called the Paging message. Parameters Sent: CN Domain Indicator, Permanent NAS UE Identity, Temporary UE Identity, Paging Cause. 2. 3. Paging of UE performed by cell1 using Paging Type 1 message. Paging of UE performed by cell2 using Paging Type 1 message. The UE detects page message from RNC1 (as example) and the procedure for NAS signalling connection establishment follows. NAS message transfer can now be performed. This procedure described for RRC idle mode, applies also to the RRC connected mode in the case of CELL_PCH and URA_PCH states.
10-4
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

UE Node B 1.1 Node B 2.1 RNC 1 RNC 2 CN
1. Paging RANAP RANAP
RANAP
1. Paging
RANAP
2.PCCH: Paging Type 1 3.PCCH: Paging Type 1
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
10-5
Version 1 Rev 0
Paging for the UE in RRC Connected Mode

This will occur in case the position of the UE is already known; a mobility management session will be active at this stage. Two possible solutions exists: The UTRAN co-ordinates the paging request with the existing RRC connection. The UE co-ordinates the paging request with the existing RRC connection. The following example shows how paging is performed for a UE in RRC Connected Mode (CELL_DCH and CELL_FACH states) when the UTRAN co-ordinates the paging request with the existing RRC connection using DCCH. 1. CN initiates the paging of a UE via RANAP message Paging Request Message. Parameters used: CN Domain Indicator, Permanent NAS UE Identity, Temporary UE Identity, Paging Cause. 2. SRNC sends RRC message Paging Type 2.
10-6
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

UE Serving RNC CN
RANAP
1. Paging
RANAP
RRC
2. DCCH Paging Type 2
RRC
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
10-7
Version 1 Rev 0
RRC Connection Establishment

The following example shows establishment of a RRC connection in Dedicated Transport Channel (DCH) state. The following sequence are identified: 1. The UE initiates set-up of an RRC connection by sending RRC message Connection Request on CCCH. Parameters used: Initial UE Identity, Establishment cause, Initial UE Capability. 2. The SRNC decides to use a DCH for this RRC connection, allocates RNTI and radio resources for the RRC connection. When a DCH is to be set-up, NBAP message Radio Link Setup Request is sent to Node B. Parameters used: Cell id, Transport Format Set, Transport Format Combination Set, frequency, UL scrambling code(FDD only), Time Slots (TDD only), User Codes (TDD only), Power control information. 3. Node B allocates resources, starts PHY reception, and responses with NBAP message, Radio Link Setup Response. Parameters used: Signalling link termination, Transport layer addressing information (AAL2 address, AAL2 Binding Identity) for the Iub Data Transport Bearer. 4. SRNC initiates set-up of Iub Data Transport bearer using ALCAP protocol. This request contains the AAL2 Binding Identity to bind the Iub Data Transport Bearer to the DCH. The request for set-up of Iub Data Transport bearer is acknowledged by Node B. 5./6. The Node B and SRNC establish synchronism for the Iub and Iur Data Transport Bearer by means of exchange of the appropriate DCH Frame Protocol frames Downlink Synchronisation and Uplink Synchronisation. Then Node B starts DL transmission. 7. Message RRC Connection Setup is sent on CCCH from SRNC to UE. Parameters: Initial UE Identity, RNTI, Capability update Requirement, Transport Format Set, Transport Format Combination Set, frequency, DL scrambling code (FDD only), Time Slots (TDD only), User Codes (TDD only), Power control information. 8. Message RRC Connection Setup Complete is sent on DCCH from UE to SRNC. Parameters: Integrity information, ciphering information.
10-8
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

UE
RRC
Node B Serving RNS

1. CCCH: RRC Connection Request
Serving RNC
RRC
Allocate RNTI Select L1 and L2 parameters
NBAP
Start Rx
2. Radio Link Setup Request
NBAP
NBAP
3. Radio Link Setup Response
NBAP
4. ALCAP Iub Data Transport Bearer Setup
DCH DCH
Start Rx
5. Downlink Synchronisation 6. Uplink Synchronisation
DCH DCH
RRC RRC
7. CCCH: RRC Connection Setup 8. DCCH: RRC Connection Setup Complete
RRC RRC
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
10-9
Version 1 Rev 0
RRC DCH Release
RRC DCH Release

This example shows RRC Connection release of a dedicated channel, in the case of macrodiversity on two Nodes Bs; the first one connected to the Serving RNC, the second one to the Drift RNC. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8. 9. The CN initiates the release of a dedicated Channel by sending the message Iu Release Command to the SRNC. Parameters used: Cause. The SRNC confirms the release by sending an Iu Release Complete message to the CN. Parameters used: Data volume Report (if data volume reporting to PS is required). The SRNC initiates release of Iu Data Transport bearer using ALCAP protocol. Message RRC Connection Release from SRNC to UE to initiate the RRC connection release. Parameters: Cause. Message RRC Connection Release Complete from UE to SRNC to confirm the RRC connection release. The SRNC initiates the release of the link by sending the Radio Link Deletion to the Node B (SRNC). The SRNC initiates the release of the link by sending the Radio Link Deletion to the Drift RNC. The Drift RNC initiates the release of the link by sending the Radio Link Deletion to the Node B (Drift RNC). The Node B (SRNC) confirms the release of the link by sending the Radio Link Deletion Response to the SRNC.
10. The Node B (Drift RNC) confirms the release of the link by sending the Radio Link Deletion Response to the Drift RNC. 11. The Drift RNC confirms the release of the link by sending the Radio Link Deletion Response to the SRNC. 12. The Node B (SRNC) initiates release of Iub Data Transport bearer using ALCAP protocol. 13. The Node B (Drift RNC) initiates release of Iub Data Transport bearer using ALCAP protocol. 14. The Drift RNC initiates release of Iur Data Transport bearer using ALCAP protocol.
10-10
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
RRC DCH Release
Version 1 Rev 0
RRC DCH Release

UE Node B
Drift RNS
Node B
Serving RNS
Drift RNC
Serving RNC
RANAP
CN
1. Iu Release RANAP Complete 2. Iu Release RANAP RANAP Complete 3. ALCAP Iu Bearer Release
RRC RRC
4. RRC connection Release 5. RRC Connection Release Complete 6. Radio Link Deletion
RRC RRC NBAP
NBAP
RNSAP NBAP
8. Radio Link Deletion
7. Radio Link RNSAP Deletion
NBAP NBAP
NBAP NBAP
9. Radio Link Deletion Response
10. Radio Link Deletion Response
NBAP RNSAP
11. Radio Link Deletion RNSAP Response
12. ALCAP Iub Bearer Release 13. ALCAP Iub Bearer Release ALCAP Iur Bearer Release
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
10-11
Version 1 Rev 0
RA Update
RA Update
This example shows location registration when changing Routing Area including change of 3G SGSN when the UE is in MM idle state towards the 3G SGSN. The illustrated transfer of MM signalling to/from the UE uses an established RRC connection. This RRC connection can have been established beforehand due to ongoing inter-working between UE and 3G-MSC/VLR or be established only for this location registration procedure towards the 3G-SGSN. For each indicated MM message sent in this case to/from UE, the CN discriminator indicates 3G-SGSN. The following procedure will take place to perform the RA update: 1. The RRC connection is established, if not already done. The UE sends the initial message Routing Area Update Request (old P-TMSI, old RAI, etc.) to the new 3G-SGSN. The old P-TMSI and the old RAI are assigned data in UMTS. The SRNS transfers the message to the 3G-SGSN. The sending of this message to 3G-SGSN will also imply establishment of a signalling connection between SRNS and 3G-SGSN for the concerned UE. The UTRAN shall add the RAC and the LAC of the cell where the message was received before passing the message to the SGSN. The new 3G-SGSN send an SGSN Context Request (old P-TMSI, old RAI) to the old 3G-SGSN to get the IMSI for the UE. (The old RAI received from UE is used to derive the old 3G-SGSN identity/address.) The old 3G-SGSN responds with SGSN Context Response (e.g. IMSI, PDP context information and Authentication triplets). Security functions may be executed. The new 3G-SGSN informs the HLR of the change of 3G-SGSN by sending Update GPRS Location (IMSI, SGSN number, SGSN address) to the HLR. The HLR cancels the context in the old 3G-SGSN by sending Cancel Location (IMSI). The old 3G-SGSN removes the context and acknowledges with Cancel Location Ack. The HLR sends Insert Subscriber Data (IMSI, subscription data) to the new 3G-SGSN. The new 3G-SGSN acknowledges with Insert Subscriber Data Ack. The HLR acknowledges the Update GPRS Location by sending Update GPRS Location Acknowledge to the new 3G-SGSN. The new 3G-SGSN validates the UEs presence in the new RA. If due to regional, national or international restrictions the UE is not allowed to attach in the RA or if subscription checking fails, then the new 3G-SGSN rejects the Routing Area Update Request with an appropriate cause. If all checks are successful, then the new 3G-SGSN responds to the UE with Routing Area Update Accept (new P-TMSI, new RAI, etc.). The UE acknowledges the new P-TMSI with Routing Area Update Complete.
2.
3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.
9.
10. When the location registration procedure is finished, the 3G-SGSN may release the signalling connection towards the SRNS for the concerned UE. The SRNS will then release the RRC connection if there is no signalling connection between 3G-MSC/VLR and SRNS for the UE.
10-12
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
RA Update
Version 1 Rev 0
RA Update
UE SRNS New 3G_SGSN HLR Old 3G_SGSN
1. RRC connection establishment 1. RRC update required (old RAI, old P-TMSI) 2. SGSN Context Required (old P-TMSI, old RAI) 2. SGSN Context Resp. (IMSI, Auth.triplets) 3. Security Functions 4. Update GPRS Location 5. Cancel Location 5. Cancel Location Ack 6. Insert Subscriber Data 6. Insert Subscriber Data Ack 7. Update GPRS Location Ack 8. RA upd Accept (new RAI, new P-TMSI 9. RA update complete 10. Release 10. RRC connection release
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
10-13
Version 1 Rev 0
SRNC Relocation
SRNC Relocation
This example shows SRNS relocation when the source RNC and target RNC are connected to different 3G-MSC. The procedure is as follows: 1. The UTRAN makes the decision to perform the Serving RNC relocation procedure, including the decision of onto which RNC (Target RNC) the Serving RNC functionality is to be relocated. The source SRNC sends SRNC Relocation required messages to the MSC. This message includes parameters such as target RNC identifier and an information field that shall be passed transparently to the target RNC. Upon reception of SRNC Relocation required message the Anchor MSC prepares itself for the switch and determines from the received information that the SRNC relocation will (in this case) involve another MSC. The Anchor MSC will then send a Prepare SRNC Relocation Request to the applicable non-anchor MSC, including the information received from the Source RNC. The non-anchor MSC will send a SRNC Relocation Request message to the target RNC. This message includes information for building up the SRNC context, transparently sent from Source RNC (UE ID, No of connected CN nodes, UE capability information), and directives for setting up Iu user plane transport bearers. When Iu user plane transport bearers have been established, and target RNC has completed its preparation phase, SRNC Relocation Proceeding 1 message is sent to the non-anchor MSC. The Prepare SRNC Relocation Response that is sent from non-anchor MSC to Anchor MSC will contain the "SRNC Relocation Proceeding 1 received" command from the target RNC. When the "SRNC Relocation Proceeding 1" command has been received in the Anchor MSC, the user plane transport bearers has been allocated between the target RNC and Anchor MSC and the Anchor MSC is ready for the SRNC move. Then the Anchor MSC indicates the completion of preparation phase at the CN side for the SRNC relocation by sending the SRNC relocation proceeding 2 message to the Source RNC. When the source RNC has received the "SRNC Relocation Proceeding 2" message, the source RNC sends a SRNC Relocation Commit message to the target RNC. The target RNC executes switch for all bearers at the earliest suitable time instance. Immediately after a successful switch at RNC, the target RNC (=SRNC) sends "SRNC Relocation Complete" message to the non-anchor MSC. This message is included by the non-anchor MSC in the "Complete SRNC relocation message" that is sent to the anchor MSC. Upon reception of this message, the Anchor-MSC switches from the old Iu transport bearers to the new ones. After a successful switch at the Anchor MSC, a release indication is sent towards the Source RNC. This will imply release of all UTRAN resources that were related to this UE. When the target RNC is acting as SRNC, it will send New MM System Information to the UE indicating e.g. relevant Routing Area and Location Area. Additional RRC information may then also be sent to the UE, e.g. new RNTI identity.
2.
3.
4. 5.
6.
7.
8. 9.
10-14
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
SRNC Relocation
Version 1 Rev 0
SRNC Relocation
UE
Source RNC Target RNC
1. SRNC Relocation Required 2. Prepare SRNC Relocation 3. SRNC Relocation Request 3. SRNC Relocation Proceeding 4. Prepare SRNC response 5. SRNC Reloc Proceed 2 (a) 6. SRNC Reloc Commit 7. SRNC Reloc Complete 9. New MM System Info 7. Complete SRNC Reloc 8. Release
Anchor MSC
HLR
Non-anchor MSC
(b)
10. Routing Area Update
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
10-15
Version 1 Rev 0
SRNC Relocation
10-16
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
SRNC Relocation
10-17
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0
SRNC Relocation
10-18
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Glossary
Version 1 Rev 0
Chapter 11 Glossary
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-1
Version 1 Rev 0
Glossary
11-2
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Glossary of technical terms
Version 1 Rev 0

This Glossary of technical terms contains standard Motorola acronyms, abbreviations and numbers used throughout the documentation set.
A Interface - AUTO
3GPP 8-PSK A Interface Third Generation Partnership Project 8 Symbol Phase Shift Keying Interface between MSC and BSS. The interface is based on the use of one or more E1/T1 digital links. The channels on these links can be used for traffic or signalling. Authentication algorithm that produces SRES, using RAND and Ki. A single algorithm performing the function of A3 and A8. Stream cipher algorithm, residing on an MS, that produces ciphertext out of plaintext, using Kc. Ciphering key generating algorithm that produces Kc using RAND and Ki. Anonymous Access ATM Adaptation Layer 2 (for real-time services) ( ITU-T I.363.2) ATM-Adaptation Layer 5 (non-real time) ( ITU-T I.363.5) Acknowledgement Request Bit ( used in LLC-protocol Logical Link Control) See Access Burst. Interface between a remote BSC and BTS. Motorola offers a GSM standard and a unique Motorola Abis interface. The Motorola interface reduces the amount of message traffic and thus the number of 2 Mbit/s lines required between BSC and BTS. Asynchronous Balanced Mode Answer Bid Ratio. The ABR is the ratio of successful calls to total number of calls. As a measure of effective calls, it reflects the performance of the total network AC-DC Power Supply module. Alternating Current. In electricity, AC occurs when charge carriers in a conductor or semiconductor periodically reverse their direction of movement. Household utility current in most countries is AC with a frequency of either 50 or 60 hertz (complete cycles per second). The RF current in antennas and transmission lines is another example of AC. An AC waveform can be sinusoidal, square, or sawtooth-shaped. Some AC waveforms are irregular or complicated. Square or sawtooth waves are produced by certain types of electronic oscillators, and by a low-end UPS when it is operating from its battery. Access Class (C0 to C15). Application Context. Automatic Congestion Control. A method by which congested switches automatically communicate their congestion level to other switches. (3GTS 22.011)
A3 A38 A5 A8 AA AAL-2 AAL-5 A-Bit AB Abis interface
ABM ABR
ac-dc PSM ac
AC AC ACC
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-3
Version 1 Rev 0

Access Burst ACCH ACK, Ack ACM The Access Burst is used by the MS to access the BTS. It carries RACH uplink from the MS to the BTS to start a call. Associated Control CHannel. Control information associated with TCH or DCCH. ACKnowledgement. Accumulated Call meter. The ACM is a function contained within the SIM. It accumulates the total units (in the home currency) for both the current call and all preceding calls. For security reasons, the SIM only allows the value of the ACM to be incremented, not decremented. Resetting of the ACM is only possible after entering PIN2. Address Complete Message. AC Power Interface Module. Used in M-Cell6 indoor ac BTS equipment. AC Power Supply Module. Used in M-Cell6 BTS equipment. Association Control Service Element. The ACSE is one of the three Application Service Elements (ASE) which reside in the application layer of the OSI protocol and act as an interface to the lower layer protocols. It is used by applications to create a title for identification. See also ASI and ROSE. Antenna Combining Unit. Analogue to Digital (converter). See ADC. ADministration Centre. Analogue to Digital Converter. A device that converts a signal that is a function of a continuous variable into a representative number sequence carrying equivalent information. Advanced Data Communications Control Protocol. A bit-oriented data-link-layer (DL) protocol used to provide point-to-point and point-to-multipoint transmission of data frames that contain error-control information. Note: ADCCP closely resembles high-level data link control (HDLC). Asynchronous Disconnected Mode ADMinistration processor. ADMINistration. Abbreviated Dialling Number. Abbreviated dialling is a telephone service feature that (a) permits the user to dial fewer digits to access a network than are required under the nominal numbering plan, and (b) is limited to a subscriber-selected set of frequently dialled numbers. Adaptive Differential Pulse Code Modulation. Differential pulse-code modulation (DPCM) in which the prediction algorithm is adjusted in accordance with specific characteristics of the input signal. Application Entity. The system-independent application activities that are made available as application services to the application agent.
ACM ACPIM AC PSM ACSE
ACU A/D ADC ADC
ADCCP
ADM ADM ADMIN ADN
ADPCM
AE
11-4
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

AEC AEF AET Acoustic Echo Control. In a system, the reduction of the power level of an echo or the elimination of an echo. Additional Elementary Functions. Active Events Table. Alarms and events are sent to the Events Log in the GUI. Different operators will have different subscription lists. All alarms and events are sent to the AET before they are re-routed to different subscription lists. Automatic Frequency Control. A device or circuit that maintains the frequency of an oscillator within the specified limits with respect to a reference frequency. Absolute Frame Number. Automatic Gain Control. A process or means by which gain is automatically adjusted in a specified manner as a function of a specified parameter, such as received signal level. Access Grant CHannel. A GSM common control channel used to assign MS to a SDCCH or a TCH. Authentication Header ( RFC 2402) Action indicator. Acquisition Indicator Artificial Intelligence. A branch of computer science whose goal is to develop electronic devices that can operate with some of the characteristics of human intelligence. Among these properties are logical deduction and inference, creativity, the ability to make decisions based on past experience or insufficient or conflicting information, and the ability to understand natural language. Alarm Interface Board. Acquisition Indicator Channel (UMTS Physical Channel) A class of processor. The radio link between the BTS and the MS. See Application Layer. Access Link Control Application Part ( ITU-T Q.2630.1 / Q.2630.2) Acknowledged Mode operation ( UMTS-RLC) Amplitude Modulation. Modulation in which the amplitude of a carrier wave is varied in accordance with some characteristic of the modulating signal. Automatic Message Accounting (processor). A service feature that automatically records data regarding user-dialled calls. Acknowledged Mode Data (UMTS RLC PDU-type) Adaptive Multi-Rate. The capability of operating at gross bit-rates of 11.4 kbit/s (half-rate) and 22.8 kbit/s (full-rate) over the air interface. Cell broadcast mobile terminated message. A message broadcast to all MSs in a cell.
AFC
AFN AGC
AGCH AH Ai AI AI
AIB AICH AIO Air interface AL ALCAP AM AM
AMA AMD AMR
AM/MP
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-5
Version 1 Rev 0

ANSI American National Standards Institute. ANSI is the primary organisation for fostering the development of technology standards in the United States. ANSI works with industry groups and is the U.S. member of ISO and the IEC. Long established computer standards from ANSI include ASCII and SCSI. A transmitter/receiver which converts electrical currents into RF and vice versa. In GSM systems, transmits and receives RF signals between the BTS and MS. Advice of Charge. Advice of Charge Charging supplementary service. Advice of Charge Information supplementary service. Automatic Output Control. Application Process. CPCH Access Preamble Acquisition Indicator Channel (UMTS Physical Channel) Access Preamble Acquisition Indicator Access Point Name ( Reference to a GGSN) See OSI RM. The Application Layer is the highest of seven hierarchical layers. It interfaces directly to, and performs common application services for, the application processes. It also issues requests to the Presentation Layer. The common application services provide semantic conversion between associated application processes. Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number. The GSM available frequency is divided in two bands. Each band is divided into 200kHz slots called ARFCN. Each ARFCN is shared between 8 mobiles, each using it in turn. Each mobile uses the ARFCN for one TS (Timeslot) and then waits for its turn to come around again. A mobile has use of the ARFCN once per the TDMA frame. The combination of a TS number and ARFCN is called a physical channel. Automatic Repeat-reQuest. Error control for data transmission in which the receiver detects transmission errors in a message and automatically requests a retransmission from the transmitter. Address Resolution Protocol. A Transmission Control Protocol / Internet Protocol (TCP/IP) protocol that dynamically binds a Network Layer (NL) IP address to a Data Link Layer (DL) physical hardware address, e.g., Ethernet address.(RFC 826) Application Server Access Stratum ( UMTS) Access Service Class Association Control Service Element. An ASE which provides an AP with the means to establish and control an association with an AP in a remote NE. Maps directly onto the Presentation layer (OMC).
Antenna
AoC AoCC AoCI AOC AP AP-AICH API APN Application Layer
ARFCN
ARQ
ARP
AS AS ASC ASCE
11-6
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange. ASCII is a standard developed by ANSI to define how computers write and read characters. It is the most common format for text files in computers and on the Internet. In an ASCII file, alphabetic, numeric, and special characters are represented with a 7-binary digit binary number. 128 possible characters are defined. UNIX and DOS-based operating systems (except for Windows NT) use ASCII for text files. Windows NT uses a newer code, Unicode. IBMs System 390 servers use a proprietary 8-bit code called extended binary-coded decimal interchange code. Conversion programs allow different operating systems to change a file from one code to another. Application Service Element (OMC). A coherent set of integrated functions to help accomplish application communication, e.g., within an application entity (AE). Application Specific Entity (TCAP). Application Server - Incoming Leg Control Model Abstract Syntax Notation One. A formal notation used for describing data transmitted by telecommunications protocols, regardless of language implementation and physical representation of these data, whatever the application, whether complex or very simple.( ITU-T X.680 / X.681) Application Server - Outgoing Leg Control Model Alarm and Status Panel. Answer Seizure Ratio. The percentage of calls that are completed successfully. All Trunks Busy. An equipment condition in which all trunks (paths) in a given trunk group are busy. Attention-Command The interface between XCDR and BSC. Antenna Transceiver Interface. Asynchronous Transfer Mode. A high-speed multiplexing and switching method utilising fixed-length cells of 53 octets to support multiple types of traffic. ( ITU-T I.361) ATTach. Automatic Trunk Testing Subsystem. Ensures the quality of telephone lines by means of a series of tests. ATTS can be initiated by either an operator command or by a command file, which can be activated at a predetermined time. Access Unit. Authentication Centre. A GSM network entity which provides the functionality for verifying the identity of an MS when requested by the system. Often a part of the HLR. AUThentication. AUTOmatic mode.
ASE
ASE AS-ILCM ASN.1
AS-OLCM ASP ASR ATB AT-Command Ater ATI ATM
ATT (flag) ATTS
AU AUC
AUT(H) AUTO
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-7
Version 1 Rev 0

B Interface - Byte
B Interface BA BAIC BAOC Baud Interface between MSC and VLR. BCCH Allocation. The radio frequency channels allocated in a cell for BCCH transmission. Barring of All Incoming Calls supplementary service. Barring of All Outgoing Calls supplementary service. The unit in which the information carrying capacity or signalling rate of a communication channel is measured. One baud is one symbol (state transition or level-transition) per second. This coincides with bits per second only for two-level modulation with no framing or stop bits Battery Backup Board. Base Band Hopping. Method of frequency hopping in which each transceiver at the base station is tuned to a different frequency, and the signal is switched to a different transceiver for each burst. Base station Colour Code. The BCC and the NCC are part of the BSIC. The BCC comprises three bits in the range 000 to 111. See also NCC and BSIC. Broadcast Control CHannel. A GSM control channel used to broadcast general information about a BTS site on a per cell or sector basis. Binary Coded Decimal. The representation of a decimal digit by a unique arrangement of no fewer than four binary digits. Base station Control Function. The GSM term for the digital control circuitry which controls the BTS. In Motorola cell sites this is a normally a BCU which includes DRI modules and is located in the BTS cabinet. Bearer channel. Used in ISDN services to carry 64kbit/s of data, when used at full capacity. Broadcast Channel (UMTS Transport Channel) Bearer Capability Information Element. Specific GSM parameters in the Setup message are mapped into a BCIE for signalling to the network and within the PLMN. The BCIE is used to request a bearer service (BS) from the network. Bearer Control Tunneling Protocol ( ITU-T Q.1990) Base station Control Unit. A functional entity of the BSS which provides the base control function at a BTS site. The term no longer applies to a type of shelf (see BSC and BSU). Base Controller Unit Power. Backward Error Correction BEGin Message ( TCAP) Bit Error Probability.
BBBX BBH
BCC
BCCH
BCD BCF
B channel BCH BCIE
BCTP BCU
BCUP BEC BEG BEP
11-8
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

BER Bit Error Rate. The number of erroneous bits divided by the total number of bits transmitted, received, or processed over some stipulated period. The BER is usually expressed as a coefficient and a power of 10; for example, 25 erroneous bits out of 100,000 bits transmitted would be 25 out of 105 or 25 x 10-5. Business Exchange Services. Bad Frame Indication. An indication of unsuccessfully decoded speech frames. See FER. Border Gateway Breakout Gateway Control Function Busy Hour. In a communications system, the sliding 60-minute period during which occurs the maximum total traffic load in a given 24-hour period. Busy Hour Call Attempt. A statistic based on call attempts that a switch processes during a BH. See also BH. Barring of all Incoming call supplementary service. Backward Indicator Bit Balanced-line Interconnect Board. Provides interface to 12 balanced (6-pair) 120 ohm (37-pin D-type connector) lines for 2 Mbit/s circuits. See also T43. Bearer Independent Call Control ( ITU-T Q.1902.1 Q.1902.6) Barring of all Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the Home PLMN Country supplementary service. See Reciprocal neighbour.. Balanced-line Interconnect Module. From BINary. An area in a data array used to store information. Also, a name for a directory that contain files stored in binary format. BootLoad. Also known as download. For example, databases and software can be downloaded to the NEs from the BSS. Block Error Rate BiLLiNG. Binary digit. A character used to represent one of the two states or digits (0 or 1) in the numeration system with a radix of two. Also, a unit of storage capacity. Bits per second (bps). A measure of data transmission speed. The number of binary characters (1s or 0s) transmitted in one second. For example, an eight-bit parallel transmission link which transfers one character (eight bits) per second is operating at 8 bps. A group of bits (binary digits) transmitted as a unit, over which a parity check procedure is applied for error control purposes. Full rate traffic channel. See also Full Rate. Broadcast / Multicast Control ( 3GTS 25.324)
BES BFI BG BGCF BH
BHCA BI BIB BIB
BICC BIC-Roam Bi-directional neighbour BIM Bin
BL BLER BLLNG bit
bit/s
block Bm BMC
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-9
Version 1 Rev 0

BN BPF Bit Number. Number which identifies the position of a particular bit period within a timeslot. Bandpass Filter. A filter that ideally passes all frequencies between two non-zero finite limits and bars all frequencies not within the limits. BCU Power Supply Module. Basic Rate Interface. An ISDN multipurpose user interface allowing simultaneous voice and data services provided over two clear 64 kb/s channels (B channels) and one clear 16 kb/s channel (D channel). The interface is also referred to as 2B+D. Base Station. See BSS. Basic Service (group). Bearer Service. A type of telecommunication service that provides the capability for the transmission of signals between user-network interfaces. The PLMN connection type used to support a bearer service may be identical to that used to support other types of telecommunication service. Base Station Controller. A network component in the GSM PLMN which has the digital control function of controlling all BTSs. The BSC can be located within a single BTS cabinet (forming a BSS) but is more often located remotely and controls several BTSs (see BCF, BCU, and BSU). Maximum Countdown Value to be used by the mobile station ( Countdown Procedure) Basic Service Group. Base Transceiver Station Identity Code. Each cell has a BSIC. It is a local colour code that allows a mobile station to distinguish between different neighbouring base stations. The BSIC is an octet, consisting of three bits for the Network Colour Code (NCC) and three bits for the Base station Colour Code (BCC). The remaining two bits are unused. See also NCC and BCC. BSIC of an adjacent cell. Base Site control Processor (at BSC). Backward Sequence Number. A field in a signal unit (SU) that contains the forward sequence number (FSN) of a correctly received signal unit being acknowledged in the signal unit that is being returned to the sender. See also FSN and SU. Base Station System. The system of base station equipment (Transceivers, controllers and so on) which is viewed by the MSC through a single interface as defined by the GSM 08 series of recommendations, as being the entity responsible for communicating with MSs in a certain area. The radio equipment of a BSS may cover one or more cells. A BSS may consist of one or more base stations. If an internal interface is implemented according to the GSM 08.5x series of recommendations, then the BSS consists of one BSC and several BTSs.
BPSM BRI
BS BS BS
BSC
BS_CV_MAX BSG BSIC
BSIC-NCELL BSP BSN
BSS
11-10
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

BSSAP BSS Application Part (part of SS7) . Protocol for LAPD or LAPB signalling links on the A-interface. Comprises DTAP and BSSMAP messages. Supports message communication between the MSC and BSS. Base Station System GPRS Protocol Base Station System Control cabinet. The cabinet which houses one or two BSU shelves at a BSC or one or two RXU shelves at a remote transcoder (RXCDR). Base Station System Management Application Part (part of SS7). Call processing protocol for A-interface messages exchanged between the MSC and BSS. The BSS interprets these messages. BSS Operation and Maintenance Application Part (part of SS7). Base Station Unit shelf. The shelf which houses the digital control modules for the BTS (part of BTS cabinet) or BSC (part of BSSC cabinet). British Telecom. Bus Terminator. In order to avoid signal reflections on the bus, each bus segment has to be terminated at its physical beginning and at its end with the characteristic impedance. Bus Terminator Card. Base Transceiver Function. Base Transceiver Processor (at BTS). One of the six basic task groups within the GPROC. Base Transceiver Station. A network component in the GSM PLMN which serves one cell, and is controlled by a BSC. The BTS contains one or more Transceivers (TRXs). A period of modulated carrier less than one timeslot. The physical content of a timeslot. BSSGP Virtual Connection Identifier A sequence of adjacent binary digits operated upon as a unit. Generally consists of eight bits, usually presented in parallel. A byte is usually the smallest addressable unit of information in a data store or memory.
BSSGP BSSC
BSSMAP
BSSOMAP BSU
BT BT
BTC BTF BTP BTS
Burst BVCI Byte
C - CW
C/R-Bit C/T-Field C C Interface C7 CA CA Command / Response Bit logical Channel / Transport channel identification Field Conditional. Interface between MSC and HLR/AUC. See SS7. Cell Allocation. The radio frequency channels allocated to a particular cell. Central Authority. Software process that controls the BSS.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-11
Version 1 Rev 0

CAB CADM Cabinet. Country ADMinistration. The Motorola procedure used within DataGen to create new country and network files in the DataGen database. Channel Assignment Indicator Charge Advice Information. Cell Analysis Tool. The CAT is part of the Motorola Cell Optimization product. It is intended for engineering staff and OMC administrators. CAT provides information about GSM network cell performance. Cell Balancer. The CB process balances the cells configured for GPRS across PRPs. In the event of a PRP outage, this process sends message(s) indicating that GPRS service is unavailable to the appropriate CRM(s) for the cells that could not be moved to an INS (IN Service) PRP. Cell Broadcast. See CBSMS. Circuit Breaker. Cell Broadcast Agent. Cell Broadcast Centre. The call processing centre for CBSMS messages. Cell Broadcast CHannel. The channel which is used to broadcast messages to all MSs in a specific cell. Combining Bandpass Filter. Cell Broadcast Link. A bi-directional data link which allows communications between the BSS and the CBC. Circuit Breaker Module. Cell Broadcast Message Identifier. Cell Broadcast Service. See CBSMS. Cell Broadcast Short Message Service. CBSMS allows a number of unacknowledged general messages to be broadcast to all MSs within a particular region. The content may include information such as local traffic conditions, the weather, the phone number of the local taxi company, etc. The messages are sent from a CBC via a BSC to a BTS and from there on a special cell broadcast channel to the MSs. The CBC is considered as a node outside the PLMN and can be connected to several BSCs. However, a BSC is only connected to one CBC. Clock Bus. Connection Confirm. Part of SCCP network connectivity. Country Code. A one to three digit number which specifically identifies a country of the world that an international call is being routed to (e.g., 1 = North America, 44 = United Kingdom). Call Control. CC functions, such as number translations and routeing, matrix path control, and allocation of outgoing trunks are performed by the MSC.
CAI CAI CAT
CB
CB CB CBA CBC CBCH CBF CBL CBM CBMI CBS CBSMS
CBUS CC CC
CC
11-12
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

CCB Cavity Combining Block, a three way RF combiner. There are two types of CCB, CCB (Output) and CCB (Extension). These, with up to two CCB Control cards, may comprise the TATI. The second card may be used for redundancy. Completion of Calls to Busy Subscriber supplementary service. Common Control CHannels. A class of GSM control channels used to control paging and grant access. Includes AGCH, PCH, and RACH. Group of MSs in idle mode. Common Control Physical Channel (see also P-CCPCH and S-CCPCH) Common Channel Distributor. Channel Coding Digital Signal Processor. Conditional Call Forwarding. See CFC. Control CHannel. Control channels are channels which carry system management messages. Council for Communications Harmonization (referred to in GSM Recommendations). Comit Consultatif International Tlgraphique et Tlphonique. This term has been superseded. See ITU-TSS. Current Call Meter. Capability/Configuration Parameter. Control Channel Protocol Entity. Hundred call-seconds. A single call lasting one hundred seconds is one CCS. Also, a measure of traffic load obtained by multiplying the number of calls per hour by the average holding time per call expressed in seconds, and dividing by 100. Often used in practice to mean hundred call seconds per hour with per hour" implied; as such, it is a measure of traffic intensity. See also erlang. Coded Composite Transport Channel (UMTS) Channel Codec Unit. The CCU performs the following functions: Channel coding functions, including FEC and interleaving, Radio channel measurement functions, including received quality level, received signal level, and information related to timing advance measurements. Circuit. Collision Detection / Channel Assignment Indicator Channel (UMTS Physical Channel) Control Driver Board. Common Desktop Environment. Part of the SUN software (crontab - cron job file). Collision Detection Indicator
CCBS CCCH
CCCH_GROUP CCPCH CCD CCDSP CCF CCH CCH CCITT CCM CCP CCPE CCS
CCTrCH CCU
Cct CD/CA-ICH CDB CDE CDI
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-13
Version 1 Rev 0

CDMA Code-Division Multiple Access. CDMA is a digital cellular technology that uses spread-spectrum techniques. Unlike competing systems, such as GSM, that use TDM, CDMA does not assign a specific frequency to each user. Instead, every channel uses the full available spectrum. Individual conversations are encoded with a pseudo-random digital sequence. Call Detail Record. A record of voice or data SVCs, which includes calling and called numbers, local and remote node names, data and timestamp, elapsed time, and call failure class fields. This is the information needed to bill the customer for calls and facility usage data for calls. Compact Disk-Read Only Memory. Chargeable DURation. Control Equalizer Board (BTS). Called station identifier. Central Equipment Identity Register. By GSM definition, a cell is an RF coverage area. At an omni-site, cell is synonymous with site; at a sectored site, cell is synonymous with sector. This differs from analogue systems where cell is taken to mean the same thing as site. (See below)
CDR
CD-ROM CDUR CEB CED CEIR Cell
CEND
End of charge point. The time at which the calling, or called, party stops charging by the termination of the call or by an equivalent procedure invoked by the network or by failure of the radio path. Confrence des administrations Europennes des Postes et Telecommunications. Circuit Error Rate Monitor. Identifies when discontinuity is detected in a circuit. An alarm is generated and sent to the OMC-R when the error count exceeds an operator specified threshold. The alarm identifies the RCI or CIC and the path where the error is detected. Conversion Facility. Call Forwarding. A feature available to the mobile telephone user whereby, after initiation of the feature by an authorised subscriber, calls dialled to the mobile telephone of an authorised subscriber will automatically be routed to the desired number. See also CFC and CFU. Control Function. CF performs the SGSN mobility management functions and OA&M functions for the GSN module. Call Forwarding on mobile subscriber Busy supplementary service. Service automatically redirects incoming calls for phone busy situations. Call Forwarding Conditional supplementary service. Service automatically redirects incoming calls for busy, no reply, or not reachable situations. See also CFB, CFNRc, and CFNRy. Configuration Fault Management RSS process.
CEPT CERM
CF CF
CF CFB
CFC
CFM
11-14
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

CFNRc Call Forwarding on mobile subscriber Not Reachable supplementary service. Service automatically redirects incoming calls for not reachable situations. Call Forwarding on No Reply supplementary service. Service automatically redirects incoming calls for no reply situations. Call Forwarding Unconditional supplementary service. Service automatically redirects all incoming calls. Charging Gateway. Charging Gateway Function. A means of one-way transmission. A defined sequence of periods (for example, timeslots) in a TDMA system; a defined frequency band in an FDMA system; a defined sequence of periods and frequency bands in a frequency hopped system. Challenge Handshake Authentication Protocol ( RFC 1334) Coaxial Interconnect Module. See Full Rate and Half Rate. These are the channel modes that are currently used. CHarging Point. Card Holder Verification information. Ciphering Key Sequence Number. The CKSN is a number which is associated with the ciphering key, Kc. It is used to ensure authentication consistency between the MS and the VLR. Cell Identity. A block of code which identifies a cell within a location area. CUG Index. Carrier to Interference ratio. Circuit Identity Code. The unique identifier of the terrestrial portion of a circuit path. A CIC is either a 64 kbit/s or 16 kbit/s connection depending on whether a site has local or remote transcoding. A CIC with local transcoding occupies a complete E1/T1 timeslot. A 16 kbit/s CIC, at a site with remote transcoding, occupies a sub-channel of an E1/T1 timeslot. Call Instance Code ( BICC) Channel Identity ( ATM) Classless Inter-Domain Routing ( RFC 1519) Cell Individual Offset ( 3GTS 25.331) Carrier to Interference Ratio. Indicates the received signal power level relative to the interference power level. Unintelligible data produced through the use of encipherment. Ciphering Key Sequence Number. Calling Line Identity. The identity of the caller. See also CLIP and CLIR. Calling Line Identification Presentation supplementary service. Allows the called party to identify the caller. See also CLIR.
CFNRy CFU CG CGF Channel
CHAP CIM Channel Mode CHP CHV CKSN
CI CI C/I CIC
CIC CID CIDR CIO CIR, C/I Ciphertext CKSN CLI CLIP
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-15
Version 1 Rev 0

CLIR Calling Line Identification Restriction supplementary service. Allows the caller to withhold their identity from the called party. See also CLIP. Clock. Clock Extender half size board. The fibre optic link that distributes GCLK to boards in system (part of the BSS, etc). ConnectionLess Manager. Coordinates global control over the BSS by handling of all connectionless messages (that is, messages that are not directly concerned with a connected call). This includes such messages as global resets, load limiting and circuit blocking. CLeaR. Configuration Management. Configuration management allows the operator to perform network configuration tasks, and to maintain all details of the network configuration at the OMC. Connection Management. See CLM. Connectionless Manager. See CLM. CoMmanD. Channel Mode Modify. Message sent to an MS to request a channel mode change. When it has received the CMM message, the MS changes the mode to the indicated channel and replies with a Channel Mode Modify Acknowledge message indicating the new channel mode. Common Management Information Protocol. Protocol used for communication over the OML. Common Management Information Service Element. An ASE which provides a means to transfer management information via CMIP messages with another NE over an association established by ASCE using ROSE (OMC). Cellular Manual Revision. Documentation updates. CalliNg tone. Coder/Decoder. A speech coding unit that converts speech into a digital format for radio broadcast, and vice versa. Manufacturers name for a type of multiplexer and packet switch commonly installed at the Motorola OMC-R. A cell whose cell boundary follows the boundary of a co-located neighbour cell. The coincident cell has a different frequency type, but the same BSIC, as that of the neighbour cell. COnnected Line Identity. Identity of the connected line. See also COLP and COLR. Placed together; two or more items together in the same place. An 8-bit code assigned to a BTS to distinguish interfering signals from another cell. COnnected Line Identification Presentation supplementary service. Allows the calling party to identify the line identity of the connected party. See also COLR.
CLK CLKX CLM
CLR CM
CM CM CMD CMM
CMIP CMISE
CMR CNG Codec CODEX Coincident Cell
COLI Collocated Colour Code COLP
11-16
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

COLR COnnected Line Identification Restriction supplementary service. Allows the connected party to withhold its line identity from the calling party. See also COLP. Code Object Manager (software). COMplete. Combiner. The purpose of a combiner in the BSS is to combine transmitter outputs from the RCUs onto an antenna. COMMunications. Communications Hub. Provides Ethernet switching and IP routeing for the GSN complex local networking and GSN complex E1 interfaces to the public data network. Communications Link. See also 2 Mbit/s link. See cPCI. CONtinue Message ( TCAP) CONFerence circuit. Circuit used for multi-party conference calls. CONFIGuration Control Program. Situation occurring when an element cannot receive all the service it is requesting. CONNect ACKnowledgement. Part of the synchronization process. After a connection has been established, the CONNACK message indicates that traffic channels are available. Call Processing. The CP process in the BTS controls the MS to BSS to MS signalling link, MS originated and terminated calls and inter-BSS and inter-BTS handovers. Common Packet Channel (UMTS Transport Channel) FDD only Compact Peripheral Component Interconnect. A set of standards that define a common card cage, power supplies, and processor boards.
COM COM COMB COMM, Comms CommHub
CommsLink Compact PCI CON CONF CONFIG Congestion CONNACK
CP
CPCH cPCI
CPCS CPGM CPICH CPS CPU
Common Part Convergence Sublayer CCCH Paging Manager. The CPGM processes the paging messages sent from the SGSN to the BSC/BTS. Common Pilot Channel (UMTS Physical Channel / see also P-CPICH and S-CPICH) Code and Puncturing Scheme. Central Processing Unit. The portion of a computer that controls the interpretation and execution of instructions. Also, the portion of a digital communications switch that executes programmed instructions, performs arithmetic and logical operations on signals, and controls input/output functions. Command/Response field bit. Carriage Return (RETURN).
C/R CR
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-17
Version 1 Rev 0

CR Connection Request (Part of SCCP network connectivity). An SCCP Connection Request message is sent from the BSS to the MSC to establish a connection. See also CREF. Cyclic Redundancy Check (3 bit). An error-detection scheme that (a) uses parity bits generated by polynomial encoding of digital signals, (b) appends those parity bits to the digital signal, and (c) uses decoding algorithms that detect errors in the received digital signal. Call RE-establishment procedure. Procedure for re-establishing a call in the event of a radio link failure. Connection REFused (Part of SCCP network connectivity). In a number of operating circumstances, a CREF message may be sent from the MSC to the BSS in response to a Connection Request (CR). Cell Resource Manager. The CRM allocates and activates timeslots and subchannels on the available carriers. Cell Resource Machine. Cellular Radio Modem-Low Speed/High Speed. Low speed modem used to interwork 300 to 2400 bit/s data services under V.22bis, V.23, or V.21 standards. High speed modem used to interwork 1200 to 9600 bit/s data services under V.22bis, V.32, or V.29/V.27ter/V.21 standards. Controlling RNC Motorola Controlled Roll Out Group. A CRO consists of a customer site implementation of a new product, software release, or combination of products/releases. Cathode Ray Tube (video display terminal). Coding Scheme Circuit Switched. GPRS Coding Scheme-1 (9.05 kbit/s per TCH). GPRS Coding Scheme-2 (13.4 kbit/s per TCH). GPRS Coding Scheme-3 (15.6 kbit/s per TCH). GPRS Coding Scheme-4 (21.4 kbit/s per TCH). Call Session Control Function ( SIP) Circuit Switched Data Code Storage Facility Processor (at BSC and BTS). A GPROC device which facilitates the propagating of new software instances with reduced system down time. See also IP. CPCH Status Indicator Channel (UMTS Physical Channel) Central Statistics Process. The statistics process in the BSC. Circuit Switched Public Data Network. A publicly available communications network using circuit switched digital data circuits. Call Transfer supplementary service.
CRC
CRE CREF
CRM CRM CRM-LS/HS
CNRC CRO
CRT CS CS CS-1 CS-2 CS-3 CS-4 CSCF CSD CSFP
CSICH CSP CSPDN
CT
11-18
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

CT CT CTCH CTP Channel Tester. Channel Type. Common Traffic Channel (Logical) PTM Call Trace Product (Tool). The CTP is designed to help operators of GSM900 and DCS1800 communication networks tune and optimize their systems. CTP allows Call Trace data to be analysed and decoded. Control Terminal Port. Common Technical Regulation. Clear to Send. A handshake signal used with communication links, especially RS232 or CCITT Rec. V.24, to indicate (to a transmitter from a receiver) that transmission may proceed. Generated in response to a request to send signal. See also RTS. Compact Transceiver Unit (M-Cellhorizon radio). Closed User Group supplementary service. A CUG is used to control who can receive and/or place calls, by creating a unique group. When a CUG is configured for an interface, only those subscribers that are members of the same CUG can receive/place calls. The total value for an entire statistical interval. Countdown Value Code Word Call Waiting supplementary service. A subscriber feature which allows an individual mobile telephone user currently engaged in a call to be alerted that another caller is trying to reach him. The user has a predetermined period of time in which to terminate the existing conversation and respond to the second call. Congestion window
CTP CTR CTS
CTU CUG
Cumulative value CV CW CW
cwnd
D Interface - DYNET
D Interface D/A DAB DAC DACS DAK DAN DAS DAT Interface between VLR and HLR. Digital to Analogue (converter). See DAC. Distribution Alarm Board (in BTS6 cabinet). Digital to Analogue Converter. A device that converts an input number sequence into a function of a continuous variable. Digital Access Cross-connect System. A data concentrator and organizer for Tl / El based systems. Downlink Acknowledgement Digital ANnouncer (for recorded announcements on MSC). Data Acquisition System. Digital Audio Tape. Audio-recording and playback medium/format that maintains a signal quality equal to that of the CD-ROM medium/format.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-19
Version 1 Rev 0

DataGen Data Link Layer Sysgen Builder System. A Motorola offline BSS binary object configuration tool. See OSI RM. This layer responds to service requests from the Network Layer and issues service requests to the Physical Layer. It provides the functional and procedural means to transfer data between network entities and to detect and possibly correct errors that may occur in the Physical Layer. Decibel. A unit stating the logarithmic ratio between two numeric quantities. See also dBm. DataBase. Dummy Burst (see Dummy burst). DataBase Administration/Database Administrator. A dB referenced to 1 milliwatt; 0 dBm equals one milliwatt. DataBase Management System. Direct Current. DC is the unidirectional flow or movement of electric charge carriers, usually electrons. The intensity of the current can vary with time, but the general direction of movement stays the same at all times. As an adjective, the term DC is used in reference to voltage whose polarity never reverses. Diversity Control Board (part of DRCU). Dedicated Control CHannel. A class of GSM control channels used to set up calls and report measurements. Includes SDCCH, FACCH, and SACCH. Data Carrier Detect signal. Hardware signal defined by the RS-232-C specification that indicates that a device such as a modem is on-line and ready for transmission. Data Circuit terminating Equipment. The DCE performs functions such as signal conversion and coding, at the network end of the line between the DTE and the line. Also, The RS232 configuration designated for computers. DCE equipment can be connected to DTE equipment with a straight cable, but to other DCE equipment only with a null modem cable. Data Communications Function. Duplexed Combining bandpass Filter. (Used in Horizonmacro). Dedicated CHannel (Transport) Data channel. Used in ISDN to perform call signalling and connection setup functions. In some circumstances, the channel can also be used to carry user data. Data Communications Network. A DCN connects Network Elements with internal mediation functions or mediation devices to the Operations Systems. DC Power Supply Module. Digital Cellular System at 1800 MHz. A cellular phone network using digital techniques similar to those used in GSM 900, but operating on frequencies of 1710 - 1785 MHz (receive) and 1805 - 1880 MHz (transmit).
dB DB DB DBA dBm DBMS dc
DCB DCCH
DCD
DCE
DCF DCF DCH D channel
DCN
DC PSM DCS1800
11-20
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

DDF DDS DDS DDS Dual-stage Duplexed combining Filter. (Used in Horizonmacro). The DDF is an integrated combiner, filter and duplexer. DataGen Data Store. Store area for DataGen input and output files. Data Drive Storage. Direct Digital Synthesis. A technology for generating highly accurate and frequency-agile (rapidly changeable frequency over a wide range), low-distortion output waveforms. Diversity Equalizer Board. Data Encryption Standard DETach. Decision Feedback Equalizer. A receiver component/function. The DFE results in a very sharp Bit Error Rate (BER) threshold by using error feedback. Data Gathering Tool. The DGT collects all the relevant data relating to a specified problem and copies it to tape or file, together with a problem description. The file or tape is then sent to Motorola for analysis. Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol ( RFC 2131) Digital Host Processor. A hard GPROC based device located at Horizonmicro2 BTS sites. It represents the MCU of a slave Horizonmicro2 FRU. The MCU that the DHP represents is responsible for providing DRI and carrier support. Drum Intercept Announcer. 4 Bit Line termination module (part of Horizonmicro). Line termination module (part of Horizonmicro). DISConnect. Discontinuous. Diversity In phase and Quadrature phase. Device Interface Routine. Software routine used in the BSS. Data Link (layer). See Data Link Layer. See Downlink. Data Link Connection Identifier. In frame-relay transmission systems, 13-bit field that defines the destination address of a packet. The address is local on a link-by-link basis. Data Link Discriminator. Diversity Low Noise Block. Destination Local Reference DownLink Segmentator. The DLS segments LLC frames into RLC data blocks to be transmitted over the air interface. Data Link Service Process. Handles messages for an OMP and a shelf GPROC.
DEQB DES DET DFE
DGT
DHCP DHP
DIA Digit DINO E1/HDSL DINO T1 DISC Discon DIQ DIR DL DL DLCI
DLD DLNB DLR DLS DLSP
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-21
Version 1 Rev 0

DLSP Dm DMA DMA Digital Link Signalling Processor. Control channel (ISDN terminology applied to mobile service). Deferred Maintenance Alarm. An alarm report level; an immediate or deferred response is required (see also PMA). Direct Memory Access. Transfer of data from a peripheral device, such as a hard disk drive, into memory without that data passing through the microprocessor. DMA transfers data into memory at high speeds with no processor overhead. Digital Mobile Radio. Distributed Electronic Mobile Exchange (Motorolas networked EMX family). Directory Number. Data Network Identifier Code. In the CCITT International X.121 format, the first four digits indicate the international data number, the next three digits are the data country code, and the final digit is the network code. Domain Name Service. A service that translates from logical domain or equipment names to IP addresses. Physical link from the BTS towards the MS (BTS transmits, MS receives). Dial/Dialled Pulse. A dc pulse produced by an end instrument that interrupts a steady current at a sequence and rate determined by the selected digit and the operating characteristics of the instrument. Destination Point Code. A part of the label in a signalling message that uniquely identifies, in a signalling network, the (signalling) destination point of the message. Digital Processing and Control board. Dedicated Physical Control Channel (UMTS Physical Channel) Dedicated Physical Channel (UMTS / Term to combine DPDCH and DPCCH) Dedicated Physical Data Channel (UMTS Physical Channel) Pulse-code modulation (PCM) in which an analog signal is sampled and the difference between the actual value of each sample and its predicted value, derived from the previous sample or samples, is quantified and converted, by encoding, to a digital signal. Note: There are several variations of differential pulse-code modulation. Digital Private Network Signalling System (BT standard for PABX interface). Dual Path Preselector. BTS module. Dual Port Random Access Memory. Data PROCessor. Digital Power Supply Module.
DMR DMX DN DNIC
DNS Downlink DP
DPC
DPC DPCCH DPCH DPDCH DPCM
DPNSS DPP DPR, DPRAM DPROC DPSM
11-22
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

DRAM Dynamic Random Access Memory. A type of semiconductor memory in which the information is stored in capacitors on a integrated circuit. Data Rate Converter board. Provides data and protocol conversion between PLMN and destination network for 8 circuits. Part of IWF. Diversity Radio Channel Unit. Contains transceiver, digital control circuits, and power supply. Part of the BSS. Digital Radio Interface. Provides encoding/decoding and encryption/decryption for radio channels. Part of BSS. Digital Radio Interface extended Memory. A DRI with extra memory. DRI Extender half size board. Fibre optic link from DRI to BCU. Part of the BSS. Drift Radio Network Controller Discontinuous reception (mechanism). A means of saving battery power (for example in hand-portable units) by periodically and automatically switching the MS receiver on and off. Digital transmission System 1 (or Digital Signal level 1). Term used to refer to the 1.44 Mbit/s (U.S.) or 2.108 Mbit/s (Europe) digital signal carried on a T1 facility. German term for 2 Mbit/s line (PCM interface). Downlink Shared Channel (UMTS Transport Channel) Data Switching Exchange. Digital Speech Interpolation. A compression technique that relies on the pauses between speech bursts to provide additional compression. DSI enables users to gain an additional 2:1 compression on the average on their line. Digital Switching Network 64 kbit/s timeslot on an E1/T1. Digital Signal Processor. A specialized, programmable computer processing unit that is able to perform high-speed mathematical processing. Digital Subscriber Signalling No 1. N-ISDN user network interface signalling. Diversity Signal Strength Indication. Direct Transfer Application Part (Part of SS7). Call processing protocol for A-Interface messages exchanged directly between the MSC and the mobile unit without interpretation by the BSS. Dedicated Traffic Channel (UMTS Logical Channel) Data Terminal Equipment. An end instrument that converts user information into signals for transmission or reconverts the received signals into user information. Also, the RS232 configuration designated for terminals. DTE equipment can be connected to DCE with a straight cable, but to other DTE equipment only with a null modem.
DRC
DRCU DRI DRIM DRIX DRNC DRX, DRx
DS-1
DS-2 DSCH DSE DSI
DSN DSO DSP
DSS1 DSSI DTAP
DTCH DTE
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-23
Version 1 Rev 0

DTF DT1 DTI DTM DTMF Digital Trunk Frame. A frame or electronic rack of digital trunk interface equipment. DaTa form 1 (Part of SCCP network connectivity). Digital Trunk Interface. Dual Transer Mode. Dual Tone Multi-Frequency. Multifrequency signalling in which specified combinations of two voice band frequencies, one from a group of four low frequencies and the other from a group of four higher frequencies, are used. The sounds a push button tone telephone makes when it dials a number. Data Terminal Ready signal. Method of flow control (RS232 Interface). A modem interface control signal sent from the DTE to the modem, usually to indicate to the modem that the DTE is ready to transmit data. Dual Transceiver Module. (Radio used in Horizonmicro (M-Cellarena) and Horizonmacro (M-Cellarenamacro)). Discontinuous Transmission (mechanism). A means of saving battery power (for example in hand-portable units) and reducing interference by automatically switching the transmitter off when no speech or data are to be sent. A period of carrier less than one timeslot whose modulation is a defined sequence that carries no useful information. A dummy burst fills a timeslot with an RF signal when no information is to be delivered to a channel. DYnamic NETwork. Used to specify BTSs sharing dynamic resources.
DTR
DTRX DTX, DTx
Dummy burst
DYNET
E - EXEC
E E1 See Erlang. Also known as CEPT1. The 2.048 Mbit/s rate used by European CEPT carrier to transmit 30 64 kbit/s digital channels for voice or data calls, plus a 64 kbit/s signalling channel and a 64 kbit/s channel for framing and maintenance. Interface between MSC and MSC. External Alarm. See EAS. Typical external alarms are: Door open, High humidity, Low humidity, Fire, Intruder. External Alarm System. The EAS is responsible for the monitoring of all customer-defined environmental alarms at a site. The customer defines the alarm string and the severity of the alarms based on the individual requirements of the site. Indications are provided when the alarms are set or cleared. Energy per Bit/Noise floor, where Eb is the signal energy per bit and No is the noise energy per hertz of noise bandwidth. Elementary Basic Service Group.
E Interface EA EAS
Eb/No EBCG
11-24
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

EC Echo Canceller. Performs echo suppression for all voice circuits. If cancellation does not take place, the PLMN subscriber hears the voice signal as an echo, due to the total round-trip delay introduced by the GSM system (typically 180 ms). Provides echo cancelling for telephone trunks for 30 channels (EC). The Motorola European Cellular Infrastructure Division. Error Correction Mode. A facsimile mode, in which the sending machine will attempt to send a partial page up to four times. Ratio of energy per modulating bit to the noise spectral density. Enhanced Circuit Switched Data ( HSCSD + EDGE) Event Counting Tool. The ECT provides information about the number and type of events and alarms generated throughout the network. It extracts data from the event log files for specified dates, allowing the user to generate reports on individual network elements, groups of elements, or the whole network. Explicit Call Transfer supplementary service. ECT enables a user to connect two other parties with which he is engaged in a telephone call and leave the connection himself. Enhanced Data-rates for Global Evolution. Electric Echo Loss. Electrically Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. An EEPROM is a special type of PROM that can be erased by exposing it to an electrical charge. Like other types of PROM, EEPROM retains its contents even when the power is turned off. Enhanced GPRS. Extended GSM900. EGSM900 provides the BSS with a further range of frequencies for MS and BSS transmit. EGSM MSs can use the extended frequency band as well as the primary band, while non-EGSM MSs cannot use the extended frequency band. A GSM900 cell can contain both GSM900 and EGSM900 carrier hardware. EGSM operates on the frequency range, 880 - 915 MHz (receive) and 925 - 960 MHz (transmit). Events Interface. Part of the OMC-R GUI. Electronic Industries Alliance. Equipment Identity Register. The EIR contains a centralized database for validating the IMEI. The register consists of lists of IMEIs organised as follows: White List - IMEIs which are known to have been assigned to valid MS equipment. Black List - IMEIs which have been reported stolen or which are to be denied service for some other reason. Grey List - IMEIs which have problems (for example, faulty software). These are not, however, sufficiently significant to warrant a black listing. Effective Isotropically Radiated Power. The arithmetic product of the power supplied to an antenna and its gain. Equipment Identity Register Procedure. Echo Loss.
ECB ECID ECM Ec/No ECSD ECT
ECT
EDGE EEL EEPROM
EGPRS EGSM900
EI EIA EIR
EIRP EIRP EL
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-25
Version 1 Rev 0

EM Event Management. An OMC-R application. It provides a centralised facility for reporting network-wide generated events and alarms, and for monitoring the status of the Network. ElectroMagnetic Compatibility. The ability of systems, equipment, and devices that utilize the electromagnetic spectrum to operate in their intended operational environments without suffering unacceptable degradation or causing unintentional degradation because of electromagnetic radiation or response. Electro Motive Force. The rate at which energy is drawn from a source that produces a flow of electricity in a circuit; expressed in volts. Electro Magnetic Interference. Any electromagnetic disturbance that interrupts, obstructs, or otherwise degrades or limits the effective performance of electronics/electrical equipment. enhanced Multi-Level Precedence and Pre-emption service. This service has two parts: precedence and pre-emption. Precedence involves assigning a priority level to a call in combination with fast call set-up. Pre-emption involves the seizing of resources, which are in use by a call of a lower precedence, by a higher level precedence call in the absence of idle resources. Pre-emption can also involve the disconnection of an on-going call of lower precedence to accept an incoming call of higher precedence. Electrical Man Machine Interface. Electronic Mobile Exchange (Motorolas MSC family). Fr. - all at once (a CCITT #7 Digital Transmission scheme); En bloc sending means that digits are sent from one system to another ~ (that is, all the digits for a given call are sent at the same time as a group). ~ sending is the opposite of overlap sending. A system using ~ sending will wait until it has collected all the digits for a given call before it attempts to send digits to the next system. All the digits are then sent as a group. END Message ( TCAP) Enhanced One-Phase End of Tape. EGPRS Packet Channel Request. Erasable Programmable Read Only Memory. EPROM is a type of memory that retains its contents until it is exposed to ultraviolet light. The ultraviolet light clears its contents, making it possible to re-program the memory. Enhanced Power Supply Module. Used in +27 V positive earth cabinets. Static model against which the performance of the equalizer is tested to extremes. See also TU3, TU50, HT100 and RA250. Equalizer Board. Control circuit for equalization for 8 time slots each with equalizing circuitry and a DSP. Equalizer Control Processor. Equalizer Digitizer Signal Processor.
EMC
EMF
EMI
eMLPP
EMMI EMX en bloc
END EOP EOT EPCR EPROM
EPSM EQ50 EQB EQCP EQDSP
11-26
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

Equalization The process by which attenuation and/or phase shift is rendered essentially constant over a band of frequencies, even though the transmission medium or the equipment has losses that vary with frequency. An electrical network in which attenuation (or gain) and/or phase shift varies as a function of frequency. Used to provide equalization. International (dimensionless) unit of traffic intensity defined as the ratio of time a facility is occupied to the time it is available for occupancy. One erlang is equal to 36 CCS. In the US this is also known as a traffic unit (TU). Ear Reference Point. Facility for assessing handset and headset acoustic responses. Effective Radiated Power. The power supplied to an antenna multiplied by the antenna gain in a given direction. ERRor. Electronic Serial Number (North American Market) Encapsulating Security Payload ( RFC 2406) Electro-static Point. Connection point on the equipment for an anti-static wrist strap. Embedded SQL (Structured Query Language). An RDBMS programming interface language. Extended TACS (analogue cellular system, extended). A standard protocol (IEEE 802.3) for a 10 Mbit/s baseband local area network (LAN) bus using carrier-sense multiple access with collision detection (CSMA/CD) as the access method, implemented at the Physical Layer in the OSI RM, establishing the physical characteristics of a CSMA/CD network. ETSI Technical Report. European Telecommunication Standard. European Telecommunications Standards Institute. End of Transmission. Executive Process.
Equalizer
Erlang
ERP ERP ERR ESN ESP ESP ESQL E-TACS Ethernet
ETR ETS ETSI ETX EXEC
F Interface - Full Rate

F Interface FA Interface between MSC and EIR. Fax Adaptor. Device which complements Group 3 facsimile apparatus in order to be able to communicate over a GSM PLMN. Full Allocation. Functional Area. Final Assembly Code.
FA FA FAC
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-27
Version 1 Rev 0

FACCH Fast Associated Control Channel. A GSM dedicated control channel which temporarily uses the TCH to perform high speed transmissions, and carries control information after a call is set up. See also SDCCH. Fast Associated Control Channel/Full rate. See also Full Rate. Fast Associated Control Channel/Half rate. See also Half Rate. Forward Access Channel (UMTS Transport Channel) See Frequency correction burst. Feedback Information UMTS Final Block Indicator Flow control Buffer Management. FBM is a functional unit residing on the PRP. It controls buffer capacity for each cell and each mobile so that the incoming data from the SGSN matches the air throughput. Fibre Channel Arbitrated Loop. A serial data transfer architecture. FC-AL is designed for mass storage devices and other peripheral devices that require very high bandwidth. Using optical fibre to connect devices, FC-AL supports full-duplex data transfer rates of 100MBps. Frequency Correction CHannel. A GSM broadcast control channel which carries information for frequency correction of the MS. Fault Collection Process. Part of the fault management process in the BTS. Frame Check Sequence. The extra characters added to a frame for error detection and correction. Frequency Division Duplex Fiber Distributed Data Interconnect (optical Layer 2) Frequency Division Multiplex. A multiplexing technique that uses different frequencies to combine multiple streams of data for transmission over a communications medium. FDM assigns a discrete carrier frequency to each data stream and then combines many modulated carrier frequencies for transmission.
FACCH/F FACCH/H FACH FB FBI FBI FBM
FC-AL
FCCH
FCP FCS FDD FDDI FDM
FDMA
Frequency Division Multiple Access. The use of frequency division to provide multiple and simultaneous transmissions to a single transponder. Fixed Dialling Number. The fixed dialling feature limits dialling from the MS to a pre-determined list maintained on the SIM card. It can be used to limit calling to certain areas, exchanges or full phone numbers.
FDN
11-28
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

FDP FEC Fault Diagnostic Procedure. Forward Error Correction. Correction of transmission errors by transmitting additional information with the original bit stream. If an error is detected, the additional information is used to recreate the original information. Front End Processor. An OMC-R device. The FEP is a driver that stores data in its own database about all of the sites in the system. All bursts from the sites are directed to the FEP. It can also interrogate the sites and collect its data either manually or automatically at pre-defined times. Frame Erasure Ratio. The ratio of successfully decoded good speech frames against unsuccessfully decoded bad frames. For Further Study. See Frequency Hopping. Frequency Hopping Indicator. Forward Indicator Bit. Used in SS7 - Message Transfer Part. The forward indicator bit and backward indicator bit together with the forward sequence number and backward sequence number are used in the basic error control method to perform the signal unit sequence control and acknowledgement functions. Memory logic device in which the information placed in the memory in a given order is retrieved in that order. Finite Impulse Response (filter type). Fill In Signal Unit Foreign Key. A database column attribute; the foreign key indicates an index into another table. Fault Management (at OMC). Frequency Modulation. Modulation in which the instantaneous frequency of a sine wave carrier is caused to depart from the centre frequency by an amount proportional to the instantaneous value of the modulating signal. Fixed Mobile Convergence Fault Management Initiated Clear. An alarm type. If an FMIC alarm is received, the fault management software for the network item clears the alarm when the problem is solved. See also Intermittent and OIC. Fibre optic MUltipleXer module. Frame Number. Identifies the position of a particular TDMA frame within a hyperframe. First Office Application. A full functional verification of new product(s) on a commercial system using accepted technology and approved test plans. Fibre Optic eXtender board. First Partial Bitmap
FEP
FER FFS, FS FH FHI FIB
FIFO FIR FISU FK FM FM
FMC FMIC
FMUX FN FOA
FOX FPB
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-29
Version 1 Rev 0

FR FR See Full Rate. Frame Relay. An interface protocol for statistically multiplexed packet-switched data communications in which (a) variable-sized packets (frames) are used that completely enclose the user packets they transport, and (b) transmission rates are usually between 56 kb/s and 1.544 Mb/s (the T-1 rate). A set of consecutive Pulse Code Modulation (PCM) time slots containing samples from all channels of a group, where the position of each sample is identified by reference to a frame alignment signal. Also, an information or signal structure which allows a receiver to identify uniquely an information channel. The state in which the frame of the receiving equipment is synchronized with respect to that of the received signal to accomplish accurate data extraction. Frame Reject Field Replaceable Unit. A board, module, etc. which can be easily replaced in the field with a few simple tools. Period of RF carrier less than one timeslot whose modulation bit stream allows frequency correction to be performed easily within an MS burst. The repeated switching of frequencies during radio transmission according to a specified algorithm. Frequency hopping improves capacity and quality in a highly loaded GSM network. Multipath fading immunity can be increased by using different frequencies and interference coming from neighbour cells transmitting the same or adjacent frequencies can be reduced. Frequency Synchronization. All BSS frequencies and timing signals are synchronized to a high stability reference oscillator in the BSS. This oscillator can free run or be synchronized to the recovered clock signal from a selected E1/T1 serial link. MSs lock to a reference contained in a synchronization burst transmitted from the BTS site. Free Space Loss. The decrease in the strength of a radio signal as it travels between a transmitter and receiver. The FSL is a function of the frequency of the radio signal and the distance the radio signal has travelled from the point source. Forward Sequence Number. See FIB. File Transfer, Access, and Management. An ASE which provides a means to transfer information from file to file. (OMC). forwarded-to number. Fault Translation Process (in BTS). File Transfer Protocol. A client-server protocol which allows a user on one computer to transfer files to and from another computer over a TCP/IP network. Also the client program the user executes to transfer files (RFC 959). Refers to the current capacity of a data channel on the GSM air interface, that is, 8 simultaneous calls per carrier. See also HR - Half Rate.
Frame
Frame Alignment
FRMR FRU Frequency Correction
Frequency Hopping
FS
FSL
FSN FTAM ftn FTP FTP
Full Rate
11-30
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

G Interface - GWY
G Interface Gateway MSC Interface between VLR and VLR. An MSC that provides an entry point into the GSM PLMN from another network or service. A gateway MSC is also an interrogating node for incoming PLMN calls. Gigabyte. 230 bytes = 1,073,741,824 bytes = 1024 megabytes. Gigabit Interface Converter Converter for connection to the Gigabit Ethernet. Gb Link. Gb Manager. Generic Call Control Generic Clock board. System clock source, one per site (part of BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF, RXCDR). Group Call Register. The register which holds information about VGCS or VBS calls. Generic DSP Processor board. Interchangeable with the XCDR board. GDP board configured for E1 link usage. GDP board configured for T1 link usage. GPRS Data Stream. GPRS Encryption Algorithm GSM EDGE Radio Access Network Gateway GPRS Support Node. The GGSN provides internet working with external packet-switched networks. Giga-Hertz (109). Group ID. A unique number used by the system to identify a users primary group. GPRS Initialization Process GSM Multiplexer Board (part of the BSC). GPRS Mobility Management. General Manual Revision. Gateway Mobile-services Switching Centre. See Gateway MSC. Gateway MSC Server Gaussian Minimum Shift Keying. The modulation technique used in GSM. GrouND.
GB, Gbyte GBIC GBL GBM GCC GCLK GCR GDP GDP E1 GDP T1 GDS GEA GERAN GGSN GHz GID GIP GMB GMM GMR GMSC GMSC-S GMSK GND
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-31
Version 1 Rev 0

GOS Grade of Service. A traffic statistic defined as the percentage of calls which have a Probability of Busy or Queueing Delay. An alternative criterion is a maximum time for a percentage of calls to wait in the busy queue before they are assigned a voice channel. GSM PLMN Area. General Protocol Converter. T-PDU + GTP-Header Generic Processor board. GSM generic processor board: a 68030 with 4 to 16 Mb RAM (part of BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF, RXCDR). Generic Processor board. GSM generic processor board: a 68040 with 32 Mb RAM (part of BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF, RXCDR). Generic Processor board. GSM generic processor board: a 68060 with 128 Mb RAM (part of BSS, BTS, BSC, IWF, RXCDR). General Packet Radio Service. A GSM data transmission technique that does not set up a continuous channel from a portable terminal for the transmission and reception of data, but transmits and receives data in packets. It makes very efficient use of available radio spectrum, and users pay only for the volume of data sent and received. Global Positioning by Satellite. A system for determining position on the Earths surface by comparing radio signals from several satellites. Gb Router. GSM Service Area. The area in which an MS can be reached by a fixed subscriber, without the subscribers knowledge of the location of the MS. A GSA may include the areas served by several GSM PLMNs. GSM System Area. The group of GSM PLMN areas accessible by GSM MSs. GSM Systems Division. GPRS Signalling Link. Groupe Spcial Mobile (the committee). Global System for Mobile communications (the system). See PGSM. GSM Mobile Station. GSM Public Land Mobile Network. GSM Radio Frequency. GPRS Support Node. The combined functions provided by the SGSN and GGSN. A GSN Complex consists of an ISS Cluster, GGSN and SGSNs connected to a single CommHub. GSM Software Release.
GPA GPC G-PDU GPROC
GPROC2 {4354} GPROC3
GPRS
GPS
GR GSA
GSA GSD GSL GSM GSM GSM900 GSM MS GSM PLMN GSM RF GSN GSN Complex GSR
11-32
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

GT Global Title. A logical or virtual address used for routing SS7 messages using SCCP capabilities. To complete message routing, a GT must be translated to a SS7 point code and subsystem number. Generic Table Editor. The Motorola procedure which allows users to display and edit MCDF input files. Gb Transmit Manager. GPRS Tunneling Protocol GBRS TBF Scheduler Period at the beginning and end of timeslot during which MS transmission is attenuated. Graphical User Interface. A computer environment or program that displays, or facilitates the display of, on-screen options. These options are usually in the form of icons (pictorial symbols) or menus (lists of alphanumeric characters) by means of which users may enter commands. A computer used to display a GUI from an OMC-R GUI application which is being run on a GUI server. A computer used to serve the OMC-R GUI application process running locally (on its processor) to other computers (GUI clients or other MMI processors). GateWay Manager. GateWaY (MSC/LR) interface to PSTN.
GTE GTM GTP GTS Guard period GUI
GUI client GUI server
GWM GWY
H Interface - Hyperframe
H Interface H-M HAD, HAP Half Rate Interface between HLR and AUC. Human-Machine Terminals. HLR Authentication Distributor. Refers to a type of data channel that will double the current GSM air interface capacity to 16 simultaneous calls per carrier (see also FR - Full Rate). HANDOver. The action of switching a call in progress from one radio channel to another radio channel. Handover allows established calls to continue by switching them to another radio resource, as when an MS moves from one BTS area to another. Handovers may take place between the following GSM entities: timeslot, RF carrier, cell, BTS, BSS and MSC. Hierarchical Cell Structure Hybrid Combining Unit. (Used in Horizonmacro). Part of the DDF, the HDU allows the outputs of three radios to be combined into a single antenna. High level Data Link Control. A link-level protocol used to facilitate reliable point-to-point transmission of a data packet. Note: A subset of HDLC, LAP-B, is the layer-two protocol for CCITT Recommendation X.25.
HANDO, Handover
HCS HCU
HDLC
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-33
Version 1 Rev 0

HDSL High bit-rate Digital Subscriber Line. HDSL is a data transmission mechanism which supports duplex high speed digital communication (at E1 rates) on one or more unshielded twisted pair lines. High Layer Compatibility. The HLC can carry information defining the higher layer characteristics of a teleservice active on the terminal. Home Location Register. The LR where the current location and all subscriber parameters of an MS are permanently stored. Keyed Hashing for Message Authentication ( RFC 2104) Heat Management System. The system that provides environmental control of the components inside the ExCell, TopCell and M-Cell cabinets. HandOver. See HANDO. Hand Portable Unit. A handset. Call hold supplementary service. Call hold allows the subscriber to place a call on hold in order to make another call. When the second call is completed, the subscriber can return to the first call. Home PLMN. See Half Rate. HandSet. High Speed Circuit Switched Data High Speed Interface card. HLR Subscriber Management. Hopping Sequence Number. HSN is a index indicating the specific hopping sequence (pattern) used in a given cell. It ranges from 0 to 63. Hilly Terrain with the MS travelling at 100 kph. Dynamic model against which the performance of a GSM receiver can be measured. See also TU3, TU50, RA250 and EQ50. HyperText Transfer Protocol ( RFC 2616) Home Units. The basic telecommunication unit as set by the HPLMN. This value is expressed in the currency of the home country. Hardware. A combiner device which requires no software control and is sufficiently broadband to be able to cover the GSM transmitter frequency band. See also COMB.
HLC
HLR HMAC HMS
HO HPU HOLD
HPLMN HR HS HSCSD HSI/S HSM HSN
HT100
HTTP HU
HW Hybrid Combiner
11-34
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

Hybrid Transformer A circuit used in telephony to convert 2-wire operation to 4-wire operation and vice versa. For example, every land-line telephone contains a hybrid to separate earpiece and mouthpiece audio and couple both into a 2-wire circuit that connects the phone to the exchange. 2048 superframes. The longest recurrent time period of the frame structure.
Hyperframe
I - IWU
I I+S IA Information frames. Part of RLP. Information + Supervisory Incoming Access supplementary service. An arrangement which allows a member of a CUG to receive calls from outside the CUG. International Alphanumeric 5 character set. Integrated Antenna Distribution Unit. The IADU is the equivalent of the Receive Matrix used on BTSs that pre-date the M-Cell range. Internet Assigned Numbers Authority Initial Address Message. A message sent in the forward direction that contains (a) address information, (b) the signaling information required to route and connect a call to the called line, (c) service-class information, (d) information relating to user and network facilities, and (e) call-originator identity or call-receiver identity. Internal Alarm System. The IAS is responsible for monitoring all cabinet alarms at a BSS. Integrated Circuit. An electronic circuit that consists of many individual circuit elements, such as transistors, diodes, resistors, capacitors, inductors, and other active and passive semiconductor devices, formed on a single chip of semiconducting material and mounted on a single piece of substrate material. Interlock Code. A code which uniquely identifies a CUG within a network. Interlock Code of the preferential CUG. Internet Corporation for Assigned Names and Numbers Incoming Calls Barred. An access restriction that prevents a CUG member from receiving calls from other members of that group. Integrated Circuit(s) Card. Indicator Channel (UMTS Physical Channel / see also PICH, AICH, CD/CA-ICH) In-Call Modification. Function which allows the service mode (speech, facsimile, data) to be changed during a call.
IA5 IADU
IANA IAM
IAS IC
IC IC(pref) ICANN ICB
ICC ICH ICM
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-35
Version 1 Rev 0

ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol. An extension to the Internet Protocol (IP) that allows for the generation of error messages, test packets, and informational messages related to IP. The PING command, for example, uses ICMP to test an Internet connection( RFC 792). Interrogating Call Session Control Function ( SIP) IDentification/IDentity/IDentifier. Integrated Digital Network. A network that uses both digital transmission and digital switching. Interface Design Specification. Informix Dynamic Server. The OMC-R relational database management system. Information Element. The part of a message that contains configuration or signalling information. International Electrotechnical Commission. An international standards and conformity assessment body for electrical, electronic and related technologies. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers. A non-profit, technical professional association. Information Element Identifier. The identifier field of the IE. Internet Engineering Task Force (www.ietf.org) Interim European Telecommunication Standard. Intermediate Frequency. A frequency to which a carrier frequency is shifted as an intermediate step in transmission or reception. Initial and Final Address Message. Internet Hosted Octet Stream Service Internet Key Exchange ( RFC 2409) Internet Key Management Protocol Incoming Leg Control Model InterModulation. The production, in a nonlinear element of a system, of frequencies corresponding to the sum and difference frequencies of the fundamentals and harmonics thereof that are transmitted through the element. Intelligent Monitor And Control System. International Mobile station Equipment Identity. Electronic serial number that uniquely identifies the MS as a piece or assembly of equipment. The IMEI is sent by the MS along with request for service. See also IMEISV.
I-CSCF ID, Id IDN IDS IDS IE IEC
IEEE IEI IETF I-ETS IF
IFAM IHOSS IKE IKMP ILCM IM
IMACS IMEI
11-36
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

IMEISV International Mobile station Equipment Identity and Software Version number. The IMEISV is a 16 digit decimal number composed of four elements:- a 6 digit Type Approval Code; - a 2 digit Final Assembly Code; - a 6 digit Serial Number; and - a 2 digit Software Version Number (SVN). The first three elements comprise the IMEI. When the network requests the IMEI from the MS, the SVN (if present) is also sent towards the network. See also IMEI and SVN. IMMediate assignment message. IMMs are sent from the network to the MS to indicate that the MS must immediately start monitoring a specified channel. IP Multimedia Private Identity IP Multimedia Public Identity Internet Protocol Multimedia Core Network Subsystem ( Rel. 5 onwards) International Mobile Subscriber Identity. Published mobile number (prior to ISDN) that uniquely identifies the subscription. It can serve as a key to derive subscriber information such as directory number(s) from the HLR. See also MSISDN. International Mobile Telecommunications for the year 2000 Intelligent Network. A network that allows functionality to be distributed flexibly at a variety of nodes on and off the network and allows the architecture to be modified to control the services. Interrogating Node. A switching node that interrogates an HLR, to route a call for an MS to the visited MSC. IN Service. Intelligent Network Service. A service provided using the capabilities of an intelligent network. See also IN. Interference Algorithm. Intermittent alarms are transient and not usually associated with a serious fault condition. After the intermittent alarms are displayed in the Alarm window, the operator must handle and clear the alarm. The system will report every occurrence of an intermittent alarm unless it is throttled. See also FMIC and OIC. The general term used to describe the inter-operation of networks, services, supplementary services and so on. See also IWF. A recording period of time in which a statistic is pegged. The end of an interval. Input/Output. Intelligent Optimization Service. Tool for improving the network quality. The IOS generates reports based on performance data from the BTS and OMC-R. Input Offset Variable for I+S and UI-Frames ( for ciphering in GPRS)
IMM
IMPI IMPU IMS IMSI
IMT-2000 IN
IN INS INS InterAlg Intermittent
Interworking
Interval Interval expiry I/O IOS
IOV-I / IOV-UI
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-37
Version 1 Rev 0

IP Initialisation Process. The IP is primarily responsible for bringing up the site from a reset, including code loading the site from a suitable code source. IP also provides the CSFP functionality, allowing two BSS code load version to be swapped very quickly, allowing the site to return to service as soon as possible. Internet Protocol. A standard protocol designed for use in interconnected systems of packet-switched computer communication networks. IP provides for transmitting blocks of data called datagrams from sources to destinations, where sources and destinations are hosts identified by fixed-length addresses. The internet protocol also provides for fragmentation and reassembly of long datagrams, if necessary, for transmission through small-packet networks ( RFC 791). See also TCP and TCP/IP. IP Bearer Control Protocol ( ITU-T Q.1970) Inter-Process Communication. Exchange of data between one process and another, either within the same computer or over a network. Internet Protocol Control Protocol ( RFC 1332) INtermodulation Products. Distortion. A type of spurious emission. Intellectual PRoperty. Integrated Power Supply Module (-48 V). Internetwork Packet EXchange A networking protocol used by the Novell NetWare operating systems. Like UDP/IP, IPX is a datagram protocol used for connectionless communications. Higher-level protocols are used for additional error recovery services. Incremental Redundancy (Hybrid Type II ARQ) A communications system comprising a constellation of 66 low-earth-orbiting (LEO) satellites forming a mobile wireless system allowing subscribers to place and receive calls from any location in the world. The satellite constellation is connected to existing terrestrial telephone systems through a number of gateway ground-stations. Internet Security Association and Key Management Protocol Indexed Sequential Access Method. A method for managing the way a computer accesses records and files stored on a hard disk. While storing data sequentially, ISAM provides direct access to specific records through an index. This combination results in quick data access regardless of whether records are being accessed sequentially or randomly. International Switching Centre. The ISC routes calls to/from other countries. Interference Signal Code Power ( 3GTS 25.215 / 3GTS 25.102)
IP
IPBCP IPC
IPCP IP, INP IPR IPSM IPX
IR Iridium
ISAKMP ISAM
ISC ISCP
11-38
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network. A digital network using common switches and digital transmission paths to establish connections for various services such as telephony, data telex, and facsimile. See also B channel and D channel. Motorola Information Systems group (formerly CODEX). International Organisation for Standardization. ISO is a world-wide federation of national standards bodies from some 130 countries, one from each country. Internet Service Provider An Interactive Structured Query Language client application for the database server. See also IDS. Integrated Support Server. The ISS resides on a Sun Netra t 1125 and performs the CGF, DNS, NTP, and NFS functions for the GSN. Integrated System Test. ISDN User Part. An upper-layer application supported by signalling system No. 7 for connection set up and tear down ( ITU-T Q.761 Q.765). Inactivity Test (Part of SCCP network connectivity). Information Transfer Capability. A GSM Bearer Capability Element which is provided on the Dm channel to support Terminal adaptation function to Interworking control procedures. International Telecommunication Union. An intergovernmental organization through which public and private organizations develop telecommunications. It is responsible for adopting international treaties, regulations and standards governing telecommunications. International Telecommunication Union - Telecommunications Standardization Sector. The standardization functions were formerly performed by CCITT, a group within the ITU. Iub-Frame Protocol ( 3GTS 25.427 / 25.435) Iu-Frame Protocol ( 3GTS 25.415) Iur-Frame Protocol ( 3GTS 25.424, 3GTS 25.425, 25.426, 25.435) InterWorking Function. A network functional entity which provides network interworking, service interworking, supplementary service interworking or signalling interworking. It may be a part of one or more logical or physical entities in a GSM PLMN. InterWorking MSC. MSC that is used to deliver data to/from SGSN. InterWorking Unit. Unit where the digital to analogue (and visa versa) conversion takes place within the digital GSM network.
ISG ISO
ISP ISQL ISS
IST ISUP
IT ITC
ITU
ITU-T
Iub-FP Iu-FP Iur-FP IWF
IWMSC IWU
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-39
Version 1 Rev 0

k - KW
k k K KAIO kb, kbit kbit/s, kbps kbyte Kc kHz Ki KIO KPI KSW KSWX kW kilo (103). Windows size. Constraint length of the convolutional code. Kernel Asynchronous Input/Output. Part of the OMC-R relational database management system. kilo-bit. kilo-bits per second. kilobyte. 210 bytes = 1024 bytes Ciphering key. A sequence of symbols that controls the operation of encipherment and decipherment. kilo-Hertz. Individual subscriber authentication Key. Part of the authentication process of the AUC. A class of processor. Key Performance Indicator. Kiloport SWitch board. TDM timeslot interchanger to connect calls. Part of the BSS. KSW Expander half size board. Fibre optic distribution of TDM bus. Part of the BSS. kilo-Watt.
L1 - LV
L1 L2 L2ML Layer 1 (of a communications protocol). Layer 2 (of a communications protocol). Layer 2 Management Link. L2ML is used for transferring layer 2 management messages to TRX or BCF. One link per TRX and BCF. Layer 2 Relay function. A function of an MS and IWF that adapts a users known layer 2 protocol LAPB onto RLP for transmission between the MT and IWF. L2R Bit Orientated Protocol. L2R Character Orientated Protocol. Layer 2 Tunneling Protocol ( RFC 2661) Layer 3 (of a communications protocol). Link Adaptation. Location Area. An area in which an MS may move freely without updating the location register. An LA may comprise one or several base station areas.
L2R
L2R BOP L2R COP L2TP L3 LA LA
11-40
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

LAC LAI Location Area Code. The LAC is part of the LAI. It is an operator defined code identifying the location area. Location Area Identity. The information indicating the location area in which a cell is located. The LAI data on the SIM is continuously updated to reflect the current location of the subscriber. Local Area Network. A data communications system that (a) lies within a limited spatial area, (b) has a specific user group, (c) has a specific topology, and (d) is not a public switched telecommunications network, but may be connected to one. LAN Extender half size board. Fibre optic distribution of LAN to/from other cabinets. Part of BSS, etc. Link Access Protocol Balanced. The balanced-mode, enhanced version of HDLC. Used in X.25 packet-switching networks. Link Access Protocol D-channel (Data). A protocol that operates at the data link layer (layer 2) of the OSI architecture. LAPD is used to convey information between layer 3 entities across the frame relay network. The D-channel carries signalling information for circuit switching. Link Access Protocol on the Dm channel. A link access procedure (layer 2) on the CCH for the digital mobile communications system. See OSI-RM and Physical Layer. See OSI-RM and Data Link Layer. See OSI-RM and Network Layer. See OSI-RM and Transport Layer. See OSI-RM and Session Layer. See OSI-RM and Presentation Layer. See OSI-RM and Application Layer. Inductor Capacitor. A type of filter. Link Control Function. LCF GPROC controls various links in and out of the BSC. Such links include MTL, XBL, OMF and RSL. See also LCP. Local Communications Network. A communication network within a TMN that supports data communication functions (DCFs) normally at specified reference points q1 and q2. LCNs range from the simple to the complex. LCN examples include point-to-point connections and networks based on star and bus topologies. Link Control Processor. An LCP is a GPROC or PCMCIA board device which supplies the LCF. Once the LCF has been equipped, and assuming GPROCs have been equipped, processors are allocated by the software. Location Services Local Exchange.
LAN
LANX LAPB LAPD
LAPDm
Layer 1 Layer 2 Layer 3 Layer 4 Layer 5 Layer 6 Layer 7 LC LCF
LCN
LCP
LCS LE
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-41
Version 1 Rev 0

LED Light Emitting Diode. A type of diode that emits light when current passes through it. Depending on the material used the colour can be visible or infrared. Line Feed. A code that moves the cursor on a display screen down one line. In the ASCII character set, a line feed has a decimal value of 10. On printers, a line feed advances the paper one line. Length Indicator. Delimits LLC PDUs within the RLC data block, when an LLC PDU boundary occurs in the block. Line Identity. The LI is made up of a number of information units: the subscribers national ISDN/MSISDN number; the country code; optionally, subaddress information. In a full ISDN environment, the line identity includes all of the address information necessary to unambiguously identify a subscriber. The calling line identity is the line identity of the calling party. The connected line identity is the line identity of the connected party. Logical Link Control. Lower Layer Compatibility. The LLC can carry information defining the lower layer characteristics of the terminal. Traffic channel with capacity lower than a Bm. LAN Monitor Process. Each GPROC which is connected to a LAN has an LMP, which detects faults on the LAN. LAN alarms are generated by the GPROC. Least Mean Squares. Parameters determined by minimizing the sum of squares of the deviations. Local Mobile Station Identity. A unique identity temporarily allocated to visiting mobile subscribers in order to speed up the search for subscriber data in the VLR, when the MSRN allocation is done on a per cell basis. Local Maintenance Terminal. Diagnostic tool, typically an IBM compatible PC. Low Noise Amplifier. An amplifier with low noise characteristics. Last Number Dialled. An area in which a mobile station may move freely without updating the location register. A location area may comprise one or several base station areas. Linear Predictive Coding. A method of digitally encoding analog signals. It uses a single-level or multi-level sampling system in which the value of the signal at each sample time is predicted to be a linear function of the past values of the quantified signal. Link Protocol Discriminator Local PLMN. Link Quality Control. Location Register. The GSM functional unit where MS location information is stored. The HLR and VLR are location registers.
LF
LI LI
LLC LLC Lm LMP
LMS LMSI
LMT LNA LND Location area
LPC
LPD LPLMN LQC LR
11-42
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

LSB LSSU LSTR Least Significant Bit Link Stations Signalling Unit (Part of MTP transport system). Listener Side Tone Rating. A rating, expressed in dB, based on how a listener will perceive the background noise picked up by the microphone. Long Term Average. The value required in a BTSs GCLK frequency register to produce a 16.384 MHz clock. Local Terminal Emulator. Long Term Predictive. Line Terminating Unit. Local Units. Location Update. A location update is initiated by the MS when it detects that it has entered a new location area. Length and Value.
LTA LTE LTP LTU LU LU LV
M - MUX
M M M3UA M-Cell M&TS Mandatory. Mega (106). MTP-3 User Adaptation Layer ( RFC 3332 / 3GPP 29.202 (Annex A)) Motorola Cell. Maintenance and TroubleShooting. Functional area of Network Management software which (1) collects and displays alarms, (2) collects and displays Software/Hardware errors, and (3) activates test diagnostics at the NEs (OMC). Mobile Allocation. The radio frequency channels allocated to an MS for use in its frequency hopping sequence. Medium Access Control. MAC includes the functions related to the management of the common transmission resources. These include the packet data physical channels and their radio link connections. Two Medium Access Control modes are supported in GSR5, dynamic allocation and fixed allocation. (UMTS 3GTS 25.321) (E)GPRS 3GTS 04.60 / 3GTS 44.060) Mobile Allocation Channel Number. See also MA. A cell in which the base station antenna is generally mounted away from buildings or above rooftop level. Mobile Additional Function. Mobile Access Hunting supplementary service. An automatic service which searches for the first available mobile user out of a defined group. Mobile Allocation Index. Mean Accumulated Intrinsic Down Time.
MA MAC
MACN Macrocell MAF MAH
MAI MAIDT
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-43
Version 1 Rev 0

MAINT MAIO MAP MAPP MASF Max [X, Y] MB, Mbyte Mbit/s MBZ MCAP MAINTenance. Mobile Allocation Index Offset. The offset of the mobile hopping sequence from the reference hopping sequence of the cell. Mobile Application Part (part of SS7 standard). The inter-networking signalling between MSCs and LRs and EIRs. Mobile Application Part Processor. Minimum Available Spreading Factor The value shall be the maximum of X or Y, which ever is bigger Megabyte. 220 bytes = 1,048,576 bytes = 1024 kilobytes. Megabits per second. Must Be Zero Motorola Cellular Advanced Processor. The MCAP Bus is the inter-GPROC communications channel in a BSC. Each card cage in a BSC needs at least one GPROC designated as an MCAP Server. Mobile Country Code. The first three digits of the IMSI, used to identify the country. Motorola Customer Data Format used by DataGen for simple data entry and retrieval. Malicious Call Identification supplementary service. This feature is supported by a malicious call trace function by printing the report at the terminating MSC when the mobile subscriber initiates a malicious call trace request. Modulation and Coding Scheme. Motorola Customer Support Centre. Main Control Unit for M-Cell2/6. Also referred to as the Micro Control Unit in software. Main Control Unit, with dual FMUX. (Used in M-Cellhorizon). Main Control Unit for M-Cellmicro sites (M-Cellm). Also referred to as the Micro Control Unit in software. The software subtype representation of the Field Replaceable Unit (FRU) for the MCU-m. Mediation Device. The MD (which handles the Q3 interface) allows the OSI Processor to communicate between the Network Management Centre (NMC) and OMC-R for network configuration, events and alarms. mobile Management entity - Data Link layer. Message Digest Algorithm (MD-2, 4, 5 are defined) (MD-5 RFC 1321) Maintenance Entity (GSM Rec. 12.00).
MCC MCDF MCI
MCS MCSC MCU MCUF MCU-m MCUm MD
MDL MD-X ME
11-44
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

ME Mobile Equipment. Equipment intended to access a set of GSM PLMN and/or DCS telecommunication services, but which does not contain subscriber related information. Services may be accessed while the equipment, capable of surface movement within the GSM system area, is in motion or during halts at unspecified points. Maintenance Entity Function (GSM Rec. 12.00). A function which possesses the capability to detect elementary anomalies and convey them to the supervision process. MultiFrame. In PCM systems, a set of consecutive frames in which the position of each frame can be identified by reference to a multiframe alignment signal. Multi-Frequency (tone signalling type). See DTMF. MultiFunction block. Media Gateway Control Protocol ( ITU-T H.248 incl. Annex F H and IETF RFC 3015) Media Gateway Control Function Media Gateway Control Protocol ( RFC 2705) Management. Manager. Media Gateway Message Handling System. The family of services and protocols that provides the functions for global electronic-mail transfer among local mail systems. Mobile Handling Service. Mega-Hertz (106). Maintenance Information. Management Information Base. A Motorola OMC-R database. There is a CM MIB and an EM MIB. Mobile Interface Controller. A cell in which the base station antenna is generally mounted below rooftop level. Radio wave propagation is by diffraction and scattering around buildings, the main propagation is within street canyons. minute(s). Mobile Identity Number (North American Market) The value shall be the minimum of X or Y, which ever is smaller micro-second (10-6). Micro Base Control Unit. The BCU is the Macro/Microcell implementation of a BTS site controller.
MEF
MF
MF MF MEGACO MGCF MGCP MGMT, mgmt MGR MGW MHS
MHS MHz MI MIB MIC Microcell
min MIN Min [X, Y] s BCU
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-45
Version 1 Rev 0

MIT Management Information Tree. A file on the Motorola OMC-R. The MIT file effectively monitors data on every device and every parameter of each device that is in the current versions of software on the OMC-R. The data is stored as a text file on the OMC-R. The MIT file also contains the hierarchical relationships between the network devices. MAC Logical Channel Priority Man Machine. See MMI. Mobility Management. MM functions include authorization, location updating, IMSI attach/detach, periodic registration, ID confidentiality, paging, handover, etc. Multimedia Call Control Mobile Management Entity. Middle Man Funnel process. Man Machine Interface. The method by which the user interfaces with the software to request a function or change parameters. The MMI may run on a terminal at the OMC, or an LMT. The MMI is used to display alarm reports, retrieve device status, take modules out of service and put modules into service. A machine configured to use the OMC-R software from an MMI server. MMI client/MMI server. A computer which has its own local copy of the OMC-R software. It can run the OMC-R software for MMI clients to mount. Man Machine Language. The tool of MMI. Multiple Serial Interface Link. (see also 2Mbit/s link) Mobile Network Code. The fourth, fifth and optionally sixth digits of the IMSI, used to identify the network. Mobile Not Reachable for GPRS flag MaiNTenance. Motorola Signalling Link between the BSC and BTS. Mobile Originated. Mobile Originating Call Mobile Originated Point-to-Point messages. Transmission of a SMS from a mobile to a message handling system. The maximum length of the message is 160 characters. The message can be sent whether or not the MS is engaged in a call. Motorola OMAP.
MLP MM MM
MMCC MME MMF MMI
MMI client MMI processor MMI server
MML MMS MNC MNRG MNT Mobis MO MOC MO/PP
MOMAP
11-46
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

MoU Memorandum of Understanding. Commercial term. An MoU usually sets out the broad parameters of an understanding as well as the general responsibilities and obligations of each party in a proposed venture. It has little legal significance except to indicate the parties commitments and acts as an aid to interpreting the parties intentions. There are various types of MOUs: compliance MOUs help ensure that all Motorola units comply with applicable laws and regulations; intellectual property MOUs deal with copyright, trademark, and patent rights; and business arrangement MOUs relate to the terms and conditions of a product or service transfer. Multi Personal Computer (was part of the OMC). Multiparty Call Control (mobile) Management (entity) - PHysical (layer) [primitive]. Master Processor MultiParTY (Multi ParTY) supplementary service. MPTY provides a mobile subscriber with the ability to have a multi-connection call, i.e. a simultaneous communication with more than one party. MultiPleXed. Micro Radio Control Unit. Multimedia Resource Function Controller Multimedia Resource Function Processor Mobile Roaming Number. Mouth Reference Point. Facility for assessing handset and headset acoustic responses. Maximum Receive Unit ( PPP) Move Receiving Window Mobile Station. The GSM subscriber unit. A subscriber handset, either mobile or portable, or other subscriber equipment, such as facsimile machines, etc. Most Significant Bit Mobile-services Switching Centre, Mobile Switching Centre. The MSC handles the call set up procedures and controls the location registration and handover procedures for all except inter-BTS, inter-cell and intra-cell handovers. MSC controlled inter-BTS handovers can be set as an option at the switch. Mobile Station Class Mark. MSC-Server Mobile Station Control Unit. millisecond (.001 second). Multiple Serial Interface board. Intelligent interface to two 2 Mbit/s digital links. See 2 Mbit/s link and DS-2. Part of BSS. Mobile Station Identification Number. The part of the IMSI identifying the mobile station within its home network.
MPC MPCC MPH MPROC MPTY
MPX MRC MRFC MRFP MRN MRP MRU MRW MS
MSB MSC
MSCM MSC-S MSCU msec MSI MSIN
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-47
Version 1 Rev 0

MSISDN Mobile Station International ISDN Number. Published mobile number (see also IMSI). Uniquely defines the mobile station as an ISDN terminal. It consists of three parts: the Country Code (CC), the National Destination Code (NDC) and the Subscriber Number (SN). Maximum Segment Size ( TCP) Mobile Station Roaming Number. A number assigned by the MSC to service and track a visiting subscriber. Message Signal Unit (Part of MTP transport system). A signal unit containing a service information octet and a signalling information field which is retransmitted by the signalling link control, if it is received in error. Mobile Terminated. Describes a call or short message destined for an MS. Mobile Termination. The part of the MS which terminates the radio transmission to and from the network and adapts terminal equipment (TE) capabilities to those of the radio transmission. MT0 is mobile termination with no support for terminal, MT1 is mobile termination with support for an S-type interface and MT2 is mobile termination with support for an R-type interface. Mean Time Between Exceptions. Mean Time Between Failures. An indicator of expected system reliability calculated on a statistical basis from the known failure rates of various components of the system. MTBF is usually expressed in hours. Mobile Terminating Call Message Transfer Link. The MTL is the 64 kbit/s PCM timeslot that is used to convey the SS7 signalling information on the A interface between the MSC and the BSC. Mobile-To-Mobile (call). Message Transfer Part. The part of a common-channel signaling system that transfers signal messages and performs associated functions, such as error control and signaling link security ( ITU-T Q.701 Q.703). Message Transfer Part level 3 / broadband ( ITU-T Q.2210) Mobile Terminated Point-to-Point messages. Transmission of a short message from a message handling system to a mobile. The maximum length of the message is 160 characters. The message can be received whether or not the MS is engaged in a call. Mean Time To Repair. The total corrective maintenance time divided by the total number of corrective maintenance actions during a given period of time. Maximum Transmit Unit ( IP) Two types of multiframe are defined in the system: a 26-frame multiframe with a period of 120 ms and a 51-frame multiframe with a period of 3060/13 ms.
MSS MSRN MSU
MT MT (0, 1, 2)
MTBE MTBF
MTC MTL
MTM MTP
MTP-3b MT/PP
MTTR
MTU Multiframe
11-48
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

MU MUMS MUX Mark Up. Multi User Mobile Station. Multiplexer. A device that combines multiple inputs into an aggregate signal to be transported via a single transmission channel.
NACK - nW
NACK, Nack NAS NAT N/W NB NBAP NBIN NBNS NC NCC No Acknowledgement Non-Access-Stratum ( UMTS) Network Address Translation ( RFC 1631) Network. Normal Burst (see Normal burst). NodeB Application Part ( 3GTS 25.433) A parameter in the frequency hopping sequence generation algorithm. NetBios Name Service Neighbour Cell Network Colour Code. The NCC and the BCC are part of the BSIC. The NCC comprises three bits in the range 000 to 111. It is the same as the PLMN Colour Code. See also NCC and BSIC. Neighbouring (of current serving) Cell. Notification CHannel. Part of the downlink element of the CCCH reserved for voice group and/or voice broad-cast calls and notification messages. Network Control Protocol ( PPP) Network Cell Reselection Manager. No Duplicates. A database column attribute meaning the column contains unique values (used only with indexed columns). National Destination Code. Part of the MSISDN. An NDC is allocated to each GSM PLMN. Network Determined User Busy. An NDUB condition occurs when a call is about to be offered and the maximum number of total calls for the channel has been reached. In practice, the total number of calls could be three: one for the basic call, one for a held call and one for call waiting. Network Element (Network Entity). A piece of telecommunications equipment that provides support or services to the user. Network Element Function block. A functional block that communicates with a TMN for the purpose of being monitored, or controlled, or both.
NCELL NCH
NCP NCRM ND
NDC NDUB
NE
NEF
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-49
Version 1 Rev 0

NET NetPlan Network Layer Norme Europennes de Telecommunications. An RF planning tool, NetPlan can import data from the OMC and use it to carry out a network frequency replan. See OSI RM. The Network Layer responds to service requests from the Transport Layer and issues service requests to the Data Link Layer. It provides the functional and procedural means of transferring variable length data sequences from a source to a destination via one or more networks while maintaining the quality of service requested by the Transport Layer. The Network Layer performs network routing, flow control, segmentation/desegmentation, and error control functions. Network Function. Network File System. A file system that is distributed over a computer network. Also, a file system, on a single computer, that contains the low-level networking files for an entire network. Network Health Analyst. The NHA is an optional feature. It detects problems by monitoring network statistics and events via the OMC-R. The NHA analyses the event history, statistics and network configuration data to try to determine the cause of the detected problems. Network Indicator Network Interface Board. Network Interface Card. A network interface device in the form of a circuit card that provides network access. Network Independent Clocking. Network Information Service. It allows centralised control of network information for example hostnames, IP addresses and passwords. Narrowband Integrated Services Digital Network: Services include basic rate interface (2B+D or BRI) and primary rate interface (30B+D - Europe and 23B+D - North America or PRI). Supports narrowband speeds at/or below 1.5 Mbps. Network Interface Unit. A device that performs interface functions, such as code conversion, protocol conversion, and buffering, required for communications to and from a network. Network Interface Unit, micro. M-Cellmicro MSI. See Network Layer. Network LinK processor(s). Newton metres. Network Management (manager). NM is all activities which control, monitor and record the use and the performance of resources of a telecommunications network in order to provide telecommunication services to customers/users at a certain level of quality. Network Management Application Service Element.
NF NFS
NHA
NI NIB NIC NIC NIS
N-ISDN
NIU
NIU-m NL NLK Nm NM
NMASE
11-50
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

NMC Network Management Centre. The NMC node of the GSM TMN provides global and centralised GSM PLMN monitoring and control, by being at the top of the TMN hierarchy and linked to subordinate OMC nodes. National Mobile Station Identification number, or, National Mobile Subscriber Identity. The NMSI consists of the MNC and the MSIN. Nordic Mobile Telephone system. NMT produced the worlds first automatic international mobile telephone system. No Nulls. A database column attribute meaning the column must contain a value in all rows. A period of modulated carrier less than a timeslot. Next Partial Bitmap Number Plan Identifier. Network-Protocol Data Unit ( IP-Packet, X.25-Frame) Non Return to Zero. A code in which ones are represented by one significant condition and zeros are represented by another, with no neutral or rest condition. Network Service Network Service Access Point. An NSAP is a registration made by an application which specifies its desired listening criteria. The registration is limited to a particular CPU and port number. Criteria can include: DNICs, national numbers, subaddress ranges, protocol-ids, and extended addresses. Network Service Access Point Identifier Network Service Entity Network Service Provider. A national or regional company that owns or maintains a portion of the network and resells connectivity. Network Status Summary. A feature of the OMC-R MMI, which provides different network maps giving visual indication of the network configuration and performance, and how the different network management functions are implemented by the OMC-R. Network Service Test(er). A PCU process that periodically tests all alive NS-VCs on a PICP board. Network Service - Virtual Circuit. Network Service Virtual Connection Group Network Service Virtual Link Network Termination. Network equipment that provides functions necessary for network operation of ISDN access protocols. Non Transparent. NTRAC Type Approvals Advisory Board. Committee engaged in harmonisation type approval of telecom terminals in Europe.
NMSI
NMT NN Normal burst NPB NPI N-PDU NRZ
NS NSAP
NSAPI NSE NSP
NSS
NST NS-VC NS-VCG NS-VL NT
NT NTAAB
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-51
Version 1 Rev 0

NTP Network Time Protocol. A protocol built on top of TCP/IP that assures accurate local timekeeping with reference to radio, atomic or other clocks located on the Internet. This protocol is capable of synchronizing distributed clocks within milliseconds over long time periods. # - The symbol used for number.2 Mbit/s link - As used in this manual set, the term applies to the European 4-wire 2.048 Mbit/s digital line or link which can carry 30 A-law PCM channels or 120 16 kbit/s GSM channels.4GL - 4th Generation Language. Closer to human languages than typical high-level programming languages. most 4GLs are used to access databases. Network User Access. Network User Identification. National User Part. (part of SS7). NonVolatile. Non-Volatile Random Access Memory. Static random access memory which is made into non-volatile storage either by having a battery permanently connected, or, by saving its contents to EEPROM before turning the power off and reloading it when power is restored. Nano-Watt (10-9).
Numbers
NUA NUI NUP NV NVRAM
nW
O - Overlap
O OA Optional. Outgoing Access supplementary service. An arrangement which allows a member of a CUG to place calls outside the CUG. Operation, Administration, & Management. Operation, Administration, Maintenance, and Provisioning. Operations and Maintenance. Off-Air-Call-Set-Up. The procedure in which a telecommunication connection is being established whilst the RF link between the MS and the BTS is not occupied. Outgoing Calls Barred within the CUG supplementary service. An access restriction that prevents a CUG member from placing calls to other members of that group. 8 bit Oven Controlled Crystal Oscillator. High stability clock source used for frequency synchronization. Optional for operators to implement for their aim. % OverFlow. IDS shutdown state. IDS normal operating state.
OA&M OAMP O&M OASCU
OCB
Octet OCXO OD OFL offline online
11-52
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

OIC Operator Initiated Clear. An alarm type. OIC alarms must be cleared by the OMC-R operator after the fault condition that caused the alarm is resolved. See also FMIC and Intermittent. Outgoing Leg Control Model Off_Line MIB. A Motorola DataGen database, used to modify and carry out Radio Frequency planning on multiple BSS binary files. Overall Loudness Rating. Operations and Maintenance Application Part (part of SS7 standard) (was OAMP). Operations and Maintenance Centre. The OMC node of the GSM TMN provides dynamic O&M monitoring and control of the PLMN nodes operating in the geographical area controlled by the specific OMC. Operations and Maintenance Centre - Gateway Part. (Iridium) Operations and Maintenance Centre - GPRS Part. Operations and Maintenance Centre - Radio Part. Operations and Maintenance Centre - Switch Part. Operations and Maintenance Function (at BSC). Operations and Maintenance Link. The OML provides communication between an OMC-R and a BSC or RXCDR for transferring network management (O&M) data. Operation and Maintenance Processor. Part of the BSC. Operation and Maintenance System (BSC-OMC). Operation and Maintenance SubSystem. Out Of Service. Identifies a physical state. The OOS state indicates the physical device is out of service. This state is reserved for physical communication links. Also, identifies a telephony state. The OOS state is used by the BTS device software to indicate that the BTS is completely out of service. Originating Point Code. A part of the label in a signalling message that uniquely identifies, in a signalling network, the (signalling) origination point of the message. One Pass With Advertising ( Term in RSVP) Olympus Radio Architecture Chipset. Operating System. The fundamental program running on a computer which controls all operations. Open Service Access Open Systems Interconnection. The logical structure for communications networks standardized by the ISO. The standard enables any OSI-compliant system to communicate and exchange information with any other OSI-compliant system.
OLCM OLM
OLR OMAP OMC
OMC-G OMC-G OMC-R OMC-S OMF OML
OMP OMS OMSS OOS
OPC
OPWA ORAC OS OSA OSI
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-53
Version 1 Rev 0

OSI RM OSI Reference Model. An abstract description of the digital communications between application processes running in distinct systems. The model employs a hierarchical structure of seven layers. Each layer performs value-added service at the request of the adjacent higher layer and, in turn, requests more basic services from the adjacent lower layer:Layer 1 - Physical Layer, Layer 2 - Data Link Layer, Layer 3 - Network Layer, Layer 4 - Transport Layer, Layer 5 - Session Layer, Layer 6 Presentation Layer, Layer 7 - Application Layer. Operation Systems Function block. Open Software Foundation Motif. The basis of the GUI used for the Motorola OMC-R MMI. Octet Stream Protocol Operator Services System. Observed Time Difference Of Arrival Overlap sending means that digits are sent from one system to another as soon as they are received by the sending system. A system using ~ will not wait until it has received all digits of a call before it starts to send the digits to the next system. This is the opposite of en bloc sending where all digits for a given call are sent at one time. See en bloc. Orthogonal Variable Spreading Factor
OSF OSF/MOTIF OSP OSS OTDOA Overlap
OVSF
PA - PXPDN
P1, P2, P3 P/F Bit PA PAB PABX Puncturing Schemes 1, 2, and 3. Polling/Final - Bit Power Amplifier. Power Alarm Board. Part of the BSS. Private Automatic Branch eXchange. A private automatic telephone exchange that allows calls within the exchange and also calls to and from the public telephone network. Packet Associated Control Channel. A sequence of binary digits, including data and control signals, that is transmitted and switched as a composite whole. The process of routing and transferring data by means of addressed packets so that a channel is occupied during the transmission of the packet only, and upon completion of the transmission the channel is made available for the transfer of other traffic. Packet Assembler/Disassembler facility. A hardware device that allows a data terminal that is not set up for packet switching to use a packet switching network. It assembles data into packets for transmission, and disassembles the packets on arrival. Packet Access Grant Channel ((E)GPRS)
PACCH Packet Packet Switching
PAD
PAGCH
11-54
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

Paging The procedure by which a GSM PLMN fixed infrastructure attempts to reach an MS within its location area, before any other network-initiated procedure can take place. Password Authentication Protocol ( RFC 1334) CEPT 2 Mbit/s route through the BSS network. Packet Broadcast Control Channel ((E)GPRS) Processor Bus. Private Branch eXchange. In the general use of the term, PBX is a synonym for PABX. However, a PBX operates with only a manual switchboard; a private automatic exchange (PAX) does not have a switchboard, a private automatic branch exchange (PABX) may or may not have a switchboard. Personal Computer. A general-purpose single-user microcomputer designed to be operated by one person at a time. PCU Central Authority. One pCA software process is located at every PCU. The CA is in control of the PCU. It is resident on the master DPROC (MPROC) only, and maintains a list of the status of every device and every software process at the site. Paging Control Channel (UMTS Logical Channel) Packet Common Control Channel. Primary Common Control Physical Channel (UMTS / used as bearer for the BCH TrCH) Paging CHannel. A common access RF channel providing point-to-multipoint unidirectional signaling downlink. Provides simultaneous transmission to all MSs over a wide paging area. Paging Channel Network. Physical Channel. The physical channel is the medium over which the information is carried. In the case of GSM radio communications this would be the Air Interface. Each RF carrier consists of eight physical channels (or timeslots) used for MS communications. In the case of a terrestrial interface the physical channel would be cable. See also Physical Layer. Packet Control Interface. Peripheral Component Interconnect. A standard for connecting peripherals to a personal computer, PCI is a 64-bit bus, though it is usually implemented as a 32-bit bus. Pulse Code Modulation. Modulation in which a signal is sampled, and the magnitude (with respect to a fixed reference) of each sample is quantized and converted by coding to a digital signal. Provides undistorted transmission, even in the presence of noise. See also 2 Mbit/s link, which is the physical bearer of PCM. PCU Configuration Management. pCM is a GWM process. It distributes all database changes performed at the BSC to the PCU boards.
PAP PATH PBCCH PBUS PBX
PC
pCA
PCCH PCCCH P-CCPCH PCH
PCHN PCHN
PCI PCI
PCM
pCM
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-55
Version 1 Rev 0

PCN PCPCH P-CPICH PCR Personal Communications Network. Any network supporting PCS, but in particular DCS1800. Physical Common Packet Channel (UMTS Physical Channel) Primary Common Pilot Channel (UMTS Physical Channel) Preventative Cyclic Retransmission. A form of error correction suitable for use on links with long transmission delays, such as satellite links. The U.S. Federal Communications Commission (FCC) term used to describe a set of digital cellular technologies being deployed in the U.S. PCS works over GSM, CDMA (also called IS-95), and North American TDMA (also called IS-136) air interfaces. Personal Communications Services System. In PCS, a collection of facilities that provides some combination of personal mobility, terminal mobility, and service profile management. Note: As used here, "facilities" includes hardware, software, and network components such as transmission facilities, switching facilities, signalling facilities, and databases. A cellular phone network using the higher frequency range allocated in countries such as the USA. It operates on the frequency range, 1850 - 1910 MHz (receive) and 1930 - 1990 MHz (transmit). Proxy Call Session Control Function ( SIP) Packet Control Unit. A BSS component that provides GPRS with packet scheduling over the air interface with the MS, and packet segmentization and packetization across the Frame Relay link with the SGSN. Picocell Control unit. Part of M-Cellaccess. Potential difference. Voltage. Protocol Discriminator field. The first octet of the packet header that identifies the protocol used to transport the frame. Public Data. See PDN. Power Distribution Board. Packet Data Channel. PDCH carries a combination of PBCCH and PDTCH logical channels. Packet Data Convergence Protocol ( 3GTS 25.323) Policy Decision Function Power Distribution Frame (MSC/LR). Public Data Network. A network established and operated by a telecommunications administration, or a recognized private operating agency, for the specific purpose of providing data transmission services for the public. Packet Data Protocol. Physical Downlink Shared Channel (UMTS Physical Channel)
PCS
PCS System
PCS1900
P-CSCF PCU
PCU pd PD PD PDB PDCH PDCP PDF PDF PDN
PDP PDSCH
11-56
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

PDTCH PDU Packet Data Traffic Channel ((E)GPRS) Power Distribution Unit. The PDU consists consisting of the Alarm Interface Board (AIB) and the Power Distribution Board (PDB). Protected Data Unit. Protocol Data Unit. A term used in TCP/IP to refer to a unit of data, headers, and trailers at any layer in a network. Pan-European Digital Cellular network. The GSM network in Europe. A single incremental action modifying the value of a statistic. Also, A number indicating the use of a device or resource. Each time the device or resource is used the peg count is incremented. Packed Encoding Rules ( ITU-T X.691) Modifying a statistical value. Packet Flow Context PCU Fault Collection Process. See pFTP. PCU Fault Transaction Process. The pFTP resides on the PSP as part of the GWM Functional Unit process. All alarms at the PCU are reported to pFTP. All DPROCs and the MPROC have a local pFCP to handle Software Fault Management indications (SWFMs). The pFTP forwards alarms to the Agent at the BSC and generates messages to pCA for device transitions as needed, based on faults reported. Packet Flow Identifier Primary GSM. PGSM operates on the standard GSM frequency range, 890 - 915 MHz (receive) and 935 - 960 MHz (transmit). Packet Handler. A packet handler assembles and disassembles packets. PHysical (layer). See Physical Layer. Packet Handler Interface. See OSI-RM. The Physical Layer is the lowest of seven hierarchical layers. It performs services requested by the Data Link Layer. The major functions and services of the layer are: (a) establishment and termination of a connection to a communications medium; (b) participation in the process of sharing communication resources among multiple users; and, (c) conversion between the representation of digital data in user equipment and the corresponding signals transmitted over a communications channel. Presentation Indicator. The PI forms part of the calling name information. Depending on database settings, the PI may prevent the called party from seeing the identity of the calling party. Packet Immediate Assignment.
PDU PDU PEDC Peg
PER Pegging PFC pFCP pFTP
PFI PGSM PH PH PHI Physical Layer
PI
PIA
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-57
Version 1 Rev 0

Picocell PICH PICP A cell site where the base station antenna is mounted within a building. Page Indicator Channel (UMTS Physical Channel) Packet Interface Control Processor. A PCU hardware component, the PICP is a DPROC board used for network interfacing functions such as SGSN and BSC. Protocol Implementation Conformance Statement. A statement made by the supplier of an implementation or system claimed to conform to a given specification, stating which capabilities have been implemented. Process IDentifier/Process ID. PCM Interface Module (MSC). Personal Identification Number. A password, typically four digits entered through a telephone keypad. Problem Identification Number. Parallel Interface Extender half size board. Customer alarm interface, part of the BSS. The PIX board provides a means of wiring alarms external to the BSS, BSC, or BTS into the base equipment. Protocol Implementation eXtra information for Testing. A statement made by a supplier or implementor of an implementation under test (IUT) which contains information about the IUT and its testing environment which will enable a test laboratory to run an appropriate test suite against the IUT. Primary Key. A database column attribute, the primary key is a not-null, non-duplicate index. See Presentation Layer. Unciphered data. Frequency planning tool. Phase Lock Loop (refers to phase locking the GCLK in the BTS). PLL is a mechanism whereby timing information is transferred within a data stream and the receiver derives the signal element timing by locking its local clock source to the received timing information. Public Land Mobile Network. The mobile communications network. Performance Management. An OMC application. PM enables the user to produce reports specific to the performance of the network. Prompt Maintenance Alarm. An alarm report level; immediate action is necessary. See also DMA. PCI Mezzanine Card. Packet Management Report. Pseudo MMS. Performance Management User Interface.
PICS
PID PIM PIN PIN PIX
PIXT or PIXIT
PK PL Plaintext PlaNET PLL
PLMN PM
PMA PMC PMR PMS PM-UI
11-58
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

PMUX PN PNCH PNE POI PCM MUltipleXer. Permanent Nucleus group of the GSM committee. Packet Notification Channel ((E)GPRS) Prsentation des Normes Europennes. Presentation rules of European Standards. Point of Interconnection. A point at which the cellular network is connected to the PSTN. A cellular system may have multiple POIs. Post Office Protocol ( RFC 1939) Plain Old Telephone Service. Basic telephone service without special features such as call waiting, call forwarding, etc. Peak-to-peak. Point-to-Point. Parts per billion. PCI (Peripheral Component Interconnect) to PCI Bridge board. The PPB allows an MPROC to be linked to a separate bus. The PPB and MPROC are paired boards. Packet Paging Channel ((E)GPRS) Primitive Procedure Entity. Parts per million (x 10-6). Point-to-Point Protocol ( RFC 1661) PCPCH Resource Availability Physical Random Access Channel UMTS Packet Random Access Channel ((E)GPRS) Preferential CUG. A Pref CUG, which can be specified for each basic service group, is the nominated default CUG to be used when no explicit CUG index is received by the network. See OSI RM. The Presentation Layer responds to service requests from the Application Layer and issues service requests to the Session Layer. It relieves the Application Layer of concern regarding syntactical differences in data representation within the end-user systems. A cell which is already optimized in the network and has a co-located neighbour whose cell boundary follows the boundary of the said cell. The primary cell has a preferred band equal to the frequency type of the coincident cell. Packet Resource Manager. The PRM is a PRP process. It performs all RLC/MAC functions and realises UL/DL power control and timing advance. Programmable Read Only Memory. A storage device that, after being written to once, becomes a read-only memory.
POP POTS pp, p-p PP ppb PPB
PPCH PPE ppm PPP PRA PRACH Pref CUG
Presentation Layer
Primary Cell
PRM
PROM
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-59
Version 1 Rev 0

PRP Packet Resource Process(or). A PCU hardware component, the PRP is a DPROC board which manages the packet resources at the PCU and is the processor where all of the radio related processing occurs. GPRS channels are routed to PRPs which perform the RLC/MAC processing, air interface scheduling, and frame synchronization of the channels. Location probability. Location probability is a quality criterion for cell coverage. Due to shadowing and fading a cell edge is defined by adding margins so that the minimum service quality is fulfilled with a certain probability. Puncturing Scheme. Periodic Supervision of Accessibility. PSA is a fault management function. It periodically sends messages to BSSs requesting information on their current state. This verifies whether the BSSs are operational or not. If a BSS fails to respond to a PSA request for its status, the OMC-R will generate an alarm for that BSS. Primary Synchronization Code Primary Synchronization Channel (physical) Power Spectral Density ( 3GTS 25.215 / 3GTS 25.102) Phase Shift Keying Packet System Information. Presentation Services Access Point. PCU System Audit Process. pSAP is a GWM process. It periodically monitors the soft devices to maintain the reliability of the system. Power Supply Module. PCU Switch Manager. The pSM resides on the PSP as part of the GWM Functional Unit process. The pSM maintains data paths within the PCU and communicates with the BSC. PCU System Processor board. Part of GPRS. Packet Switched Public Data Network. See Packet Switching and PDN. Public Switched Telephone Network. The domestic land line telecommunications network. It is usually accessed by telephones, key telephone systems, private branch exchange trunks, and data arrangements. Power Supply Unit. Pure Sine Wave. Protocol Type ( GTP or GTP) Packet Timing Advance Control Channel Packet Timing Advance Control Channel ((E)GPRS) Packet Timing Advance Control Channel / Downlink Direction ((E)GPRS)
Ps
PS PSA
PSC P-SCH PSD PSK PSI PSAP pSAP
PSM pSM
PSP PSPDN PSTN
PSU PSW PT PTACH PTCCH PTCCH/D
11-60
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

PTCCH/U PTM P-TMSI PTO PTP PTR PUA PUCT Packet Timing Advance Control Channel / Uplink Direction ((E)GPRS) Point to Multipoint Packet TMSI Public Telecommunications Operator. Point to Point Packet Timeslot Reconfiguration. Packet Uplink Assignment. Price per Unit Currency Table. The PUCT is the value of the Home unit in a currency chosen by the subscriber. The PUCT is stored in the SIM. The value of the PUCT can be set by the subscriber and may exceed the value published by the HPLMN. The PUCT value does not have any impact on the charges raised by the HPLMN. Permanent Virtual Circuit. Also, in ATM terminology, Permanent Virtual Connection. A virtual circuit that is permanently established, saving the time associated with circuit establishment and tear-down. See also SVC. Pass Word. Power. Private eXchange Public Data Network. See also PDN.
PVC
PW PWR PXPDN
QA- Quiesent mode

QA Q (Interface) - Adapter. TMN interface adapter used to communicate with non-TMN compatible devices and objects. Used to connect MEs and SEs to TMN (GSM Rec. 12.00). Interface between NMC and GSM network. See QA. Q-Adapter Function. Quality Estimate Quad European Interface. Interfaces four 2 Mbit/s circuits to TDM switch highway. See MSI. Quarter Inch Cartridge (Data storage format). Quality Of Service. An alarm category which indicates that a failure is degrading service. Data structure in which data or messages are temporarily stored until they are retrieved by a software process. Also a series of calls waiting for service. See also FIFO. IDS intermediate state before shutdown.
Q3 Q-adapter QAF QE QEI QIC QoS Queue
Quiescent mode
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-61
Version 1 Rev 0

R - RXU
R Value of reduction of the MS transmitted RF power relative to the maximum allowed output power of the highest power class of MS (A). RAndom mode request information field. Radio Access. Routing Area. Rural Area with the MS travelling at 250 kph. Dynamic model against which the performance of a GSM receiver can be measured. See also TU3, TU50, HT100 and EQ50. Random Access Burst. Data sent on the RACH. Radio Access Bearer Routing Area Code Random Access Control CHannel. A GSM common control channel used to originate a call or respond to a page. Random Access CHannel. The RACH is used by the mobile station to request access to the network. See also RAB. Remote Authentication Dial In User Service ( RFC 2865) Routing Area Identification A term applied to the transmission of electromagnetically radiated information from one point to another, usually using air or vacuum as the transmission medium. An electromagnetic wave frequency intermediate between audio frequencies and infrared frequencies used in radio and television transmission. Random Access Memory. A read/write, nonsequential-access memory in which information can be stored, retrieved and modified. This type of memory is generally volatile (i.e., its contents are lost if power is removed). Radio Access Network Application Part ( 3GTS 25.413) RANDom number (used for authentication). The RAND is sent by the SGSN to the MS as part of the authentication process. Radio Access Technology Receive Antenna Transceiver Interface. Rate Adaptation. Receive Block Bitmap ( EGPRS) Receive Block Bitmap ( GPRS) Remote BSS Diagnostic System (a discontinued Motorola diagnostic facility).
RA RA RA RA250
RAB RAB RAC RACCH RACH RADIUS RAI Radio Frequency
RAM
RANAP RAND RAT RATI RAx RB RBB RBDS
11-62
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

RBER Residual Bit Error Ratio. RBER is a ratio of the number of bits in error to the total number of bits received, within error detected speech frames defined as good. The measurement period over which the calculation is made is 480 ms. During this period, 24 speech frames are decoded and a ratio calculated. By referring to a lookup table, the ratio is then converted to an RBER Quality number between 0 and 7. Remote Base Transceiver Station. A BTS that is not co-located with the BSC that controls it. Radio Control Board. Part of the DRCU. Radio Channel Identifier. The unique identifier of the radio channel portion of the circuit path. Radio Channel Interface. The RCI changes the MS address used in the RSS (channel number) to the address used in Layer 3 in the BSC CP. Radio Control Processor. Radio Channel Unit. Part of the BSS. Contains transceiver, digital control circuits, and power supply. Note: The RCU is now obsolete, see DRCU. Receiver. Requirements Database. Relational DataBase Management System (INFORMIX). The database management system for the OMC-R database. Restricted Digital Information. Radio Digital Interface System. Reference Distribution Module. The RDM provides a stable 3MHz reference signal to all transceivers. It is used for carrier and injection frequency synthesis. Relative Distinguished Name. A series of RDNs form a unique identifier, the distinguished name, for a particular network element. RECommendation. Used to describe adjacent cells; each being designated as a neighbour of the other. Also known as bi-directional and two-way neighbour. The process of a MS registering its location with the MSC in order to make or receive calls. This occurs whenever the MS first activates or moves into a new service area. REJect(ion). RELease. Residual Excited Linear Predictive. A form of speech coding. RELP coders are usually used to give good quality speech at bit rates in the region of 9.6 kbit/s. RELP Long Term Prediction. A name for GSM full rate. See Full Rate.
RBTS RCB RCI RCI
RCP RCU
RCVR RDB RDBMS RDI RDIS RDM
RDN
REC, Rec Reciprocal neighbour
Registration
REJ REL RELP
RELP-LTP
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-63
Version 1 Rev 0

Remotely Tuned Combiner A combiner device which houses two processors (for paired-redundancy) and several tuneable cavities. See also COMB Resynchronize/resynchronization. REQuest. The minimum number of cells required in a pattern before channel frequencies are reused, to prevent interference. Varies between cell configuration type and channel type. The pattern shows assignments of adjacent channels to minimize interference between cells and sectors within the pattern area. A Motorola DataGen utility for producing an MMI script from a binary object database. See Radio Frequency. Radio Frequency Channel. A partition of the system RF spectrum allocation with a defined bandwidth and centre frequency. Radio Front End (module). Receiver Front End (shelf). Receiver Front End Board. Part of DRCU II. Radio Frequency Interference. Radio Frequency Module. Reduced TDMA Frame Number. Reserved for Future Use. Railways-GSM Registered Jack 45. An eight-wire connector used commonly to connect computers onto a local-area networks (LAN), especially Ethernets. Reduced Instruction Set Computer. A type of microprocessor that recognizes a relatively limited number of instruction types, allowing it to operate at relatively higher speeds. Remote login. RL is a means by which the operator performs configuration management, fault management, and some performance management procedures at the NEs. The RL software manages the X.25 connection for remote login. The circuit is made by the OMC-R calling the NE. Release Complete. An SCCP message type used with RLSD to release a connection. Radio Link Control. Air interface transmission layer. The RLC function processes the transfer of PDUs from the LLC layer. (UMTS 3GTS 25.322) ((E)GPRS / 3GTS 04.60 / 3GTS 44.060) RF Link Manager. Radio Link Protocol. An ARQ protocol used to transfer user data between an MT and IWF. See GSM 04.22. ( 3GTS 24.022) Receive Loudness Rating. See SLR.
resync REQ Reuse Pattern
Revgen RF RFC, RFCH
RFE RFE RFEB RFI RFM RFN RFU R-GSM RJ45
RISC
RL
RLC RLC
RLM RLP RLR
11-64
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

RLSD RMS ReLeaSeD. An SCCP message type used with RLC to release a connection. Root Mean Square (value). The most common mathematical method of defining the effective voltage or current of an AC wave. For a sine wave, the rms value is 0.707 times the peak value. Remote Mobile Switching Unit. An RMSU is a line concentrator. It may be inserted between the MSC and some of the BSS sites served by the MSC to reduce the number of terrestrial signalling and traffic circuits required. Radio Network Controller Receive Not Ready Radio Network Subsystem Table of 128 integers in the hopping sequence. Radio Network Subsystem Application Part ( 3GTS 25.423) Radio Network Temporary Identifier Reliability, Operability, Availability, Maintainability. Situation where mobile station operates in a cellular system other than the one from which service is subscribed. Read Only Memory. Computer memory that allows fast access to permanently stored data but prevents addition to or modification of the data. ROM is inherently non-volatile storage - it retains its contents even when the power is switched off. Remote Operations Service Element. An ASE which carries a message between devices over an association established by ASCE (a CCITT specification for O & M) (OMC). Time period between transmit and receive instant of a timeslot in the BTS, propagation determined by the response behaviour of the MS and the MS to BTS delay distance. Regular Pulse Excited (codec). See RPE-LTP. Regular Pulse Excitation - Long Term Prediction. The GSM digital speech coding scheme. GSM uses a simplified RPE codec, with long-term prediction, operating at 13 kbits/s to provide toll quality speech. Registered PLMN Recognised Private Operating Agency. Private telecommunications operator recognised by the appropriate telecommunications authority. Read Privilege Required. Part of the table structure of the OMC database schema. Access to the column is allowed only for privileged accounts. Radio Resource management. Part of the GSM management layer. The functions provided by RR include paging, cipher mode set, frequency redefinition, assignments, handover and measurement reports. Receive Ready.
RMSU
RNC RNR RNS RNTABLE RNSAP RNTI ROAM Roaming ROM
ROSE
Roundtrip
RPE RPE-LTP
RPLMN RPOA
RPR
RR
RR
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-65
Version 1 Rev 0

RRBP RRC RRSM Relative Reserved Block Period Radio Resource Control ( 3GTS 25.331) Radio Resource State Machine. Translates messages through Call Processing (CP). Activates and deactivates radio channels as controlled by the CRM. Radio Resource Switch Manager. Recommended Standard 232. The interface between a terminal (DTE) and a modem (DCE) for the transfer of serial data. Standard serial interface. Received Signal Code Power ( 3GTS 25.215) Radio System Entity. Radio Signalling Link. RSL is used for signalling between the BSC and BTSs. The interface uses a 64 kbit/s timeslot with a LAPD protocol. Radio System Link Function. Radio System Link Processor. Radio SubSystem (replaced by BSS). Received Signal Strength Indicator. A parameter returned from a transceiver that gives a measure of the RF signal strength between the MS and BTS, either uplink or downlink. Resource Reservation Protocol ( RFC 2205) Regional Subscription Zone Identity. The RSZI defines the regions in which roaming is allowed. The elements of the RSZI are:The Country Code (CC) which identifies the country in which the GSM PLMN is located,The National Destination Code (NDC) which identifies the GSM PLMN in that country,The Zone Code (ZC) which identifies a regional subscription zone as a pattern of allowed and not allowed location areas uniquely within that PLMN. Remotely Tuneable Channel Combiner. RTCs are used to fine-tune the cavities to the right frequency. A poorly tuned cavity can cause power destined for the antenna to be reversed. Remote Terminal Emulator. Radio Transceiver Function. RTF is the function that supports the air interface channel and the DRI/Transceiver pair. When equipping a DRI at a remote BTS, one or more RTFs must be equipped. Receive Transmit Functions. Retransmission Time Out Real Timer Protocol ( RFC 1889) Request to Send. A handshaking signal used with communication links, especially RS232 or CCITT Rec. V.24 to indicate (from a transmitter to a receiver) that data is ready for transmission. See also CTS. RoundTrip Time ( RFC 793)
RRSM RS232
RSCP RSE RSL
RSLF RSLP RSS RSSI
RSVP RSZI
RTC
RTE RTF
RTF RTO RTP RTS
RTT
11-66
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

RU Run level Rx RX RXCDR Rack Unit. System processor operating mode. Receive(r). Receive window buffer. Remote Transcoder. An RXCDR is used when the transcoding is performed at a site away from the BSC. This site would be at or near the MSC. This enables 4:1 multiplexing in which the transcoded data for four logical channels is combined onto one 64 kbit/s link, thus reducing the number of links required for interconnection to the BSCs. See also XCDR. Receive Function (of the RTF). Received signal level. An indication of received signal level based on the RSSI. RXLEV is one of the two criteria for evaluating the reception quality (the basis for handover and power control). See also RXQUAL. The MS reports RXLEV values related to the apparent received RF signal strength. It is necessary for these levels to attain sufficient accuracy for the correct functioning of the system. Received signal level downlink. Received signal level uplink. Received signal quality. An indication of the received signal quality based on the BER. RXQUAL is one of the two criteria for evaluating the reception quality (the basis for handover and power control). See also RXLEV. The MS measures the received signal quality, which is specified in terms of BER before channel decoding averaged over the reporting period of length of one SACCH multiframe. Received signal quality downlink. Received signal quality uplink. Remote Transcoder Unit. The shelf which houses the remote transcoder modules in a BSSC cabinet at a remote transcoder site.
RXF RXLEV
RXLEV-D RXLEV-U RXQUAL
RXQUAL-D RXQUAL-U RXU
S7- SYSGEN
S7 S/W SABM SABME SABP SACCH See SS7. SoftWare. Set Asynchronous Balanced Mode. A message which establishes the signalling link over the air interface. SABM Extended. Service Area Broadcast Protocol ( 3GTS 25.419) Slow Associated Control CHannel. A GSM control channel used by the MS for conveying power control and timing advance information in the downlink direction, and RSSI and link quality reports in the uplink direction.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-67
Version 1 Rev 0

SACCH/C4 SACCH/C8 SACCH/T SACCH/TF SACCH/TH SAGE SAP Slow Associated Control CHannel/SDCCH/4. Slow Associated Control CHannel/SDCCH/8. Slow Associated Control CHannel/Traffic channel. Slow Associated Control CHannel/Traffic channel Full rate. Slow Associated Control CHannel/Traffic channel Half rate. A brand of trunk test equipment. Service Access Point. In the reference model for OSI, SAPs of a layer are defined as gates through which services are offered to an adjacent higher layer. System Audits Process. SAP is on each GPROC in the BSS. It monitors the status of the BSS on a periodic (scheduled) and on-demand basis during normal mode. SAP detects faulty or degrading hardware and software (through the use of audit tests) and notifies the Alarms handling software of the condition. Service Access Point Indicator (identifier). The OSI term for the component of a network address which identifies the individual application on a host which is sending or receiving a packet. Segmentation And Reassembly (ATM-sublayer) Surface Acoustic Wave. SAW devices basically consist of an input transducer to convert electrical signals to tiny acoustic waves, which then travel through the solid propagation medium to the output transducer where they are reconverted to electrical signals. SAW band pass filters are used for sorting signals by frequency. Synchronization Burst (see Synchronization burst). Serial Bus. An SBUS is a logical device made up of the communication path between the GPROCs and LANX cards in a cage. Service Centre (used for Short Message Service). Service Code. System Change Control Administration. Software module which allows full or partial software download to the NE (OMC). Signalling Connection Control Part (part of SS7). Secondary Common Control Physical Channel (used as bearer for the FACH and PCH TrCHs / UMTS Physical Channel) Speech Coding Experts Group (of GSM). Synchronization CHannel. A GSM broadcast control channel used to carry information for frame synchronization of MSs and identification of base stations. Status Control Interface. A slave to the Status Control Manager. Serial Communication Interface Processor.
SAP
SAPI
SAR SAW
SB SBUS
SC SC SCCA SCCP S-CCPCH SCEG SCH
SCI SCIP
11-68
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

SCM Status Control Manager. Accepts messages from other processors within the switch requesting status displays in the form of one or more lights on a hardware panel. The SCM maps the status display requests into specific commands to the status control interface processor to turn on and/or turn off lights. Sub-Channel Number. One of the parameters defining a particular physical channel in a BS. Service Control Point (an intelligent network entity). Secondary Common Pilot Channel (UMTS Physical Channel) Serving Call Session Control Function ( SIP) Small Computer Systems Interface. A processor-independent standard for system-level interfacing between a computer and intelligent devices including hard disks, floppy disks, CD-ROM, printers, scanners, and many more. SCSI-1 can connect up to seven devices to a single SCSI adaptor (or host adaptor) on the computers bus. Stream Control Transmission Protocol ( RFC 2960) Slim Channel Unit. Slim Channel Unit for GSM900. Stand-alone Dedicated Control CHannel. A GSM control channel where the majority of call setup occurs. Used for MS to BTS communications before MS assigned to TCH. A SDCCH is used by a single MS for call setup, authentication, location updating and SMS point to point. Specification Description Language. A method for visually depicting the functionality of call processing, operations and maintenance software. Sub-rate Data Multiplexor Space Division Multiple Access SDL Development Tool. A software tool to model and validate real-time, state-based product software designs. Service Data Unit. In layered systems, a set of data that is sent by a user of the services of a given layer, and is transmitted to a peer service user semantically unchanged. Special Drawing Rights. The SDR is the International Monetary Fund unit of account. It also serves as a basis for the unit of account for a number of other international organizations and as a basis for private financial instruments. The SDR is based on the values of the euro, U.S. dollar, Japanese yen and pound sterling. Support Entity. See SEF. A cell which is not optimized in the network and has a co-located neighbour whose cell boundary follows the boundary of the said cell. The secondary cell has a preferred band the same as that of its own frequency type.
SCN SCP S-CPICH S-CSCF SCSI
SCTP SCU SCU900 SDCCH
SDL
SDM SDMA SDT SDU
SDR
SE Secondary Cell
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-69
Version 1 Rev 0

SEF Support Entity Function. SEFs are functions not directly involved in the telecommunication process. They include fault localisation, protection switching, etc. (GSM Rec.12.00). See OSI RM. The Session Layer responds to service requests from the Presentation Layer and issues service requests to the Transport Layer. It provides the mechanism for managing the dialogue between end-user application processes. It provides for either duplex or half-duplex operation and establishes checkpointing, adjournment, termination, and restart procedures. Spreading Factor Synthesizer Frequency Hopping. The principle of SFH is that every mobile transmits its time slots according to a sequence of frequencies that it derives from an algorithm. The frequency hopping occurs between time slots and, therefore, a mobile station transmits (or receives) on a fixed frequency during one time slot. It must then hop before the time slot on the next TDMA frame. Due to the time needed for monitoring other base stations the time allowed for hopping is approximately 1 ms, according to the receiver implementation. The receive and transmit frequencies are always duplex frequencies. System Frame Number Security Gateway (IPsec / RFC 2401) Serving GPRS Support Node. The SGSN provides the control, transmission, OAMP, and charging functions. It keeps track of the individual MS locations, and performs security functions and access control. The SGSN is connected to the BSS via a Frame Relay network. Signaling Gateway (SS7 IP) Secure Hash Algorithm Shared Channel Control Channel (UMTS Logical Channel / TDD only) Screening Indicator. The supplementary service (SS) screening indicator is sent by the MS at the beginning of the radio connection to allow the network to assess the capabilities of the MS and hence determine either whether a particular network initiated SS operation may be invoked or which version of a network initiated SS operation should be invoked. The SS screening indicator is only relevant to network initiated SS operation and is valid for the duration of a radio connection. Service Interworking. Part of the IWF. Supplementary Information. System Information. Supplementary Information A. System Information Block
Session Layer
SF SFH
SFN SG SGSN
SGW SHA SHCCH SI
SI SI SI SIA SIB
11-70
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

SID Silence Descriptor. The transmission of comfort noise information to the RX side is achieved by means of a SID frame. A SID frame is transmitted at the end of speech bursts and serves as an end of speech marker for the RX side. In order to update the comfort noise characteristics at the RX side, SID frames are transmitted at regular intervals also during speech pauses. This also serves the purpose of improving the measurement of the radio link quality by the radio subsystem (RSS). Signal Information Field. The bits of a message signal unit that carry information for a certain user transaction; the SIF always contains a label. See SS7. Subscriber Identity Module. Removable module which is inserted into a mobile equipment; it is considered as part of the MS. It contains security related information (IMSI, Ki, PIN), other subscriber related information and the algorithms A3 and A8. Single Inline Memory module. System Integrated Memory Module. A small plug-in circuit board providing additional RAM for a computer. Service Information Octet. Eight bits contained in a message signal unit, comprising the service indicator and sub-service field. A value in the SIF of an SS7 signalling message specifying the User Part type. Session Initiation Protocol ( RFC 3261) Signal to Interference Ratio BSC, BTS or collocated BSC-BTS site. Serial Interface eXtender. Converts interface levels to TTL levels. Used to extend 2 serial ports from GPROC to external devices (RS232, RS422, and fibre optics). Secondary Key. A database column attribute, the secondary key indicates an additional index and/or usage as a composite key. See Session Layer. Signalling Link. The signalling links between the various network elements are: Remote BTS to BSC - Radio Signalling Link (RSL), BSC to MSC - Message Transfer Link (MTL), OMC(R) to BSS - Operations and Maintenance Link (OML), Remote XCDR to BSC - XCDR signalling Link (XBL), CBC to BSC - Cell Broadcast Link (CBL). Signaling Link Code Subscriber Locator Function Serial Link. One of four communications paths between SCIP and peripheral equipment. The information on the link is sent serially in a bit-synchronous format.
SIF
Signalling System No.7 SIM
SIMM SIMM SIO
SIP SIR SITE SIX
SK
SL SL
SLC SLF SLNK
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-71
Version 1 Rev 0

SLR Send Loudness Rating. The SLR, in the mobile to land direction, and the Receive Loudness Rating (RLR) in the land to mobile direction, determine the audio signal levels for the customers speech. The loudness ratings are calculated from the send and receive sensitivity masks or frequency responses. Source Local Reference (SS7) Signaling Link Selection Signalling Link Test Acknowledge. Message sent from the MSC to the BSC in response to an SLTM. Signalling Link Test Message. During the process of bringing an MTL link into service, the BSC sends an SLTM message to the MSC. The MSC responds with an SLTA message. Switch Manager. The function of the SM is to connect a MS terrestrial trunk from the MSC (designated by the MSC), to the radio channel given to a MS by the cell resource manager in the BSS software. Summing Manager. Session Management System Management Application Entity (CCITT Q795, ISO 9596). OSI terminology for a software Management Information Server that manages a network. System Management Application Service Element. Short Message Cell Broadcast. Short Message Entity. An entity that may send or receive Short Messages. The SME may be located in a fixed network, an MS, or a SC. See also SMS. Special Mobile Group. To avoid confusion between the GSM system and the GSM committee with its wider responsibilities, the committee was renamed SMG in 1992. Motorola Software Maintenance Program. A Motorola program designed to ensure the highest quality of software with the highest level of support. Short Message Service. SMS is a globally accepted wireless service that enables the transmission of alphanumeric messages between mobile subscribers and external systems such as electronic mail, paging, and voice-mail systems. It transfers the short messages, up to 160 characters, between Smts and MSs via an SMS-SC. See also SMS-SC, SMS/PP and Smt. Short Message Service Cell Broadcast. SMSCB is a service in which short messages may be broadcast from a PLMN to MSs. SMSCB messages come from different sources (e.g. traffic reports, weather reports). Messages are not acknowledged by the MS. Reception of SMSCB messages by the MS is only possible in idle mode. The geographical area over which each message is transmitted is selected by the PLMN operator, by agreement with the provider of the information.
SLR SLS SLTA SLTM
SM
SM SM SMAE
SMASE SMCB SME
SMG
SMP
SMS
SMSCB
11-72
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

SMS-G-MSC SMS-IW-MSC SMS-SC SMS Gateway MSC (for Short Messages destined to Mobile Station) SMS Interworking MSC (for Short Messages coming from Mobile Station) Short Message Service - Service Centre. SMS-SC is an interworking unit between stationary networks and the GSM Network. It acts as a store and forward centre for short messages. See also SMS, SMS/PP and Smt. Short Message Service/Point-to-Point. Two different point-to-point services have been defined: Mobile Originated (MO) and Mobile Terminated (MT). A short message always originates or terminates in the GSM network. This means that short messages can never be sent between two users both located in stationary networks. See also SMS, SMS-SC and Smt. Short message terminal. See also SMS, SMS-SC and SMS/PP. There are different types of Smt interfaces, one being the Computer Access Interface which provides services for external computers communicating with SMS-SCs through the Computer Access Protocol. Simple Mail Transfer Protocol ( RFC 2821) Subscriber Number. Sequence Number Downlink ( GTP) SeND. Subnetwork Dependent Convergence Protocol SeNDeR. Simple Network Management Protocol SNDCP N-PDU Number Flag Segmented N-PDU (SN-PDU is the payload of SNDCP) Signal to Noise Ratio Serial NumbeR. Sequence Number Uplink ( GTP) Suppress Outgoing Access (CUG SS). An arrangement which prevents a member of a CUG placing calls outside the CUG. Simple Object Access Protocol ( http://www.w3.org/TR/2000/NOTE-SOAP-20000508) A complete set of software and firmware objects including the database object. Service Provider. The organisation through which the subscriber obtains GSM telecommunications services. This may be a network operator or possibly a separate body. Signalling Point. A signalling point is a node within a SS7 network. Special Product.
SMS/PP
Smt
SMTP SN SND SND SNDCP SNDR SNMP SNN SN-PDU SNR SNR SNU SOA SOAP Software Instance SP
SP SP
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-73
Version 1 Rev 0

SP SPARC SPare. Scalable Processor ArChitecture. a 32- and 64-bit microprocessor architecture from Sun Microsystems that is based on the Reduced Instruction Set Computer (RISC). SPARC has become a widely-used architecture for hardware used with UNIX-based operating systems. Signalling Point Code. Suppress Preferential CUG. Prohibits the use of the preferential CUG, on a per call basis. Security Parameter Index ( RFC 2401) Signalling Point Inaccessible. Single Path Preselector. Signal Quality Error. Structured Query Language. The standard language for relational database management systems as adopted by the American National Standards Institute (ANSI X3.135-1989) and the International Standards Organization (ISO 9075-1989). Signaling Radio Bearer Service Request Distributor. Signed RESponse (authentication). The SRES is calculated by the MS, using the RAND, and sent to the SGSN to authenticate the MS. Serving RNC Smoothed RoundTrip Time ( RFC 793) Supplementary Service. A modification of, or a supplement to, a basic telecommunication service. System Simulator. ITU-TSS Common Channel Signalling System No. 7. Also known as C7, S7 or SS#7. The standard defines the procedures and protocol by which network elements in the PSTN exchange information over a digital signalling network to effect wireless (cellular) and wireline call setup, routing and control. SubSystem-Allowed. SSA is used for SCCP subsystem management. An SSA message is sent to concerned destinations to inform those destinations that a subsystem which was formerly prohibited is now allowed. (see ITU-T Recommendation Q.712 para 1.15). Site System Audits Processor. Supplementary Service Control string. When a subscriber selects a supplementary service control from the menu in a GSM network, the mobile station invokes the SSC by sending the network the appropriate functional signalling message. Service Specific Coordination Function Network Node Interface Protocol ( ITU-T Q.2140)
SPC SPC SPI SPI SPP SQE SQL
SRB SRD SRES
SRNC SRTT SS SS SS7
SSA
SSAP SSC
SSCF/NNI
11-74
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

SSCF/UNI S-SCH SSCOP SSCOPMCE SSCS SSDT SSF SSM SSM SSN SSN SSN Service Specific Coordination Function User Network Interface Protocol ( ITU-T Q.2130) Secondary Synchronization Channel (physical) Service Specific Connection Oriented Protocol ( ITU-T Q.2110) Service Specific Connection Oriented Protocol in a Multi-link or Connectionless Environment ( ITU T Q.2111) Service Specific Convergence Sublayer Site Selection Diversity Transmission Subservice Field. The level 3 field containing the network indicator and two spare bits. SCCP Switch Manager. Signalling State Machine. Start Sequence Number ( related to ARQ-Bitmap in GPRS / EGPRS) Send Sequence Number ( GSM MM and CC-Protocols) SubSystem Number. In SS7, each signalling point (SP) may contain a number of subsystems. Each subsystem has a unique ID, the SSN (e.g. 149 for SGSN and 6 for HLR). Service Switching Point. Intelligent Network Term for the Class 4/5 Switch. The SSP has an open interface to the IN for switching signalling, control and handoff. Subsystem-prohibited. SSP is used for SCCP subsystem management. An SSP message is sent to concerned destinations to inform SCCP Management at those destinations of the failure of a subsystem. Switching SubSystem. The SSC comprises the MSC and the LRs. Service Specific Segmentation And Reassembly ( ITU-T I.366.1) Slow start threshold Statistical ANalysis (processor). STATistics. Statistics. Signaling Transport Converter on MTP-3 and MTP-3b ( ITU-T Q.2150.1) / Signaling Transport Converter on SSCOP and SSCOPMCE ( ITU-T Q.2150.2) System Timing Controller. The STC provides the timing functions for the GPROC. Side Tone Masking rating. A rating, expressed in dB, based on how a speaker will perceive his own voice when speaking. Space Time block coding based Transmission Diversity Signal Unit Error Rate Monitor. A link error rate monitor.
SSP
SSP
SSS SSSAR ssthresh STAN STAT stats STC
STC STMR STTD SUERM
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-75
Version 1 Rev 0

STP Signalling Transfer Point. A node in the SS7 telephone network that routes messages between exchanges and between exchanges and databases that hold subscriber and routing information. Signal Unit. A group of bits forming a separately transferable entity used to convey information on a signalling link. Super Field (RLC-Protocol) Sun Microsystems UNIX Operating System. SunOS was renamed Solaris. 51 traffic/associated control multiframes or 26 broadcast/common control multiframes (period 6.12s). User account that can access all files, regardless of protection settings, and control all user accounts. Sectorized Universal Receiver Front-end (Used in Horizonmacro). Switch Virtual Circuit. A temporary virtual circuit that is set up and used only as long as data is being transmitted. Once the communication between the two hosts is complete, the SVC disappears. See also PVC. SerVice Manager. The SVM provides overall management authority for all in-service service circuits. Software Version Number. The SVN allows the ME manufacturer to identify different software versions of a given type approved mobile. See also IMEI and IMEISV. Software. SoftWare Fault Management. Software faults are handled through a SWFM facility which routes those events to the OMC independently through the FCP. SYstem information Manager. The SYM builds and sends GPRS system information messages over the BCCH. synchronize/synchronization. Period of RF carrier less than one timeslot whose modulation bit stream carries information for the MS to synchronize its frame to that of the received signal. Synthesizer hopping is a method of frequency hopping in which the RCUs are re-tuned in real-time, from frequency to frequency. SYStem. SYStem GENeration. The Motorola procedure for loading a configuration database into a BTS.
SU SUFI SunOS Superframe Super user SURF SVC
SVM SVN
SW SWFM
SYM sync Synchronization burst
Synthesizer hopping
SYS SYSGEN
T -TxBPF
T T Timer. Transparent.
11-76
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

T T1 Type only. Digital WAN carrier facility that transmits DS-1-formatted data at 1544 kbp/s through the telephone-switching network. companies. T1 lines are widely used for private networks as well as interconnections between an organizations PBX or LAN and the telco. Type 43 Interconnect Board. Provides interface to 12 unbalanced (6-pair) 75 ohm (T43 coax connectors) lines for 2 Mbit/s circuits (See BIB). Terminal Adaptor. A physical entity in the MS providing terminal adaptation functions (see GSM 04.02). See Timing Advance. Type Approval Code. Part of the IMEISV. Total Access Communication System. European analogue cellular system. Terminal Adaptation Function.( 3GTS 27.001) Timing Advance Index Transmit Antenna Transceiver Interface. The TATI consists of RF combining equipments, either Hybrid or Cavity Combining. See CCB. Transparent Asynchronous Transmitter/Receiver Interface (physical layer). A 100 Mbps ATM transmission standard defined by the ATM Forum. Transport Block To Be Determined. Temporary Block Flow. MAC modes support the provision of TBFs allowing the point-to-point transfer of signalling and user data between the network and an MS. Technical Basis for Regulation. An ETSI document containing technical requirements and procedures. Transport Block Set TDM Bus. A TBUS is a logical device made up of the TDM backplane of a cage, the KSW devices managing the TDM highway of the cage, and local and remote KSWX devices (if they exist). Transaction Capabilities. TC refers to a protocol structure above the network layer interface (i.e., the SCCP service interface) up to the application layer including common application service elements but not the specific application service elements using them. TC is structured as a Component sub-layer above a Transaction sub-layer. Transaction Capabilities Application Part. The layer of the SS7 protocol that is used to obtain Routing data for certain services.( Q.771 Q.773) TATI Control Board.
T43
TA TA TAC TACS TAF TAI TATI
TAXI
TB TBD TBF
TBR TBS TBUS
TC
TCAP
TCB
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-77
Version 1 Rev 0

TCH TCH/F TCH/F2.4 TCH/F4.8 TCH/F9.6 TCH/FD TCH/FS TCH/H TCH/H2.4 TCH/H4.8 TCH/HS TCI TCP Traffic CHannel. GSM logical channels which carry either encoded speech or user data. A full rate TCH. See also Full Rate. A full rate TCH at ? 2.4 kbit/s. A full rate TCH at 4.8 kbit/s. A full rate TCH at 9.6 kbit/s. Traffic Channel / Fullrate Downlink A full rate Speech TCH. A half rate TCH. See also Half Rate. A half rate TCH at ? 2.4 kbit/s. A half rate TCH at 4.8 kbit/s. A half rate Speech TCH. Transceiver Control Interface. Transmission Control Protocol. TCP is one of the main protocols in TCP/IP networks. Whereas the IP protocol deals only with packets, TCP enables two hosts to establish a connection and exchange streams of data. TCP guarantees delivery of data and also guarantees that packets will be delivered in the same order in which they were sent. See also IP and TCP/IP. Transmission Control Protocol/Internet Protocol. Two interrelated protocols that are part of the Internet protocol suite. TCP operates on the OSI Transport Layer and IP operates on the OSI Network Layer. See also IP and TCP. Target Channel Type Field Technical Commitee Technical Report. Transport Channel Traffic Volume Transceiver Control Unit. Time Division Duplex Twin Duplexed Filter. Used in M-Cellhorizon. Time Division Multiplexing. A type of multiplexing that combines data streams by assigning each stream a different time slot in a set. TDM repeatedly transmits a fixed sequence of time slots over a single transmission channel. Within T-Carrier systems, such as T-1 and T-3, TDM combines PCM streams created for each conversation or data stream. Time Division Multiple Access. A technology for delivering digital wireless service using TDM. TDMA works by dividing a radio frequency into time slots and then allocating slots to multiple calls. In this way, a single frequency can support multiple, simultaneous data channels. TopCell Digital Unit. Part of the TopCell BTS hardware. A TDU is capable of supporting 6 TRUs for supporting up to 6 sectors.
TCP/IP
TCTF TC-TR TCTV TCU TDD TDF TDM
TDMA
TDU
11-78
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

TE Tei TEI TEID TEMP TEST TF TF Terminal Equipment. Equipment that provides the functions necessary for the operation of the access protocols by the user. Terminal endpoint identifier. A number that identifies a specific connection endpoint within a service access point. Terminal Equipment Identity. Tunnel Endpoint Identifier ( GTP / 3GTS 29.060) TEMPorary. TEST control processor. Transport Format Transmission Function. The TF provides layered protocol software for handling payload information transfer and for providing signalling communications between the control function and external systems. TransFer Allowed. An SPC route management message used to notify adjacent signalling points of an accessible route. Transport Format Combination Transport Format Combination Identifier Transport Format Combination Set Transport Format Indication (UMTS). Temporary Flow Identity ((E)GPRS) TransFer Prohibited. An SPC route management message used to notify adjacent signalling points of an inaccessible route. Transport Format Set Trivial File Transfer Protocol. TFTP is a simple form of FTP. It uses UDP and provides no security features. It is often used by servers to boot diskless workstations, X-terminals, and routers. Transmission Gap start Distance ( 3GTS 25.215) Transmission Gap Length ( 3GTS 25.215) Transmission Gap Pattern Repetition Count ( 3GTS 25.215) Transmission Gap Starting Slot Number ( 3GTS 25.215) Topology Hiding Inter Network Gateway Transaction Identifier. Tunnel Identifier The multiplex subdivision in which voice and signalling bits are sent over the air. Each RF carrier is divided into 8 timeslots. See also ARFCN. A signal sent by the BTS to the MS. It enables the MS to advance the timing of its transmission to the BTS so as to compensate for propagation delay. See Transport Layer. Temporary Logical Link Identifier.
TFA TFC TFCI TFCS TFI TFP
TFS TFTP
TGD TGL TGPRC TGSN THIG TI TID Timeslot
Timing advance
TL TLLI
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-79
Version 1 Rev 0

TLS TLV Transport Layer Security ( RFC 2246 / RFC 3546 / formerly known as SSL or Secure Socket Layer) Type, Length and Value. An encoding element composed of three fields: a type identifier, a length indicator, and content octets. Transparent Mode operation ( UMTS-RLC) Transmission Modules Traffic Manager. Transparent Mode Data (UMTS RLC PDU-type) TDM Modem Interface board. Provides analogue interface from IWF to modems for 16 circuits. Part of IWF. Traffic Metering and Measuring. TMM provides system tools to be used by traffic engineering and switch maintenance personnel to determine if the system is operating correctly. TMM reports are provided for trunk circuits, trunk groups, service circuits, call routing and miscellaneous system data. Telecommunications Management Network. The physical entities required to implement the Network Management functionality for the PLMN. Also, TMN was originated formally in 1988 under the ITU-TS as a strategic goal to create or identify standard interfaces that would allow a network to be managed consistently across all network element suppliers. The concept has led to a series of interrelated efforts at developing standard ways to define and address network elements. TMN uses the OSI Management Standards as its framework. TMN applies to wireless communications and cable TV as well as to private and public wired networks. Temporary Mobile Subscriber Identity. A unique identity temporarily allocated by the MSC to a visiting mobile subscriber to process a call. May be changed between calls and even during a call, to preserve subscriber confidentiality. Timeslot Number. Tunneling of Messages. Type Of Number. Transmit Power Command Payload of a G-PDU which can be user data, i.e. possibly segmented IP-frames, or GTP signaling information ( GTP) Temporary Queuing Identifier Channels which carry users speech or data. See also TCH. Equivalent to an erlang. Sequence of modulating bits employed to facilitate timing recovery and channel equalization in the receiver.
TM TM TM TMD TMI TMM
TMN
TMSI
TN TOM TON TPC T-PDU TQI Traffic channels Traffic unit Training sequence
11-80
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

Transport Layer See OSI RM. The Transport Layer responds to service requests from the Session Layer and issues service requests to the Network Layer. Its purpose is to provide transparent transfer of data between end users, thus relieving the upper layers from any concern with providing reliable and cost-effective data transfer. Transcoding Rate and Adaption Unit Timeslot Resource Shifter. The TRS determines which timeslots are active in a PRP board to perform a control of the GPRS traffic. Transcoder Rate Adaption Unit. TRAU converts the encoded voice and rate adapted data into 64 kbps data for the PSTN. Transport Channel (UMTS) Transition Gateway (IPv4 IPv6) Terrestrial Resource Management. TopCell Radio unit. Transceiver(s). A network component which can serve full duplex communication on 8 full-rate traffic channels according to specification GSM 05.02. If Slow Frequency Hopping (SFH) is not used, then the TRX serves the communication on one RF carrier. Technical Specification. TeleService. Any service provided by a telecommunication provider. TimeSlot (see Timeslot). Training Sequence 1. Training Sequence 2. TimeSlot Acquisition. TimeSlot Assignment. Transceiver Speech & Data Interface. Training Sequence Code. A training sequence is sent at the centre of a burst to help the receiver identify and synchronize to the burst. The training sequence is a set sequence of bits which is known by both the transmitter and receiver. There are eight different TSCs numbered 0 to 7. Nearby cells operating with the same RF carrier frequency use different TSCs to allow the receiver to identify the correct signal. TimeSlot Interchange. The interchange of timeslots within a TDM stream. Transceiver Speech and Data Interface. Transceiver Station Manager. TRAU SyNc. Time Switched Transmit Diversity Timeslot SWitch.
TRAU TRS
TRAU TrCH TrGW TRM TRU TRX
TS TS TS TS1 TS2 TSA TSA TSDA TSC
TSI TSDI TSM TSN TSTD TSW
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-81
Version 1 Rev 0

TTCN Tree and Tabular Combined Notation. TTCN is a programming language endorsed by ISO that is used to write test suites for telecommunications systems. Transistor to Transistor Logic. A common semiconductor technology for building discrete digital logic integrated circuits. Time To Live ( IP-Header / RFC 791) TeleTYpe (refers to any terminal). Traffic Unit. Typical Urban with the MS travelling at 3 kph. Dynamic model against which the performance of a GSM receiver can be measured. See also TU50, HT100, RA250 and EQ50. Typical Urban with the MS travelling at 50 kph. Dynamic model against which the performance of a GSM receiver can be measured. See also TU3, HT100, RA250 and EQ50. Telephone User Part. TUP was an earlier implementation of SS7 and generally does not allow for data type applications. Type and Value. See Reciprocal neighbour. Transmit(ter). Transmit window buffer. Transmit Function. See RTF. Transmit PoWeR. Tx power level in the MS_TXPWR_REQUEST and MS_TXPWR_CONF parameters. Transmit Bandpass Filter. See BPF.
TTL TTL TTY TU TU3
TU50
TUP TV Two-way neighbour Tx TX TXF TXPWR
TxBPF
U - UUS
UA Unnumbered Acknowledgment. A message sent from the MS to the BSS to acknowledge release of radio resources when a call is being cleared.(LAPD/LLC/RLP-Frame Type) User Agent User Agent Client UMTS Absolute Radio Frequency Channel Number User Agent Server Universal Coded Character Set 2. A codeset containing all of the characters commonly used in computer applications. Unrestricted Digital Information. User Datagram Protocol. UDP is a connectionless protocol that, like TCP, runs on top of IP networks. Unlike TCP/IP, UDP/IP provides very few error recovery services, offering instead a direct way to send and receive datagrams over an IP network. It is used primarily for broadcasting messages over a network.( RFC 768)
UA UAC UARFCN UAS UCS2 UDI UDP
11-82
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

UDUB UE UFE UHF UI UIC User Determined User Busy. User Equipment Uplink Frame Error. Ultra High Frequency. The UHF range of the radio spectrum is the band extending from 300 MHz to 3 GHz. Unnumbered Information (Frame) ( LAPD) / Unconfirmed Information ( LLC) / Frame Type Union International des Chemins de Fer. The UIC is the worldwide organisation for cooperation among railway companies. Its activities encompass all fields related to the development of rail transport. Universal Integrated Circuit Card ( 3GTS 22.101 / Bearer card of SIM / USIM) User ID. Unique number used by the system to identify the user. Upload (of software or database from an NE to a BSS). UpLink. UpLink Concatenator. The ULC concatenates RLC data blocks into LLC frames. Air interface. Unacknowledged Mode operation ( UMTS-RLC) Unacknowledged Mode Data (UMTS RLC PDU-type) Universal Mobile Telecommunication System. The European implementation of the 3G wireless phone system. UMTS, which is part of IMT-2000, provides service in the 2GHz band and offers global roaming and personalized features. Designed as an evolutionary system for GSM network operators, multimedia data rates up to 2 Mbps are expected. A multiuser, multitasking operating system that is widely used as the master control program in workstations and especially servers. UNIX was developed by AT&T and freely distributed to government and academic institutions, causing it to be ported to a wider variety of machine families than any other operating system. As a result, UNIX became synonymous with open systems. Uniform PCM Interface (13 bit). The UPCMI is introduced for design purposes in order to separate the speech transcoder impairments from the basic audio impairments of the MS. Up to Date. Physical link from the MS towards the BTS (MS transmits, BTS receives).
UICC UID UL UL ULC Um UM UMD UMTS
UNIX
UPCMI
UPD Uplink
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-83
Version 1 Rev 0

UPS Uninterruptable Power Supply. A device that is inserted between a primary power source, such as a commercial utility, and the primary power input of equipment to be protected, e.g., a computer system, for the purpose of eliminating the effects of transient anomalies or temporary outages. Backup power is used when the electrical power fails or drops to an unacceptable voltage level. User Part Unavailable. UTRAN Registration Area Uniform Resource Identifier Uniform Resource Locators ( RFC 1738) USIM Application Toolkit Uplink Shared Channel (UMTS Transport Channel TDD only That part of the burst used by the demodulator; differs from the full burst because of the bit shift of the I and Q parts of the GMSK signal. Uplink State Flag. Universal Subscriber Identity Module [3GTS 31.102] Unstructured Supplementary Service Data. The USSD mechanism allows the MS user and a PLMN operator defined application to communicate in a way which is transparent to the MS and to intermediate network entities. The mechanism allows development of PLMN specific supplementary services. UMTS Radio Access Network User-to-User Signalling supplementary service. The UUS supplementary service allows a mobile subscriber to send/receive a limited amount of information to/from another PLMN or ISDN subscriber over the signalling channel in association with a call to the other subscriber. Universal Wireless Convergence (Merge IS-136 with GSM)
UPU URA URI URL USAT USCH Useful part of burst
USF USIM USSD
UTRAN UUS
UWC
V - VTX host
V VA Value only. Viterbi Algorithm (used in channel equalizers). An algorithm to compute the optimal (most likely) state sequence in a model given a sequence of observed outputs. Voice Activity Detection. A process used to identify presence or absence of speech data bits. VAD is used with DTX. Videotex Access Point. Voice Broadcast Service. VBS allows the distribution of speech (or other signals which can be transmitted via the speech codec), generated by a service subscriber, into a predefined geographical area to all or a group of service subscribers located in this area.
VAD VAP VBS
11-84
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

VC VCI VCO See Virtual Circuit. Virtual Circuit Identifier ( ATM) Voltage Controlled Oscillator. An oscillator whose clock frequency is determined by the magnitude of the voltage presented at its input. The frequency changes when the voltage changes. Voltage Controlled Crystal Oscillator. Visual Display Unit. A device used for the real-time temporary display of computer output data. Monitor. Voice Group Call Service. Virtual Home Environment ( 3GTS 22.121, 3GTS 23.127) The Videotex service is an interactive service, that by means of proper access points and standardized procedures, provides the access to data base information stored in host computers external to the PLMN, via public telecommunication networks. A connection between two devices, that functions as though it is a direct connection, even though it may physically be circuitous. The term is used most frequently to describe connections between two hosts in a packet-switching network. Visitor Location Register. A GSM network element which provides a temporary register for subscriber information for a visiting subscriber. Often a part of the MSC. Very Large Scale Integration (in ICs). The process of placing between 100,000 and one million electronic components on a single chip. Visited MSC. (Recommendation not to be used). Abbreviation for voice-coder. A device that usually consists of a speech analyzer, which converts analog speech waveforms into narrowband digital signals, and a speech synthesizer, which converts the digital signals into artificial speech sounds. Voice Operated Transmission. An acoustoelectric transducer and a keying relay connected so that the keying relay is actuated when sound, or voice energy above a certain threshold is sensed by the transducer. A vox is used to eliminate the need for push-to-talk operation of a transmitter by using voice energy to turn on the transmitter Virtual Path Identifier ( ATM) Visited PLMN. Videotex Service Centre. Send state variable. Vehicular Speaker Phone.
VCXO VDU VGCS VHE Videotex
Virtual Circuit
VLR
VLSI
VMSC vocoder
VOX
VPI VPLMN VSC V(SD) VSP
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-85
Version 1 Rev 0

VSWR Voltage Standing Wave Ratio. In a transmission line, the ratio of maximum to minimum voltage in a standing wave pattern. Note: The VSWR is a measure of impedance mismatch between the transmission line and its load. The higher the VSWR, the greater the mismatch. The minimum VSWR, i.e., that which corresponds to a perfect impedance match, is unity. The components dedicated to Videotex service.
VTX host
W - WWW
WAN Wide Area Network. A physical or logical network that provides data communications to a larger number of independent users than are usually served by a LAN and is usually spread over a larger geographic area than that of a LAN. WANs may include physical networks, such as ISDN networks, X.25 networks, and T1 networks. Wireless Application Protocol Windows Internet Name Service Wireless Local Area Network ( IEEE 802.11) Wrong Password Attempts (counter). Some supplementary services have the option of the subscriber using a password. If a password check is done with an incorrect password, the WPA is incremented by one. If a password check is passed, the WPA is set to zero. If the WPA exceeds the value three, the subscriber will have to register a new password with the service provider. Work Station. The remote device via which O&M personnel execute input and output transactions for network management purposes. Work Station Function block. Window Size Number World Wide Web. An international, virtual-network-based information service composed of Internet host computers that provide on-line information in a specific hypertext format. WWW servers provide hypertext metalanguage (HTML) formatted documents using the hypertext transfer protocol, HTTP. Information on the WWW is accessed with a hypertext browser.
WAP WINS W-LAN WPA
WS
WSF WSN WWW
11-86
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
Version 1 Rev 0

X - X Window
X.25 X.25, adopted as a standard by the CCITT, is a commonly used protocol for public packet-switched networks (PSPDNS). The X.25 protocol allows computers on different public networks to communicate through an intermediary computer at the network layer level. The protocol corresponds closely to the data-link and physical-layer protocols defined in the OSI communication model. A communications link which conforms to X.25 specifications and uses X.25 protocol (NE to OMC links). Transcoder to BSS Link. The carrier communications link between the Transcoder (XCDR) and the BSS. Transceiver Control Board. Part of the Transceiver. Full-rate Transcoder. The XCDR is the digital signal processing equipment required to perform GSM-defined speech encoding and decoding. In terms of data transmission, the speech transcoder interfaces the 64 kbit/s PCM in the land network to the 13 kbit/s vocoder format used on the Air Interface. See also RXCDR. The circuit board required to perform speech transcoding at the BSS or (R)XCDR). Also known as the MSI (XCDR) board. Interchangeable with the GDP board. Transfer. eXchange IDentifier. X terminal window. A terminal emulator program for the X Window System. A user can have many different invocations of xterm running at once on the same display, each of which provides independent input and output for the process running in it (normally a shell). A specification for device-independent windowing operations on bitmap display devices.
X.25 link XBL XCB XCDR
XCDR board
XFER XID xterm
X Window
ZC
ZC Zone Code. Part of the RSZI. The ZC identifies a regional subscription zone as a pattern of allowed and not allowed location areas uniquely within a PLMN.
MOTOROLA LTD.2002
11-87
Version 1 Rev 0
11-88
MOTOROLA LTD.2002

Umts Guide

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Umts Guide

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

CP13 - Introduction to UMTS

CP13 - Introduction to UMTS

CP13 - Introduction to UMTS

Chapter 2: Network Architecture

CP13 - Introduction to UMTS

Chapter 3: Network Services

CP13 - Introduction to UMTS

Chapter 4: UMTS Protocols

CP13 - Introduction to UMTS

CP13 - Introduction to UMTS

Chapter 5: Data Flow and Terrestrial Interfaces

Chapter 6: W-CDMA Theory

CP13 - Introduction to UMTS

Chapter 7: The Physical Layer

CP13 - Introduction to UMTS

Chapter 8: Radio Resource Management Functions

CP13 - Introduction to UMTS

Chapter 9: HSDPA Overview

CP13 - Introduction to UMTS

Chapter 10: Annexe A

Chapter 11: Glossary

About This Manual

CP13 - Introduction to UMTS

Reporting safety issues

Reporting safety issues

Warnings and cautions

Warnings and cautions

Failure to comply with warnings

Devices sensitive to static

Devices sensitive to static

Special handling techniques

This page intentionally left blank.

Voice Text Video Conferencing Internet Graphics

TDMA (IS - 136)

GPRS 2.5G EDGE IS-95B

Research and Proposal

Research and Proposal

Research and Proposal

Research and Proposal

Permitted Carrier Combinations

Direct Sequence Configuration (SR3)

Multi-Carrier Configuration (SR3)

UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA)

UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA)

UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA)

UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA) UTRA FDD Mode

UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA)

UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA)

UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA)

UMTS Terrestrial Radio Access (UTRA)

World-wide Spectrum Allocation for IMT-2000

World-wide Spectrum Allocation for IMT-2000

World-wide Spectrum Allocation for IMT-2000

World-wide Spectrum Allocation for IMT-2000

IMT 2000 GSM 1800

Japan Korea (w/o PHS)

European Frequency Allocations

European Frequency Allocations

European Frequency Allocations

European Frequency Allocations

190MHz between uplink and down-link

Licence Allocation in the UK

Licence Allocation in the UK

Licence Allocation in the UK